Volvo Xc60 Owners Manual

VOLVO XC60

OWNERS MANUAL Web Edition

DEAR VOLVO OWNER

THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte- passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo nance information contained in this owner's manual. has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements. Table of contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Locks and alarm Important information...... 8 Seatbelts ...... 18 Remote control key/key blade...... 50 Volvo and the environment...... 13 Airbags...... 21 Battery replacement, remote control key/ Activating/deactivating the airbag*...... 24 PCC*...... 55 Side airbags (SIPS bags) ...... 26 Keyless drive*...... 57 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...... 28 Locking/unlocking...... 60 WHIPS ...... 29 Child safety locks...... 66 Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS...... 31 Alarm*...... 67 When the systems deploy ...... 32 Safety mode...... 33 00 Child safety01...... 34 02

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Table of contents

03 Your driving environment 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 Infotainment system Instruments and controls...... 72 Menus and messages...... 144 General information on infotainment...... 224 Volvo Sensus ...... 81 Menu source MY CAR...... 146 Quick start...... 226 Key positions...... 82 Climate control...... 154 General infotainment functions...... 231 Seats...... 84 Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- Radio...... 234 Steering wheel...... 89 senger compartment heater*...... 164 Media player...... 241 Lighting...... 90 Additional heater*...... 167 External audio source via AUX/USB* Wipers and washing...... 99 Trip computer...... 168 input...... 245 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 102 DSTC – Stability and traction control sys- Media Bluetooth * ...... 248 tem...... 170 Compass*...... 107 TV*...... 251 Adapting driving characteristics...... 172 Power panorama roof* ...... 108 Remote control* ...... 254 Cruise control*...... 173 Alcoguard*...... 111 Bluetooth handsfree*...... 256 Speed limiter ...... 175 Starting the engine...... 115 Voice recognition* mobile phone...... 264 Adaptive cruise control*...... 177 Starting the engine – external battery..... 117 RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system* 268 Distance Warning*...... 187 Gearboxes...... 118 Menu navigation, Infotainment...... 277 03 City04 Safety™...... 190 05 Eco DRIVe*...... 124 Collision Warning with Auto Brake & All-wheel drive – AWD*...... 129 Pedestrian detection*...... 194 Foot brake...... 130 Driver Alert System – DAC*...... 201 HDC Hill Descent Control...... 132 Driver Alert System - LDW*...... 204 Parking brake...... 134 Park assist syst*...... 207 HomeLink *...... 138 Park assist camera*...... 210 BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 213 Comfort inside the passenger compartment...... 217

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5 Table of contents

06 During your journey 07 Wheels and tyres 08 Maintenance and service Recommendations during driving...... 284 General ...... 308 Engine compartment...... 324 Refuelling...... 287 Changing wheels ...... 312 Lamps...... 331 Fuel...... 288 Tyre pressure ...... 315 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 337 Loading...... 291 Warning triangle and first-aid kit*...... 316 Battery...... 339 Cargo area...... 293 Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ...... 317 Fuses...... 344 Driving with a trailer...... 296 Car care...... 355 Towing06 and recovery...... 302 07 08

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Table of contents

09 Specifications 10 Alphabetical Index Type designations...... 362 Alphabetical Index...... 392 Dimensions and weights...... 364 Engine specifications...... 367 Engine oil...... 368 Fluids and lubricants...... 370 Fuel...... 372 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ...... 374 Electrical system...... 376 Type approval...... 377 Symbols09 in the display...... 389 10

7 Introduction

Important information

Reading the Owner's Manual In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- lighted in the owner's manual by means of the ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo text being slightly larger and printed in grey. Introduction dealer. Examples of this are in menu texts and mes- A good way of getting to know your new car is sage texts on the information display (e.g. to read the owner's manual, ideally before your Special texts Audio settings). first journey. This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions, to WARNING Decals see how best to handle the car in different sit- The car contains different types of decal which Warning texts advise of a risk of personal uations, and to make the best use of all the are designed to convey important information injury. car's features. Please pay attention to the in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the safety instructions contained in the manual. car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information. The specifications, design features and illus- IMPORTANT trations in this owner's manual are not binding. Important texts advise of a risk of material Warning for personal injury We reserve the right to make modifications damage. without prior notice. © Volvo Car Corporation NOTE Option NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- All types of option/accessory are marked with ple. an asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, this manual Footnote also describes options (factory fitted equip- There is footnote information in the owner's ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra manual that is located at the bottom of the equipment). page. This information is an addition to the text The equipment described in the owner's man- that it refers to via a number. If the footnote ual is not available in all cars - they have dif- refers to text in a table then letters are used G031590 ferent equipment depending on adaptations instead of numbers for referral. for the needs of different markets and national Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, or local laws and regulations. Message texts white text/image on black message field. Used There are displays in the car that show text to indicate the presence of danger which, if the messages. These text messages are high-

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Introduction

Important information warning is ignored, may result in serious per- Information Procedure lists sonal injury or fatality. Procedures where action must be taken in a Risk of property damage certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual. When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant. Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a move-

G031593 ment. If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-

G031592 White ISO symbols and white text/image on step instructions then the different steps are black message field. numbered with normal numbers. White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. NOTE Position lists Red circles containing a number are used Used to indicate the presence of danger which, The labels shown in the owner's manual are if the warning is ignored, may result in damage not provided as exact reproductions of in overview images where different com- to property. those in the car. The purpose is to show ponents are pointed out. The number their approximate appearance and location recurs in the position list featured in con- in the car. The information that applies to nection with the illustration that describes your car in particular is available on the label the item. in question in your car. Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual. Example:

9 Introduction

Important information

• Coolant way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi- applicable legal requirements. For further infor- • Engine oil cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use, mation - contact a Volvo dealer. steering wheel movement and whether or not To be continued the driver and passengers have used their Accessories and extra equipment This symbol is located furthest down to the seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa- The incorrect connection and installation of right when a section continues on the following tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers accessories can negatively affect the car's page. for a certain length of time, but also as a result of a collision or incident. This information may electrical system. Certain accessories only function when their associated software is Recording data be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to further develop and further enhance safety and installed in the car's computer system. Volvo Your vehicle contains a number of computers quality and as long as there are legal require- therefore recommends that you always con- whose function is to continuously check and ments and other regulations that Volvo needs tact an authorised Volvo workshop before monitor the vehicle's operation and function- to consider. installing accessories which are connected to ality. Some of the computers can record infor- or affect the electrical system. mation during normal driving if they detect an Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri- error. In addition, information is recorded in the bed information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. However, Change of ownership for cars with event of a crash or incident. Parts of the recor- Volvo On Call* ded information are required so that techni- due to national legislation and regulations cians can diagnose and rectify faults in the Volvo may be required to disclose such infor- Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that vehicle during servicing and maintenance and mation to authorities such as police authorities, consists of safety, security and comfort serv- so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and or others who may assert a legal right to have ices. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a other regulations. In addition to this, the infor- access to it. change of owner, it is very important that these services are discontinued so that the former mation is used for research purposes by Volvo To be able to read and interpret the information in order to continually develop quality and owner cannot access the services in the car. recorded by the computers in the vehicle Contact the call centre by pressing the ON safety, as the information can contribute to a requires special technical equipment that better understanding of the factors that cause CALL button in the car or contact an author- Volvo, and workshops that have entered into ised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing the accidents and injuries. The information agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo includes details of the status and functionality security code" in the owner's manual for Volvo is responsible that the information, which is On Call. of various systems and modules in the vehicle transferred to Volvo during servicing and main- with regard to engine, throttle, steering and tenance, is stored and handled in a secure brake systems, amongst other things. This manner and that the handling complies with information may include details regarding the

10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Introduction

Important information

Laser sensor exception of deviations in accordance with WARNING This vehicle is equipped with a sensor which "Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001. If any of these instructions are not followed transmits laser light. It is absolutely essential to Radiation data for the laser sensor then there is a risk of eye injury! follow the prescribed instructions when han- The following table specifies the laser sensor's dling the laser sensor. • Never look into the laser sensor (which physical data. emits spreading invisible laser radiation) The following two labels in English are fitted at a distance of 100 mm or closer with directly on the laser sensor unit: Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar opti- Maximum average output 45 mW cal instruments. Pulse duration 33 ns • Testing, repair, removal, adjustment and/or replacement of the laser sen- Divergence (horizontal x verti- 28° × 12° sor's spare parts must only be carried cal) out by a qualified workshop - we recommend an authorised Volvo workshop. • To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than those specified here. • The repairer must follow specially The upper label in the figure describes the laser drawn up workshop information for the beam's classification: laser sensor. • Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser • Do not remove the laser sensor (this beam with optical instruments - Class 1M includes removing the lenses). A laser product. removed laser sensor does not fulfil The lower label in the figure describes the laser laser class 3B as per standard IEC beam's physical data: 60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore entails a risk of injury. • IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) standards for laser product design with the

11 Introduction

Important information

• The laser sensor's connector must be unplugged before removal from the windscreen. • The laser sensor must be fitted onto the windscreen before the sensor's connector is plugged in. • The laser sensor transmits laser light when the remote control key is in position II and also with the engine switched off (see page 82 on key positions).

For more information on the laser sensor, see page 190.

Information on the Internet At www.volvocars.com there is further information concerning your car.

12 Introduction

Volvo and the environment

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy G000000

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- Fuel consumption many cases the exhaust emissions are well ration's core values which influence all opera- Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption below the applicable standards. tions. We also believe that our customers share in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel our consideration for the environment. consumption generally results in lower emis- Clean air in the passenger compartment sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide. A passenger compartment filter prevents dust Your Volvo complies with strict international and pollen from entering the passenger com- environmental standards and is also manufac- It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con- partment via the air intake. tured in one of the cleanest and most resource- sumption. For more information read under the efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo- heading, Reducing environmental impact. A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte- ration has global ISO certification, which rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom- includes the environmental standard ISO Efficient emission control ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out- 14001 covering all factories and several of our Your Volvo is manufactured following the con- side. other units. We also set requirements for our cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that The system consists of an electronic sensor partners so that they work systematically with encompasses a clean interior environment as and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- environmental issues. well as highly efficient emission control. In tored continuously and if there is an increase in

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 13 Introduction

Volvo and the environment

the level of certain unhealthy gases such as • Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the Recycling carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. engine when stationary for longer periods. As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, Pay attention to local regulations. important that the car is recycled in an envi- queues and tunnels for example. • Drive economically - think ahead. ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone • Perform service and maintenance in car can be recycled. The last owner of the car and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon accordance with the owner's manual's is therefore requested to contact a dealer for filter. instructions - follow the Service and War- referral to a certified/approved recycling ranty Booklet's recommended intervals. facility. Interior • If the car is equipped with an engine block The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- heater*, use it before starting from cold - it The owner's manual and the sant and comfortable, even for people with improves starting capacity and reduces environment contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. wear in cold weather and the engine rea- The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in Extreme attention has been given to choosing ches normal operating temperature more this publication comes from FSC certified for- environmentally-compatible materials. quickly, which lowers consumption and ests or other controlled sources. reduces emissions. Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions • High speed increases consumption considerably due to increased wind resistance for a long service life and low fuel consumption - a doubling of speed increases wind resis- for your car. In this way you contribute to a tance 4 times. cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and mainte- • Always dispose of environmentally hazar- nance of your car it becomes part of our sys- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in tem. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the an environmentally safe manner. Consult a way in which our workshops are designed in workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded order to prevent spills and discharges into the - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- environment. Our workshop staff have the mended. knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care. Following this advice can save money, the planet's resources are saved, and the car's Reducing environmental impact durability is extended. For more information You can easily help reduce environmental and further advice, see the pages 284 and impact - here are a few tips: 373.

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Introduction

15 Seatbelts ...... 18 Airbags...... 21 Activating/deactivating the airbag*...... 24 Side airbags (SIPS bags) ...... 26 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...... 28 WHIPS ...... 29 Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS...... 31 When the systems deploy ...... 32 Safety mode...... 33 Child safety...... 34

16 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY 01 Safety

01 Seatbelts

General information Releasing the seatbelt WARNING Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not Each seatbelt is designed for only one person. retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose. The seatbelt locks and cannot be with- WARNING drawn: Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an if it is pulled out too quickly • authorised Volvo workshop. during braking and acceleration • If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major • if the car leans heavily. load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some Make sure that you: of the protective characteristics of the seat- • do not use clips or anything else that can belt may have been lost, even if it appears Heavy braking can have serious consequences prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly to be undamaged. In addition, replace the if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The passengers use their seatbelts. • new seatbelt must be type-approved and caught on anything intended for installation in the same position It is important that the seatbelt lies against the • the hip strap must be positioned low down as the replaced seatbelt. body so it can provide maximum protection. (not over the abdomen) Do not lean the backrest too far back. The tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal • the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the seating position. shoulder. Putting on a seatbelt Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by press- WARNING ing its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked. belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. seat1.

1 Certain markets.

18 01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

Seatbelts and pregnancy and steering wheel). The aim should be to posi- Rear seat tion the seat with as large a distance as possi- The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two ble between abdomen and steering wheel. subfunctions: • Provides information on which seatbelts Seatbelt reminder are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the information display when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after pressing the indicator stalk's READ button. Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- G020998 • belts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message on The seatbelt should always be worn during the information display along with the pregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be worn audio/visual signal. The warning stops in the correct way. The diagonal section should G017726 when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can wrap over the shoulder then be routed between also be acknowledged manually by press- the breasts and to the side of the abdomen. Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten ing the READ button. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual The message on the information display show- and as low as possible under the abdomen. – reminder. The audio reminder is speed ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail- It must never be allowed to ride upward. dependent, and in some cases time depend- able. Press the READ button to see stored Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof messages. that it fits as close to the body as possible. In console and the combined instrument panel. addition, check that there are no twists in the Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt seatbelt. reminder system. As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals

19 01 Safety

01 Seatbelts

Certain markets An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds.

Seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten- sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants.

WARNING Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.

20 01 Safety

Airbags 01

Warning symbol on the combined As well as the warning symbol, a message may instrument panel appear on the information display in appropriate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS Airbag Service required or SRS Airbag Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

Airbag system G018666

Airbag system, right-hand drive car. The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors The warning symbol in the combined instru- and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To ment panel illuminates when the remote con- cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when trol key is in key position II or III. The symbol compressed. When this occurs, smoke clears after approx. 6 seconds provided the escapes into the car. This is completely nor- airbag system is fault-free. mal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of WARNING G018665 a second. If the warning symbol for the airbag system Airbag system, left-hand drive car. remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- WARNING ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- Volvo recommends that you contact an cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- authorised Volvo workshop for repair. tem, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault Defective work in the airbag system could in the system. Volvo recommends that you cause malfunction and result in serious per- contact an authorised Volvo workshop sonal injury. immediately.

21 01 Safety

01 Airbags

NOTE Passenger airbag The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen- not the seatbelts on the driver and passenger side. It is folded up into a compartment ger side are used. above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG. It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The airbag system senses the force of WARNING the collision on the car and adapts accordingly so that one or more airbags are To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deployed. deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and The capacity of the airbags is also adapted backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must to the collision force to which the vehicle is Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- be secured. subjected. hand drive car.

Airbag on the driver's side WARNING The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- Do not put objects in front of or above the tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's dashboard where the passenger airbag is side. It is folded up into the centre of the steer- located. ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.

WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- hand drive car.

22 01 Safety

Airbags 01

WARNING Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated. Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

23 01 Safety

01 Activating/deactivating the airbag*

Key switch off - PACOS* WARNING Activating/deactivating General information If the car is equipped with a front passenger The airbag for the front passenger seat can be airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag will always be activated. PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For information on how to activate/deactivate, see under the heading Activating/deactivating. WARNING Key switch off/switch Never place a child in a child seat or on a The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is located on the passenger end of the instru- is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this ment panel and is accessible when the pas- G032072 advice could endanger the life of the child. senger door is open (see under the heading below, Activating/deactivating). Switch location. WARNING The airbag is activated. With the switch in Check that the switch is in the required posi- this position, persons taller than 140 cm tion. Volvo recommends that the remote con- Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- can sit in the front passenger seat, but trol key's key blade be used to change posi- senger seat if the message in the roof panel never children in a child seat or on a (see page 25) indicates that the airbag is tion. booster cushion. deactivated and if the warning symbol for For information on the key blade, see the airbag system is also displayed in the The airbag is deactivated. With the switch page 53. combined instrument panel. This indicates in this position, children in a child seat or that there has been a severe malfunction. on a booster cushion can sit in the front WARNING Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo passenger seat, but never persons taller recommends that you contact an author- than 140 cm. Failure to follow the advice given above ised Volvo workshop. could endanger the life of passengers in the car.

24 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01

WARNING A text message and a symbol in the roof panel NOTE indicate that the airbag for the front passenger Activated airbag (passenger seat): seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration). When the remote control key is turned to key position II or III the warning symbol for Never place a child in a child seat or on a the airbag is displayed on the combined booster cushion on the front passenger seat instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds (see when the airbag is activated. This applies to page 21). everyone shorter than 140 cm. Following which, the indicator in the roof Deactivated airbag (passenger seat): console is illuminated showing the correct No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in status for the front passenger seat airbag. the front passenger seat when the airbag is For more information about the different key deactivated. positions for the remote control key, see page 82. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life. G017800 Messages Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated. A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates

2 that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).

2 G017724

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 25 01 Safety

01 Side airbags (SIPS bags)

Side airbag WARNING Location • Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. • Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag. • Volvo recommends the use only of car G024377 G032949 seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation Driver's seat, left-hand drive. In a side impact collision a large proportion of of the side airbags. the collision force is transferred by the SIPS • The side airbag is a supplement to the (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil- seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. lars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and front passenger seats protect the Child seats and side airbags chest area and the hip and are an important The protection provided by the car to children part of the SIPS. seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag. The SIPS bag system consists of two main components, side airbag and sensors. The A child seat or booster cushion can be placed side airbags are located in the front seat back- on the front passenger seat provided that the 1 rests. car does not have an activated passenger air- G024378 bag. Front passenger seat, left-hand drive. The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips

1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 24.

26 01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01 the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

27 01 Safety

01 Inflatable Curtain (IC)

Properties WARNING Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example). Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the the top edge of the door windows. Other- headlining along both sides of the roof and wise, the intended protection of the inflat- protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer able curtain, which is concealed in the head- seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the lining, may be compromised. sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the WARNING driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision. The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

28 01 Safety

WHIPS 01

Protection against whiplash injury – The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- Correct seating position WHIPS sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe- For the best possible protection, the driver and cially designed head restraints in the front front seat passenger should sit in the centre of seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end the seat with as little space as possible collision, where the angle and speed of the col- between the head and the head restraint. lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence. Do not obstruct the WHIPS system

WARNING The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury. Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the WARNING driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning. Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that WARNING you contact an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- WHIPS system and child seats/booster rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the cushions function of the WHIPS system. The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system.

29 01 Safety

01 WHIPS

WARNING If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop. Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end Do not place objects on the rear seat that may collision. prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.

30 01 Safety

Roll-Over Protection System - ROPS 01

Function Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) has been designed to reduce the risk of the car overturning and to provide the best possible protection in the event of such an accident. The system consists of a stabiliser system, Roll Stability Control (RSC) that minimises the risk of overturning, for example, during sudden evasive manoeuvres or if the car skids. The RSC system uses a sensor which registers changes in the car's lateral inclination angle. This information is used to calculate the risk of the car overturning. If a risk exists, the DSTC system engages, engine torque is lowered and one or more wheels are braked until the car has regained its stability. For more information on the DSTC system, see page 170 .

WARNING Under normal driving conditions, the RSC system improves the car's road safety, but this must not be taken as a reason to increase speed. Always follow the usual precautions for safe driving.

31 01 Safety

01 When the systems deploy

When the systems deploy • Recovering the car. Volvo recommends WARNING that you have it conveyed to an authorised System Triggered Volvo workshop. Do not drive with Never drive with deployed airbags. They deployed airbags. can make steering difficult. Other safety Seatbelt tensioner, In the event of a systems may also be damaged. The smoke front seat frontal collision, • Volvo recommends that you engage an and dust created when the airbags are and/or side-impact authorised Volvo workshop to handle the deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ collision, and/or replacement of components in the car's injury after intensive exposure. In case of rear-end collision safety systems. irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric and/or overturning • Always contact a doctor. may cause friction and skin burns. Seatbelt tensioner, In the event of a NOTE rear seat frontal collision and/ or overturning The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner systems are deployed only once during a colli- Airbags (SRS) In a frontal collisionA sion.

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accident WARNING The airbag control module is located in the Inflatable Curtain IC In the event of a centre console. If the centre console is side-impact colli- drenched with water or other liquid, discon- sion and/or over- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to turning start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that Whiplash protection In a rear-end colli- you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo WHIPS sion workshop.

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:

32 01 Safety

Safety mode 01

Driving after a collision effect that the ignition is on, press the start WARNING button. Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key. The car's electronics will Never, under any circumstances, attempt to now try to reset themselves to normal mode. restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is dis- Then try to start the car. played. Leave the car at once. If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the car must not WARNING be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery service used instead. Even if the car appears to be If the car is in safety mode it must not be driveable, hidden damage may make the car towed. It must be transported from its loca- impossible to control once moving. tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode If the car is involved in a collision, the text See manual has been reset, the car can be Safety mode See manual may appear on the moved carefully out of a dangerous position. information display. This means that the car Do not move the car further than necessary. has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a protective state that is enforced when the collision may have damaged any of the car's vital WARNING functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for Never attempt to repair your car or reset the one of the safety systems, or the brake system. electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal Attempting to start the car injury or the car not functioning as normal. First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. Volvo recommends that you engage an There must be no smell of fuel either. authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety If everything seems normal and you have mode See manual has been displayed. checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car. Remove the remote control key and open the driver's door. If a message is now shown to the

33 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Children should sit comfortably and NOTE beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam- safely age the straps. In the event of questions when fitting child Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- safety products, contact the manufacturer Look in the installation instructions for the child facing child seats until as late an age as pos- for clearer instructions. seat for the correct fitting. sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then front-facing booster cushions/child seats until Location of child seats up to 10 years of age. Child seats You may place: The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight • a child seat/booster cushion on the pas- and size, for more information, see page 36. senger seat, provided the passenger airbag is not activated1. NOTE • one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat. Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the try. Check what does apply. rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the Children of all ages and sizes must always sit

G020739 airbag deploys. correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger. Child seats and airbags are not compatible. Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which NOTE is designed for your particular car. Using Vol- When using child safety products it is vo's child safety equipment provides you with important to read the installation instruc- optimum conditions for your child to travel tions included. safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use. Do not attach the straps for the child seat to the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 24.

34 01 Safety

Child safety 01

WARNING WARNING Label Airbag Never place a child in a child seat or on a Booster cushions/child seats with steel booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag braces or some other design that could rest (SRS) is activated. on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit seatbelt buckle to open accidentally. in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated. Do not allow the upper section of the child Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel seat to rest against the windscreen. Failure to follow the advice given above can on the passenger side, see the illustration on page endanger life. 24.

35 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Recommended child seats2 Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat bag) Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the max 10 kg ISOFIX fixture system. Group 0+ Type approval: E5 03301146 max 13 kg (L)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the rear-facing child seat, secured with the rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. car's seatbelt. car's seatbelt. Type approval: E1 04301146 Type approval: E1 03301146 Type approval: E1 03301146 (U) (U) (U)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the rear-facing child seat, secured with the rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a pro- car's seatbelt and straps. car's seatbelt and straps. tective cushion between the child seat Type approval: E5 03135 Type approval: E5 03135 and the dashboard. (L) (L) Type approval: E5 03135 (L)

Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally approved. approved. approved. (U) (U) (U)

2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

36 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat bag) Group 1 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- 9-18 kg facing child seat, secured with the facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. car's seatbelt and straps. Type approval: E5 04192 Type approval: E5 04192 (L) (L)

Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps. Type approval: E5 03171 (L)

Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally Child seats which are universally approved. approved. approved. (U) (U) (U)

37 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat bag) Group 2 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear- 15-25 kg facing child seat, secured with the facing child seat, secured with the facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps car's seatbelt and straps car's seatbelt and straps Type approval: E5 04192 Type approval: E5 04192 Type approval: E5 04192 (L) (L) (L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front- facing child seat, secured with the facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. car's seatbelt. Type approval: E5 04191 Type approval: E5 04191 (L) (L)

38 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Weight Front seat (with deactivated air- Outer rear seat Centre rear seat bag) Group 2/3 Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo booster seat with backrest Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest). (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest). (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest). 15-36 kg Type approval: E1 04301169 Type approval: E1 04301169 Type approval: E1 04301169 (UF) (UF) (UF)

Booster cushion with and without Booster cushion with and without Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and backrest (Booster Cushion with and backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest). without backrest). without backrest). Type approval: E5 03139 Type approval: E5 03139 Type approval: E5 03139 (UF) (UF) (UF)

Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option. Type approval: E5 03168 (B)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories. U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class. UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class. B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.

39 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Integrated two-stage booster The booster cushions are specially designed to Raising the two-stage booster cushion provide optimum safety. In combination with cushions* Stage 1 the seatbelt they are approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are at least 95 cm in height. Check before driving that: • the 2-stage integrated booster cushion is correctly set (see table below) and in locked position • the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted • the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder (see preced- Correct position, the seatbelt should be posi- ing illustrations) tioned in on the shoulder. • the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned Pull the handle forward and up in order to low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro- release the booster cushion. tection. Stage 1 Stage 2 Weight 22-36 kg 15-25 kg

Incorrect position, the head restraint must be adjusted as high as the head and the seatbelt must not be below the shoulder.

40 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Press the booster cushion backwards to Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge the booster cushion from the upper stage to lock. and press it back against the backrest to lock. the lower stage. Stage 2 WARNING Volvo recommends that repair or replacement is only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion. If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protection. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn. Pull the handle forwards to release the Start from the lower stage. Press the but- cushion. ton. NOTE It is not possible to adjust the booster cushion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset by being fully folded into the seat cushion. Refer to the heading below, Low- ering the two-stage booster cushion.

Lowering the two-stage booster cushion Lowering can take place from both the upper and lower stage to fully lowered position in the cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust

41 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Press down with your hand in the centre of ISOFIX fixture system for child seats Consequently, there is a size classification for the cushion in order to lock it. child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in order to assist users in choosing the correct WARNING child seat (see the following table). If the instructions regarding the two-stage booster cushion are not followed then this Size Description could cause serious injury to a child in the class event of an accident. A Full size, front-facing child seat IMPORTANT B Reduced size (alt. 1), front- Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. facing child seat toys) left behind in the space under the cushion before lowering. B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front- Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system facing child seat are concealed behind the lower section of the NOTE rear seat backrest, in the outer seats. C Full size, rear-facing child The booster cushion must be lowered first The location of the mounting points is indicated seat when lowering the backrest. by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre- D Reduced size, rear-facing ceding illustration). child seat Child safety locks, rear doors Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points. E Rear-facing infant seat The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles Always follow the manufacturer's installation F Transverse infant seat, left- can be blocked from opening from the inside. instructions when connecting a child seat to hand For more information, see page 66. the ISOFIX mounting points. G Transverse infant seat, right- Size classes hand Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.

42 01 Safety

Child safety 01

WARNING NOTE Never place a child in the passenger seat if Volvo recommends that you contact an the car is equipped with an activated airbag. authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends. NOTE If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification then the car model must be included on the child seat's vehicle list.

Types of ISOFIX child seat Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Front seat Outer rear seat Infant seat transverse max 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max 10 kg E X OK (IL)

43 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Front seat Outer rear seat Infant seat, rear-facing max 13 kg E X OK (IL)

D X OK (IL)

C X OK (IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK (IL)

C X OK (IL)

44 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKA (IUL)

B1 X OKA (IUL)

A X OKA (IUL)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class. IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories. IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

45 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Upper mounting points for child seats NOTE For cars equipped with a cargo area cover over the cargo area, this must be removed before a child seat can be fitted in the mounting points.

For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING The child seat's straps must always be The car is equipped with upper mounting drawn through the hole in the head restraint points for certain front-facing child seats. leg before they are tensioned at the attach- These mounting points are located on the rear ment point. of the seat. The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age as possible.

NOTE For cars with folding head restraints on the outside seats the head restraints should be folded to facilitate the installation of this type of child seat.

46 01 Safety

47 Remote control key/key blade...... 50 Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...... 55 Keyless drive*...... 57 Locking/unlocking...... 60 Child safety locks...... 66 Alarm*...... 67

48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM 02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

General control key must be erased from the system as • Locking - one flash and the door mirrors 2 The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys a theft prevention measure. are folded in. 02 or PCCs (Personal Car Communicator). They The current number of keys registered to the • Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir- are used to start the car and for locking and car can be checked in the menu system MY rors are folded2 out. unlocking. CAR under Information Number of keys. After locking the indication is only given if all More remote control keys can be ordered – up For a description of the menu system, see locks have been activated once the doors have to 6 can be programmed and used for the same page 146. been closed. car. Key memory1 – door mirrors and driver's Selecting the function Different options for indicating locking/unlock- The PCC has increased functionality com- seat pared with the remote control key. The contin- ing with light can be set in the car's menu sys- The settings are automatically connected to uation of this chapter describes the functions tem, see page 146. each respective remote control key, see pages available in both the PCC and the remote con- 85 and 104. Search in the menu system MY CAR for trol key. The function can be activated/deactivated in Settings Car settings Light settings and select Lock confirmation light and/or WARNING the menu system MY CAR under Settings Unlock confirmation light. If there are children in the car: Car settings Car key memory. Immobiliser Always remember to switch off the power For a description of the menu system, see supply to power windows and sunroof by page 146. Each remote control key has a unique code. removing the remote control key if the driver The car can only be driven with the correct leaves the car. For cars with Keyless drive system, see remote control key with the correct code. page 57. The following error messages in the combined Loss of a remote control key Indicator for locking/unlocking instrument panel's information display are rela- If you lose a remote control key then new ones When the car is locked or unlocked using the ted to the electronic immobiliser: can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised remote control key, the direction indicators Volvo workshop is recommended. The remain- confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly ing remote control keys must then be taken to performed. the workshop. The code of the missing remote

1 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors. 2 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.

50 02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

Message Specification Functions Key error Reinsert Error reading the 02 key remote control key during starting - Remove the key, reinsert it and try to start again.

Car key not found Error reading the PCC during starting (Only applies to Key- - Try to start again. G021079 less drive with PCC.) If the error persists: G021078 Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car Communicator. Insert the remote Remote control key, standard version. key into the ignition Locking Information switch and try to start again. Unlocking Function buttons Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate Immobiliser Try Error in immobiliser Approach light duration while the alarm is activated. start again system during star- Tailgate ting. If the fault per- Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close all sists the recommen- Panic function the windows and sunroof* simultaneously. dation is to contact an authorised Volvo WARNING workshop. If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key, check that no one is For starting the car, see page 115. in danger of getting hands caught.

Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51 02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open all 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off Unique PCC functions* windows simultaneously. automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds. 02 The function can be changed from unlocking Range all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driv- The remote key's functions have a range of er's door only with one press of the button and, about 20 m from the car. after a further press of the button - within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining doors. If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again. The function can be changed in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings NOTE Lock settings Doors unlock with both The remote control key functions can be the alternatives All doors and Enter current

disrupted by surrounding radio waves, G021080 PIN. For a description of the menu system, see buildings, topographical conditions etc. The page 146. car can always be locked/unlocked using Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car the key blade, see page 53. Communicator. Approach light duration – Used to switch Information button on the car's lighting at a distance. For more information, see page 95. Indicator lamps Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm Using the information button enables access to for the tailgate only. On cars with power tail- certain information from the car via the indica- gate* the tailgate is opened after the button is tor lamps. kept depressed. For more information, see page 62. Using the information button Press the information button . Panic function – Used to attract attention > All indicator lamps flash for approxi- in an emergency. mately 7 seconds and the light travels Press and hold the button for at least 3 sec- around on the PCC. This indicates that onds or press it twice within 3 seconds to acti- information from the car has been read. vate the direction indicators and the horn. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least

52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

If any of the other buttons are pressed Red continuous light – the alarm has been NOTE during this time then the reading is inter- triggered since the car was locked. If no indicator lamps illuminate when 02 rupted. Red light flashing alternately in both indi- the information button is used within range cator lamps – The alarm was triggered less then this may be because the last commu- NOTE than 5 minutes ago. nication between the PCC and the car was If none of the indicator lamps illumi- disrupted by surrounding radio waves, Range PCC buildings, topographical conditions etc. nates with repeated use of the information The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has trav- tailgate is about 20 m from the car - for other elled around on the PCC), contact a work- functions up to about 100 m. Detachable key blade shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- If the car does not verify a button being pressed ommended. A remote control key contains a detachable - move closer and try again. key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried Indicator lamps display information in accord- NOTE out. ance with the following illustration: The information button functions can be The key blade's unique code is provided by disrupted by surrounding radio waves, authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec- buildings, topographical conditions etc. ommended when ordering new key blades.

Out of PCC range Key blade functions If the PCC is too far away from the car for the Using the remote control key's detachable key information to be read then the status the car blade: was last left in is shown, without the light trav- • the driver's door can be opened manually elling around on the PCC. if central locking cannot be activated with If several PCCs are used for the car then it is the remote control key, see page 58. only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking • the rear doors' mechanical child safety that shows correct status. locks can be activated/deactivated, see page 66. Green continuous light – the car is locked. Yellow continuous light – the car is unlocked.

53 02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

• access to the glovebox can be blocked. 2. Lightly press the key blade. You should the airbag for front passenger seat hear a "click" when the key blade is locked 02 • (PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated, in. see page 24. Unlocking doors with the key blade Removing the key blade If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are discharged - then the driver's door can be opened as follows: 1. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade in the door handle's lock cylinder. See also the figure and further information on page see page 58.

NOTE G021082 When the door has been unlocked using the Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side. key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards. 2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch. Attaching the key blade Carefully refit the key blade into its location in For a car with the Keyless system, see the remote control key. page 58. 1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

54 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

Replacing the battery Battery replacement The batteries should be replaced if: Closely study how the battery/batteries are secured on the inside of the cover, with 02 the information symbol is illuminated and • regard to their (+) and (–) sides. the display shows Low battery in remote control. Please change batteries. Remove control key (1 battery) and/or 1. Carefully prize out the battery. 2. Install a new one with the (+) side down. • the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within PCC* (2 batteries) 20 metres from the car. 1. Carefully prize out the batteries. Opening 2. First install one new one with the (+) side Slide the spring-loaded catch to the up. side. 3. Position the white plastic tab in between At the same time pull the key blade and finally install a second new battery with straight out backwards. the (+) side down. Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the Battery type hole behind the spring-loaded catch and Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V gently prize the remote control key up. - one in the remote control key and two in the PCC. NOTE Assembly Turn the remote control key over with the 1. Press the remote control key together. buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened. 2. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot. IMPORTANT 3. Lightly press the key blade. You should Avoid touching the battery and its terminals hear a "click" when the key blade is locked with your fingers, as this could damage their in. functionality.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55 02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*

IMPORTANT 02 Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally-friendly way.

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Keyless lock and ignition system (only the car door handle or tailgate. This means that reactivated. It is therefore important to handle PCC1) the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door all PCCs with great care. must have the PCC with him or her. It is not 02 General possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is IMPORTANT on the opposite side of the car. Never leave a PCC behind in the car. The red rings in the preceding illustration indicate the range covered by the system's anten- Interference to PCC function nas. Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter- If all PCCs are removed from the car when the fere with the keyless drive system. For this rea- engine is running or key position II is active son, do not place the PCC near mobile phones (see page 82) and if all doors are closed, then or metallic objects. a warning message is shown in the information If interference is experienced nonetheless, use display and an audio reminder signal sounds at the PCC and the key blade as a remote control the same time. key, see page 51. The warning message clears and the audio The keyless drive function in the PCC allows reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought the car to be unlocked, driven and locked with- back to the car after: out the need for a key. You simply have to have • a door has been opened and closed the PCC with you. The system makes it easier • the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch and more convenient to open the car, e.g. when your hands are full. • the READ button has been pressed. Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the Keyless Handling the PCC safely function. Additional PCCs can be ordered, see If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the page 50. car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry. PCC range However, if someone breaks into the car, In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from

1 Personal Car Communicator, see page 52.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Locking Unlocking 1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a up into the hole on the underside of the 02 door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pres- door handle/cover - do not prize. sure plate is actuated - open the door or tail- > The plastic cover loosens automatically gate as normal. by means of the torque when the blade Unlocking with the key blade is pushed straight up and into the opening. 2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and unlock the door. 3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.

NOTE Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles. When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the gered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC lock button on one of the door handles on the in the ignition switch, see page 68. outside. All doors and the tailgate must be closed Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover. Key memory2 – driver's seat and door before the car can be locked - otherwise the If central locking cannot be activated with the mirrors car is not locked. PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then PCC memory function NOTE the driver's door can be opened with the PCC's If several people each with a PCC approach the detachable key blade (see page 53). car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are On cars with automatic transmission, the implemented for the person who opens the gear selector must be set in the P position To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's driver's door. – otherwise the car cannot be locked or the plastic cover must be removed - this is also alarm armed. done with the key blade: After the driver's door has been opened by person A with PCC-A, but person B with PCC-

2 Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.

58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

B shall drive, the settings can be changed in Antenna location WARNING three ways: People with pacemaker operations should 02 • Standing by the driver's door, or sitting not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless behind the steering wheel, person B system's antennae with their pacemaker. presses their PCC's unlock button, see This is to prevent interference between the page 51. pacemaker and the keyless system. • Select one of three possible memories for seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see page 85. • Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see page 85 and 104. G021179 Lock settings The Keyless function can be adapted by indi- The keyless system has a number of integrated cating in the menu system MY CAR which antennae located around the car: doors shall be unlocked, under Car settings Lock settings Keyless entry - there Tailgate, by wiper motor select between All doors unlock, Any door, Door handle, left rear Doors on same side and Both front doors. Roof, centre above rear seat For a description of the menu system, see page 146. Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor Door handle, right rear Centre console, under the rear section Centre console, under the front section.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 59 02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

From the outside WARNING From the inside The remote control key can lock/unlock all 02 Be aware of the risk of being locked in the Central locking doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different car when it is locked from the outside using sequences for unlocking can be selected, see the remote control key - it is then not pos- "Unlocking with the remote control key" page sible to open any of the doors from the 51. inside with the door controls. Read more about this in the section "Deadlocks" later In order that the lock sequence can be action. vated, the driver's door must be closed - if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated Automatic relocking only when it/they are closed. With the Key- If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened less* system all the doors and tailgate must be within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked closed. again automatically. This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. NOTE (For cars with alarm, see page 67.) Central locking. Be aware of the risk of locking the remote All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked control key in the car. or unlocked simultaneously using the central locking button on either front door. If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be dis- • Press one side of the button to lock - charged - lock or unlock the driver's door with the other side to unlock. the detachable key blade, see page 53. Unlocking NOTE A door can be unlocked from the inside in two Remember that the alarm is triggered when different ways: the door is opened after being unlocked • Press the central locking button . with the key blade - the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also into the ignition switch. open all the side windows* simultaneously.

60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

• Pull the door handle once and release - the Glovebox Tailgate door is unlocked. Pull the door handle again to open the door. Manual opening 02 Locking • Press the central locking button after the front doors have been closed. Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also close all the side windows and the sunroof* simultaneously. All doors can also be individually locked manually with their lock buttons - the door in question must then be closed.

Global opening The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked using the remote control key's detachable key Rubber plate with electrical contact. Press and hold the central locking button blade. For information on the key blade, see The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. (at least 4 seconds) to also open all the win- page 53. dows simultaneously - for example, to quickly To open: ventilate the passenger compartment during Locking the glovebox: 1. Push down gently on the rubberised pres- hot weather. Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock sure plate under the outer handle - the lock cylinder. is released. Automatic locking The doors and tailgate are locked automati- Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. 2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open cally when the car starts to move. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked the tailgate. position. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Pull out the key blade. Car settings Lock settings Doors • Unlock by carrying this out in reverse automatic lock. For a description of the menu order. system, see page 146.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61 02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

IMPORTANT armed. The alarm's level and movement sen- Locking with the remote control key sors and the sensors for opening the tailgate Press the remote control key's button for 02 Minimal force is required to release the • are disconnected. locking, , see page 51. rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel. The doors remain locked and armed. > If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm indicator on the instrument panel • Do not place the lift force on the rubber • The tailgate is unlocked, but remains panel when opening the rear hatch - lift closed - press lightly on the rubberised starts to flash, which means that the the handle. Using too much force may pressure plate under the outer handle and alarm is armed. damage the electrical contact for the lift the tailgate. rubber panel. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes Power operated tailgate* then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed. Unlocking with the remote control key Unlocking the car from inside G031965

NOTE The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and Consider the roof height when using elec- To unlock the tailgate: the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the trical operation. Do not use electrical oper- remote control key's button. Press the lighting panel button (1). ation of the tailgate under a low roof height, see under the heading "Interrupt opening/ If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm > The tailgate is unlocked and can be closing of tailgate". indicator on the instrument panel stops to opened within 2 minutes (if the car is show that alarm for the whole of the car is not locked from the inside).

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

NOTE Pinch protection • Long press on the button in the lighting If something with sufficient resistance prevents panel - hold the button depressed until the • If the system has been operating con- the tailgate from opening/closing then the tailgate starts to open. 02 tinuously for a long time, it is switched pinch protection is activated. Long press on the button on the remote off to avoid overload. It can be used • control key - hold the button depressed again after about 2 minutes. • During opening - power tailgate operation is deactivated and the tailgate is disen- until the tailgate starts to open. • If the battery has been discharged or gaged. Push down gently on the rubberised pres- disconnected then the tailgate must be • sure plate under the outer handle. opened and closed again to reset the • When closing - the tailgate stops and system. backs off from the obstacle a couple of Closing the tailgate centimetres. Close using this button on the tailgate Programmable max. opening or manually. WARNING Tailgate maximum opening position can be • Press the button – the tailgate closes auto- programmed. Can be used for e.g. low roof Pay attention to the risk of crushing when matically. height in a garage. Proceed as follows: opening/closing. Before starting to open/ close; make sure that there is nobody close Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate • Open the tailgate manually, hold it in the to the tailgate as a crushing injury could This can be done four ways (of which desired position and give the button on the have serious consequences. tailgate one long press (at least 3 seconds) three involve this button): Always operate the tailgate with caution. and then release the tailgate - the pro- • Press the lighting panel button gramming is complete. • Press the remote control key button Opening the tailgate • To clear the programming - move the tail- • Press the tailgate's button gate manually to a higher position. The tailgate can be opened three ways (two of which involve this but- • Press the rubberised pressure plate Snow and wind ton): beneath the outside handle. If the tailgate is forced down by something just - The tailgate's movement is interrupted and it when it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice or stops. strong wind, and this causes the tailgate to lower, then it is closed automatically.

63 02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

Manual tailgate operation WARNING the deadlocks function can be temporarily The system is disengaged if the opening/clos- switched off. This is carried out as follows: 02 ing sequence is interrupted in accordance with Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in 1. Access the menu system MY CAR under the preceding section. order to avoid the risk of anyone being Settings Car settings Reduced • The tailgate can then be operated man- locked in. guard (for a detailed description of the ually. menu system, see page 146). Temporary deactivation 2. Select Activate once. 1 Deadlocks* > The instrument panel display shows the Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and message Reduced guard See door handles are mechanically disengaged, manual and the deadlocks function is which prevents doors being opened from the switched off when the car is locked. inside. or The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and are set after an approximately Select Ask on exit. 10 second delay after the doors have been > Each time the engine is switched off the locked. centre console display screen shows the message Activate Reduced Guard NOTE until engine has started again? followed by the alternatives Confirm with If a door is opened within the delay time then Active menu options are indicated with a cross. OK and Cancel with EXIT. the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is MY CAR deactivated. If the deadlocks function shall be switched OK MENU off The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock TUNE knob control Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note state with the remote control key. The driver's that the alarm's movement and tilt detec- EXIT door can also be unlocked with the detachable tors* are switched off at the same time, see key blade. If someone is going to stay in the car but the page 68.) doors must be locked from the outside, then

1 Only in combination with alarm.

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

> The next time the engine is started, the system is reset to zero and the instrument panel display shows the message 02 Full guard at which the deadlocks function and the alarm's movement and tilt detectors are re-engaged. If the locking system shall not be changed Press EXIT and lock the car.

NOTE • Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked. • If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered.

65 02 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

Manual blocking of the rear doors NOTE 1. Start the engine or choose a key position The child safety locks prevent children from higher than 0. 02 A door's knob control only blocks that opening a rear door from the inside. • particular door - not both rear doors 2. Press the button in the driver's door control simultaneously. panel. • Cars with an electric child safety lock do > The information display shows the mes- not have a manual child lock. sage Rear child locks Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active. Electrical locking of the rear doors* When the electric child safety lock is active and power windows then the rear: • windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel • doors cannot be opened from inside. G021077 The current setting is stored when the engine The child safety locks are located on the trailing is switched off - if the child safety locks are edge of the rear doors and are only accessible activated at engine shutdown, the function will when the doors are open. remain activated the next time the engine is started. To activate/deactivate the child safety locks: Use the remote control key's detachable key blade to turn the knob - see page 53. Control panel driver's door. The door is blocked against opening from the inside. The child safety locks can be activated/deactivated in all key positions higher than 0 - see The door can be opened from both the page 82. Activation/deactivation can be per- outside and the inside. formed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened. To activate the child safety locks:

66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

General NOTE Alarm indicator Activated alarm is triggered if: The movement sensors trigger an alarm in 02 • a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also regis- a movement is detected in the passenger • tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered compartment (if fitted with a movement if the car is left with a window or the sunroof detector*) open or if the passenger compartment • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted heater is used. with a tilt detector*) To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof • the battery's cable is disconnected when leaving the car. If the car's integrated passenger compartment heater (or a porta- • the siren is disconnected. ble electric heater) shall be used - direct the If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor- airflow from the air vents so that they are not mation display shows a message. In which pointing upwards in the passenger com- case, contact a workshop - an authorised partment. A red LED on the instrument panel indicates Volvo workshop is recommended. the alarm system's status: NOTE • LED not lit – Alarm not armed One of the detectors for the alarm is located • The LED flashes once every other second under the cup holder in the centre console. – Alarm is armed This detector is sensitive for metals. • The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal alarm (and until the remote control key is objects in the centre console's cup holder inserted in the ignition switch and key posi- as such objects could accidentally trigger tion I is selected) – Alarm has been trig- the alarm. gered. Arming the alarm NOTE Press the remote control key lock button. Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts Deactivate the alarm could affect the terms of insurance. Press the remote control key unlock button.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67 02 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

Deactivating a triggered alarm Reduced alarm level Press the remote control key unlock button To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm - 02 or insert the remote control key in the igni- e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during tion switch. transport on a car train or car ferry - the movement and tilt detectors should be temporarily Other alarm functions deactivated. The procedure is the same as with the tempo- Automatic re-arming of the alarm rary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 64. This function prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally. If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- switch. armed. The car is relocked at the same time. > The alarm is deactivated and the alarm indicator goes out. Remote control key not working If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the 3. Start the engine. remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is discharged - the car can be unlocked, dis- Alarm signals armed and the engine started as follows: When the alarm is triggered, the following happens: 1. Open the driver's door with the detachable A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the key blade - see page 58. • alarm is switched off. The siren has its own > The alarm is triggered, the alarm indica- battery and works independently of the car tor flashes rapidly and the siren sounds. battery. • The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Locks and alarm

69 Instruments and controls...... 72 Volvo Sensus ...... 81 Key positions...... 82 Seats...... 84 Steering wheel...... 89 Lighting...... 90 Wipers and washing...... 99 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 102 Compass*...... 107 Power panorama roof* ...... 108 Alcoguard*...... 111 Starting the engine...... 115 Starting the engine – external battery...... 117 Gearboxes...... 118 Eco DRIVe*...... 124 All-wheel drive – AWD*...... 129 Foot brake...... 130 HDC Hill Descent Control...... 132 Parking brake...... 134 HomeLink *...... 138

70 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

Left-hand drive.

72 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Menus and messages, 90, Control for infotainment 146, 277 direction indicators, 93, 144, and menu control main/dipped beam, trip 168 computer Control panel for climate 154 control 03 Cruise control 173, 177 Gear selector 118 Horn, airbags 22, 89 Controls for active chas- 172 Combined instrument 75, 79 sis (Four-C)* panel Wipers and washing 99, 100 Menu, audio and phone 146, control 228, 256, Steering wheel adjust- 89 277 ment

START/STOP ENGINE 115 Bonnet opener 324 key Parking brake 134 Ignition switch 82 Headlamp control, 61, 90, Display for infotainment 146, opener for fuel filler flap 287 and menus 227, 277 and tailgate

Door handle – Seat adjustment* 85

Control panel 60, 66, 102, 104

Hazard warning flashers 93

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Right-hand drive.

74 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Information displays Display for infotainment 146, Parking brake 134 and menus 227, 277 Bonnet opener 324 Ignition switch 82 Steering wheel adjust- 89 03 START/STOP ENGINE 115 ment key Menus and messages, 90, Cruise control 173, 177 direction indicators, 93, 144, main/dipped beam, trip 168 Combined instrument 75, 79 computer panel Gear selector 118 Horn, airbags 22, 89 The information displays show information on Controls for active chas- 172 some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control, Menu, audio and phone 146, sis (Four-C)* trip computer and messages. The information control 228, 256, is shown with text and symbols. 277 Control panel for climate 154 There are further descriptions under the func- control Wipers and washing 99, 100 tions that use the information displays. Control for infotainment 146, 277 Door handle – and menu control

Control panel 60, 66, Hazard warning flashers 93 102, 104

Seat adjustment* 85

Headlamp control, 61, 90, opener for fuel filler flap 287 and tailgate

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Meters Indicator, information and warning If the engine does not start or if the functionality symbols check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.

03 Indicator and information symbols Symbol Specification ABL fault

Emissions system

Meters in the combined instrument panel. ABS fault Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols. Main beam and direction indicator symbol Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page Rear fog lamp on 168, and Refuelling, page 287. Indicator and warning symbols1 Stability system Tachometer. The meter indicates engine Symbol for DRIVe - Start/Stop*, see speed in thousands of revolutions per page 124 minute (rpm). Stability system, sport mode Indicator and information symbols

Functionality check Engine preheater (diesel) All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. Low level in fuel tank When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake sym- Information, read display text bol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 325.

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Specification checked. Volvo recommends that you Information, read display text seek assistance from an authorised Volvo When one of the car's systems does not Main beam On workshop. behave as intended, this information symbol Rear fog lamp on illuminates and a text appears on the informa- Left-hand direction indicators This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp tion display. The message text is cleared with is on. There is only one fog lamp. It is located the READ button, see page 144, or it disap- on the driver's side. pears automatically after a time (time depend- 03 Right-hand direction indicators ing on which function is indicated). The infor- Stability system mation symbol can also illuminate in conjunc- DRIVe - Start/Stop* A flashing symbol indicates that the stability tion with other symbols. system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the NOTE ABL fault system. The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in Stability system, Sport mode When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the the ABL function (Active Bending Lights). Sport mode allows for a more active driving READ button, or clear automatically after a Emissions system experience. The system then detects whether while. If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to Main beam On a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level The symbol illuminates when main beam is on that you seek assistance from an authorised and with main beam flash. Volvo workshop. before it intervenes and stabilises the car. Left/right-hand direction indicators ABS fault Engine preheater (diesel)* This symbol illuminates during engine preheat- Both direction indicator symbols flash when If this symbol illuminates then the system is not the hazard warning flashers are used. working. The car's regular brake system con- ing. Preheating occurs when the temperature tinues to work, but without the ABS function. is below 2 °C. The car can be started once the symbol goes out. 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine. Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the 2. Restart the engine. fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible. 3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a workshop to have the ABS system

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols Parking brake applied and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 329. Symbol Specification This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. The symbol If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the Low oil pressureA flashes during application, and then changes same time, there may be a fault in the brake over to a constant glow. force distribution system. Parking brake applied A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. 03 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the Read the message on the information display. engine. Airbags – SRS Airbags – SRS 2. Restart the engine. If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates If both symbols extinguish, continue Seatbelt reminder while driving, it means a fault has been • detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or driving. IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop • If the symbols remain illuminated, check Alternator not charging to have the system checked. Volvo recom- the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see mends that you seek assistance from an page 329. If the brake fluid level is nor- Fault in brake system authorised Volvo workshop. mal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to Seatbelt reminder a workshop to have the brake system Warning This symbol illuminates if someone in a front checked. Volvo recommends that you seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone seek assistance from an authorised A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt. Volvo workshop. is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages 325 and 327. Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault WARNING Low oil pressure has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the If this symbol illuminates during driving then workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further assistance from an authorised Volvo work- before topping up the brake fluid. engine immediately and check the engine oil shop. level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi- The loss of brake fluid must be investigated nates and the oil level is normal, contact a Fault in brake system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level contact an authorised Volvo workshop. assistance from an authorised Volvo work- may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place shop.

78 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

WARNING atory text message in the combined instrument Display for trip meter panel. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi- possible and close the door, bonnet or boot lid, Controls for switching between trip meters nated at the same time, there is a risk that whichever is open. T1 and T2, as well as resetting the trip the rear end will skid during heavy braking. meters. If the car is driven at a speed lower than The meters are used to measure short dis- approx. 7 km/h then the information Warning tances. symbol illuminates. 03 The red warning symbol illuminates when a One short press on the control switches fault has been indicated which could affect the If the car is driven at a speed higher between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan- than approx. 7 km/h then the warning press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active atory text is shown on the information display symbol illuminates. trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in the at the same time. The symbol remains visible display. until the fault has been rectified but the text Trip meter message can be cleared with the READ button, see page 144. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols. Action: 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car further. 2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear the message using the READ button. Reminder – doors not closed Trip meter and controls. If one of the doors, the bonnet2 or tailgate is not closed properly then the information or warning symbol illuminates together with an explan-

2 Only cars with alarm*.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Clock group MY CAR, for more information see page 146.

Clock and setting knob. Display for showing the time. 1. Locate Settings System options Controls for setting the clock. Time. Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set 2. The cursor is located in the first box for the clock. Turn first to the end position and then Hour: Press OK - the box is activated. turn past/over the end position a further 3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and approx. 1 mm - a "click" sounds and is felt in press OK - the box is deactivated. the button. Each "click" scrolls 1 minute. In 4. Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute (A) order to change quickly - hold in the "click and press OK - the box is activated (B). position". 5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and In connection with a message the clock can be press OK - the box is deactivated. temporarily replaced by a symbol, see 6. Turn TUNE to select the box for OK and page 144. press OK - the setting is complete. Setting the clock in MY CAR The menu option Settings System options In addition to the previous manual/mechanical Time format selects the 24h or 12h system method the clock can also be set in the menu (AM/PM).

80 03 Your driving environment

Volvo Sensus

General the car can be personalised by means of an intuitive user interface. Settings can be made in Car settings, Infotainment, Climate, etc. With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made. 03 With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are presented, such as City Safety, Locks and alarm, setting the clock, etc. With a press on the respective function: Control panel in centre console RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, NAV* and CAM* other Navigation* - NAV, see separate owner's sources, systems and functions can be acti- manual (Road and Traffic Information Sys- vated, e.g. AM, FM1, CD, DVD*, TV*, Blue- tem - RTI). tooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*. Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*), see For more information on all functions/systems, page 226. see the respective section in the owner's manual. Car settings - MY CAR, see page 146. Park assist camera - CAM*, see page 210. Climate control, see page 154.

Volvo Sensus is the car's operating system, the heart of your personal Volvo experience. Volvo Sensus combines and presents many functions in several of the car's systems on the centre console TV screen. With Volvo Sensus

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81 03 Your driving environment

Key positions

Insert and remove the remote control IMPORTANT Key position I key With the remote control key fully inserted into Foreign objects in the ignition switch may the ignition switch - Briefly press START/ jeopardise the function or destroy the lock. STOP ENGINE. Do not press the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the detach- Key position II able key blade, see page 53. 03 With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch - Press START/STOP Withdraw the key ENGINE for about 2 seconds. Push the remote control key, allow it to eject, From key position II to I then pull it out. With the remote control key fully inserted into the ignition switch - Briefly press START/ Functions STOP ENGINE. The remote control key's 3 different key posi- Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ tions - 0, I and II - can be reached without the Back to key position 0 inserted. need to start the engine. The table shows the To resume key position 0 from position I - Open functions available in each key position. the driver's door. NOTE For cars with keyless function*, see NOTE page 57. To reach key position I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake/ Insert the key clutch pedal when the following operations Hold the end of the remote control key with the are carried out. detachable key blade and insert the key in the ignition switch. Then press the key in the lock Key position 0 up to its end position. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end position.

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Key positions

Posi- Function tion 0 Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated. The audio system can be used. 03 I Panorama roof*, power windows, 12 V socket in the passenger compartment, RTI*, phone*, ventilation fan, ECC and windscreen wipers can be used. The steering lock is deactivated.

II The headlamps come on. Warn- ing/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds. All equipment operates apart from heated seats and rear window defroster, which only work when the engine is running.

For information on the audio system's functions with remote control key removed, see page 224.

Starting and stopping the engine For information about starting/switching off the engine, see page 115.

Towing For important information about the remote control key during towing, see page 302.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Front seats WARNING Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward. Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make 4. Push the seat forward so that the head sure that the seat is in locked position in restraint "locks" in under the glovebox. order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident. Raising takes place in reverse order. 03 WARNING Lowering the front seat backrest Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

Lumbar support adjustment, turn the wheel1. Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after changing position. Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down. The passenger seat backrest can be folded Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel. forward to make room for long loads. Move the seat as far back/down as possi- Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. ble. Control panel for power seat*. Adjust the backrest to an upright position.

1 Also applies to power seat.

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Power seat* trol key without the key in the ignition switch. 2. Hold the button depressed to store set- Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi- tings while depressing one of the memory tion I and can always be made when the engine buttons. is running. Using a stored setting Seat with memory function* Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you 03 release the button then the movement of the seat will stop.

Key memory* in remote control key2 The positions of the driver's seat and the door mirrors3 are stored in the key memory when the car is locked with the remote control key. Front edge of seat cushion up/down Seat forward/backward and up/down Backrest rake

The power front seats have overload protection Store setting which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an Memory button object. If this happens, go to key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the Memory button seat again. Memory button Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time. Button for storing settings 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors. Preparations When the car is unlocked with the same remote The seats can be adjusted for a certain time control key it was locked with and the driver's after unlocking the door with the remote con-

2 For key memory for keyless drive, see page 58. 3 Only if the car is equipped with power seat and retractable power door mirrors.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85 03 Your driving environment

Seats

door is opened, the driver's seat and also the unlock button on the remote control key. The Adjust the head restraint according to passen- door mirrors automatically adopt the positions driver's door must then be open. ger height so that the whole of the back of the stored in the key memory. head is covered if possible. Slide it up as WARNING required. NOTE Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do To lower the head restraint again, the button The seat and the door mirrors do not move not play with the controls. Check that there (located in the centre between the backrest 03 if they are already set the relevant position. are no objects in front of, behind or under and head restraint, see illustration) must be the seat during adjustment. Ensure that pressed in while the head restraint is pressed none of the backseat passengers will be down. It is also possible to use the key memory by trapped. pressing the unlock button on the remote con- Manual lowering of the outer head trol key when the driver's door is open. Heated seats restraints, rear seat The key memory can be activated/deactivated For heated seats, see page 159. in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Car key memory Rear seats Position of door mirrors and driver's seat in key. For a description of the menu system, see Head restraint, centre seat, rear page 146.

NOTE The key memory in the two remote control keys and the seat's three memories are completely independent of each other.

Emergency stop Pull the locking handle closest to the head If the seat accidentally begins to move, press restraint to fold the head restraint forward. one of the buttons to stop the seat. The head restraint is moved back manually Restarting to reach the seat position stored in until a "click" can be heard. the key memory is performed by pressing the

86 03 Your driving environment

Seats

Lowering the rear seat backrest Raising takes place in reverse order.

IMPORTANT NOTE There must be no objects on the rear seat When the backrest has been raised, the red when the backrest is to be folded down. The indicator should no longer be showing. If it seat belts must not be connected either. is still showing then the backrest is not Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the locked in place. 03 rear seat upholstery. WARNING The triple-section backrest can be folded in different ways. Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked after raising. NOTE The front seats may need to be pushed for- Electrical lowering of the rear seat's wards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests outer head restraints* can be folded forward fully.

• The left-hand section can be folded sepa- If the centre backrest is being lowered - rately. fold and adjust the centre backrest's head • The centre section can be folded sepa- restraint downwards, see page 86. rately. The outer head restraints are lowered auto- • The right-hand section can only be folded matically when the outer backrests are together with the centre section. lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking • If the entire backrest is to be folded then handle while folding the backrest for- the different sections should be folded ward at the same time. A red indicator on separately. the lock catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87 03 Your driving environment

Seats

1. The remote control key must be in position I or II. 2. Press the button to lower the rear outer head restraints to improve rearward visibility.

03 WARNING Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are any passengers using of the outer seats.

Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard.

WARNING The head restraints must be in locked position after being raised.

88 03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

Adjusting WARNING Horn Adjust and secure the steering wheel before driving.

With speed related power steering* the level of steering force can be adjusted, see 03 page 172.

Keypads* G021138

Adjusting the steering wheel. Horn. Lever - releasing the steering wheel Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal. Possible steering wheel positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth: 1. Pull the lever towards you to release the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position Keypads in the steering wheel. that suits you. Cruise control, see page 173 3. Push back the lever to fix the steering Adaptive cruise control, see page 177 wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as Menu, audio and phone control, see you push the lever back. page 228.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Light switches The intensity of the instrument lighting is Main/dipped beam adjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting 03 the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden. 1. Allow the engine to run or have the remote control key in position I. 2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ lower beam alignment. Overview, light switches. Headlamp control and stalk switch. Cars with Xenon headlamps* have automatic Thumbwheel for adjusting display and Position for main beam flash headlamp levelling and therefore do not have instrument lighting the thumbwheel. Position for main beam Rear fog lamp Light switches

Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling

Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position, see page 82. The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel.

1 Not available for cars equipped with Xenon headlamps*.

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Posi- Specification In position dipped beam is always acti- Active Xenon headlamps - ABL* tion vated automatically when the engine is running or when the remote control key is in position Automatic dipped beam. Main II. beam and main beam flash work in this positionA/Deacti- Main beam vated dipped beam. Main beam can be activated when the head- 03 lamp control is in position 2 or . Position/parking lamps Activate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the Dipped beam. Main beam and end position and release. main beam flash work in this position. When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the combined instru- Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) A Applies to certain markets. ment panel. and activated (right) respectively. Main beam flash If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- Move the stalk switch gently towards the steer- lamps (Active Bending Lights - ABL) the light ing wheel to the position for main beam flash. from the headlamps follows the steering wheel Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is movement in order to provide maximum light- released. ing in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety. Dipped beam The function is activated automatically when When the engine is started, dipped beam is the car is started. In the event of a fault in the 2 activated automatically if the headlamp con- function the symbol illuminates in the trol is in position . If necessary, auto- combined instrument panel at the same time matic dipped beam for this position can be as the information display shows an explana- deactivated by a workshop. Volvo recom- tory text and a further illuminated symbol. mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

2 Applies to certain markets.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Symbol Display Specifica- Position/parking lamps Brake lights tion The brake light automatically comes on during braking. For information on the Emergency Headlamp The system brake lights and automatic hazard warning failure is disen- flashers, see page 130. Service gaged. Visit a workshop 03 required Rear fog lamp if the message remains. Volvo recommends that you contact an Headlamp control in position for position/parking authorised lamps. Volvo work- Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi- shop. tion (number plate lighting comes on at the same time). The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving. Rear position lamps also come on when the tailgate is opened in order to alert anybody Button for rear fog lamp. The function3 can be deactivated/activated in behind. The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and the menu system MY CAR under My XC60 can only be switched on in combination with Active bending lights or under Settings main/dipped beam. Car settings Light settings Active Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp bending lights. For a description of the menu system, see page 147. indicator symbol on the combined instrument panel and the light in the button illu- For headlamp pattern adjustment, see minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on. page 95.

3 Activated on delivery from the factory.

92 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically automatically when the car is driven off again Continuous flash sequence when the engine is switched off. or the button is depressed. For more informa- Move the stalk switch up or down to the tion on Emergency brake lights and automatic outer position. NOTE hazard warning flashers, see page 130. The stalk switch remains in its position and is Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary moved back manually, or automatically by the between different countries. Direction indicators/flashers steering wheel movement. 03 Direction indicator symbols Hazard warning flashers For direction indicator symbols, see page 76.

Interior lighting

Direction indicators/flashers. Short flash sequence Button for hazard warning flashers. Move the stalk switch up or down to the

first position and release. The direction G021149 Press the button to activate the hazard warning indicators flash three times. The function Controls in roof console for the front reading flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in can be activated/deactivated in the menu the combined instrument panel flash when the lamps and passenger compartment lighting. system MY CAR under Settings Car hazard warning flashers are in use. Reading lamp, left-hand side settings Light settings Triple turn The hazard warning flashers are activated signal. For a description of the menu sys- Reading lamp, right-hand side automatically when the car brakes so suddenly tem, see page 147. that the emergency brake lights are activated Interior lighting and speed is below 30 km/h. They remain on when the car has stopped and are deactivated

93 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

All lighting in the passenger compartment can Lighting, cargo area be switched on and off manually within The lighting in the cargo area is switched on 30 minutes from when: and off respectively when the tailgate is • the engine has been switched off and the opened or closed. remote control key is in position 0 Automatic lighting • the car has been unlocked but the engine 03 The switch for passenger compartment light- has not been started. ing has three positions for the lighting in the passenger compartment: Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on or off • Off – right-hand side pressed in, automatic by pressing the relevant button in the roof con- lighting deactivated. sole. • Neutral position – automatic lighting acti- Rear roof lighting in cars with panorama roof. vated. Rear roof lighting The lamps are switched on or off by pressing • On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger each respective button. compartment lighting switched on. Courtesy lighting Neutral position Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- When the button is in neutral position the pas- ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- senger compartment lighting is switched on tively when a side door is opened or closed, and off automatically in accordance with the see page 90 following.

Glovebox lighting The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if: Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed. • the car is unlocked with the remote control G021150 key or key blade, see pages 51 or 54 Vanity mirror Rear roof lighting. • the engine has been switched off and the The lighting for the vanity mirror, see remote control key is in position 0. page 219, is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed. Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:

94 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

• the engine is started settings Light settings Home safe light Adjusting headlamp pattern • the car is locked. duration. For a description of the menu sys- The passenger compartment lighting comes tem, see page 147. on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open. Approach light duration If any lighting is switched on manually and the Approach lighting is switched on with the 03 car is locked then it will be switched off auto- remote control key, see page 51, and is used matically after two minutes. to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. When the function is activated with the remote Home safe light duration control, parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept G021151 switched on to work as home safe lighting after courtesy lighting are switched on. the car has been locked. The length of time for which the approach light- Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic. 1. Remove the remote control key from the ing should be kept on can be set in the menu ignition switch. system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Light settings Approach light 2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and duration. For a description of the menu sys- release it. The function can be activated in tem, see page 147. the same way as with main beam flash, see page 90. 3. Get out of the car and lock the door. When the function is activated, dipped beam, parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number G021152 plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic. lighting are switched on. The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to The length of time for which the home safe avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be lighting should be kept on can be set in the set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pat- menu system MY CAR under Settings Car tern will also better illuminate the verge.

95 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Active Xenon headlamps* 2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive The car must be stationary with the engine run- waterproof material and cut it out. ning when the headlamp pattern is shifted 3. Position the self-adhesive templates at the between right and left-hand traffic. right distance from the edge of the head- 1. Access the menu system MY CAR under lamp lens using the illustration, see Settings Car settings Light page 97, and the dimensions in the fol- 03 settings. lowing list: 2. Select between Temporary RH traffic • Templates A and D: horizontal line approx. 104 mm, vertical line approx. and Temporary LH traffic. 20 mm For a description of the menu system, see • Templates B and C: horizontal line page 147 approx. 167 mm, vertical line approx. 14 mm Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens. The headlamp pattern may not be as good. Masking the headlamps 1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand drive cars or the C and D templates for right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:1, see page 98: • A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens) • B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens) • C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens) • D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Aligning the templates

Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.

97 03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Templates for halogen headlamps

98 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

Windscreen wipers1 Continuous wiping the rain sensor can be adjusted using the The wipers sweep at normal speed. thumbwheel. When the rain sensor is activated a light in the The wipers sweep at high speed. button the rain sensor symbol is shown in the right-hand display in the combined instrument panel. 03 IMPORTANT Activating and setting the sensitivity Before activating the wipers during winter - When activating the rain sensor, the car must ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen be running or the remote control key in position in and that any snow or ice on the wind- I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch screen (and rear window) is scraped away. must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep. Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers. IMPORTANT Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button Rain sensor, on/off Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers . The windscreen wipers make one are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- sweep. Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating. Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make Windscreen wipers off an extra sweep. Move the stalk switch to position 0 to Service position wiper blade switch off the windscreen wipers. Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi- For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An Single sweep replacement of wiper blades see see extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is Raise the stalk switch and release to page 337 and 355. turned upward.) make one sweep. Rain sensor* deactivate Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but- Intermittent wiping The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- Set the number of sweeps per time screen wipers based on how much water it ton or move the stalk switch down to unit with the thumbwheel when inter- detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of another wiper program. mittent wiping is selected.

1 Replacing the wiper blades see page 337, service position, wiper blade see page 337 and filling washer fluid see page 338.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated Washing the windscreen Wiper and washer, rear window when the remote control key is removed from Move the stalk switch toward the steering the ignition switch or five minutes after the wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp engine has been switched off. washers. The windscreen wipers will make several more IMPORTANT sweeps and the headlamps are washed once 03 The windscreen wipers could start and be the stalk switch has been released. damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac- tivate the rain sensor while the car is running Heated washer nozzles* or the remote control key is in position I or The washer nozzles are heated automatically II. The symbol in the combined instrument in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid panel and the lamp in the button go out. freezing solid.

High-pressure headlamp washing* Washing the headlamps and windows High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the Rear window wiper – continuous speed headlamps are washed automatically at every fifth windscreen wash cycle. Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in the illustration above) to initiate rear window washing and wiping.

NOTE The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat in the motor and the outside Washing function. temperature).

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

Wiper – reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping2. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged. If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made. 03

NOTE On cars with rain sensor, the rear window wiper is activated with reversing, if the sensor is activated and it is raining.

2 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

101 03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

General Heat-reflecting windscreen* windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the highlighted area in the above illustration). Laminated glass The windscreen and panorama roof have laminated glass. It is reinforced Power windows which provides better protection 03 against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. Other glass surfaces*.

Water and dirt-repellent coating* Windows are treated with a coating that improves the view in difficult weather conditions. Maintenance, see page 356. Areas where IR film is not applied.

IMPORTANT Dimensions Driver's door control panel. Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice A 47 mm from the windows. Use the defroster to Switch for electric child safety locks* and remove ice from the mirrors, see B 87 mm disengaging rear power window buttons, page 105. see page 66. The windscreen is equipped with a heat- Rear window controls reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment. Front window controls The positioning of electronic equipment, such as a transponder, behind a glass surface with WARNING heat-reflecting film may affect its function and Check that none of the rear seat passengers performance. is in danger of becoming trapped in any way For the optimal function of electronic equip- when closing the windows from the driver's door. ment, it should be positioned on the part of the

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

WARNING All power windows can be operated using the Operating with auto control panel in the driver's door. Each control Move one of the controls up/down to the end Make sure that children or other passengers panel in the other doors can only control its position and release it. The window runs auto- are not in danger of becoming trapped in own respective power window. The power win- any way when closing the windows, in par- matically to its end position. dows can only be controlled with one control ticular when the remote control key is used. Operating with the remote control key panel at a time. and central locking In order that the power windows can be used 03 WARNING To remotely operate the power windows from the remote control key must be in position I or the outside with the remote control key or from If there are children in the car, remember to II. After the car has been running the power inside with central locking, see pages 51 and always switch off the power supply to the windows can be operated for several minutes 60 power windows by removing the remote even when the remote control key has been control key if the driver leaves the car. removed, but not however after the door has Resetting been opened. If the battery is disconnected then the function Operating for automatic opening must be reset so that it Closing of the windows is stopped and the can work correctly. window is opened if anything prevents its movement. It is possible to force the pinch pro- 1. Gently raise the front section of the button tection when closing has been interrupted, e.g. to raise the window to its end position and with ice, by continuously holding the button up hold it there for one second. until the window is closed. The pinch protec- 2. Release the button briefly. tion is reactivated after a brief pause. 3. Raise the front section of the button again NOTE for one second. One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise WARNING when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly. Resetting must be carried out to ensure that pinch protection works. Operating the power windows. Operating without auto Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The Operating with auto power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.

103 03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

Door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors* Angling the door mirror when parking1 The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving The door mirror can be angled down for the in narrow spaces: driver to view the side of the road when parking 1. Press the buttons L and R simultaneously for example. (the remote control key must be at least in Engage reverse gear and press the L or R key position I). button. 03 2. Release them after When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror approximately 1 second. The mirrors auto- automatically returns to its original position matically stop in the fully retracted posi- after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing tion. the button labelled L or R respectively Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L Automatic angling of the door mirror and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors when parking1 Door mirror controls. automatically stop in the fully extended posi- When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror tion. Adjusting is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when parking for 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door Storing the position* example. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror or the R button for the right-hand The mirror positions are stored in the key mem- mirror automatically returns to its original posi- door mirror. The light in the button illumi- ory when the car has been locked with the tion after a while. nates. remote control key. When the car is unlocked The function can be activated/deactivated in 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the with the same remote control key the mirrors centre. and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions the menu system MY CAR under Settings when the driver's door is opened. Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt 3. Press the L or R button again. The light left mirror or Tilt right mirror. For a descrip- should no longer be illuminated. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under Settings tion of the menu system, see page 147. WARNING Car settings Car key memory Position Automatic retraction when locking The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti- of door mirrors and driver's seat in key. For When the car is locked/unlocked with the mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur- a description of the menu system, see remote control key the door mirrors are auto- ther away than they actually are. page 147. matically retracted/extended.

1 Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 85.

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

The function can be activated/deactivated in Rear window and door mirror On or Off. For a description of the menu sys- the menu system MY CAR under Settings defrosters tem, see page 147. Car settings Side mirror settings Fold mirrors. For a description of the menu system, Interior rearview mirror see page 147.

Resetting to neutral 03 Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/ extending to work correctly: 1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons. 2. Fold them out again with the L and R buttons. Use the defroster to quickly remove misting 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. and ice from the rear window and the door mirrors. Control for dimming The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. One press of the button starts the heating. The Home safe and approach lighting light in the button indicates that the function is Manual dimming The light on the door mirrors illuminates when active. Disconnect the heating as soon as the Bright light from behind could be reflected in approach lighting or home safe lighting is ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use selected, see page 95. battery unnecessarily. However, the heating is dimming with the dimming control when lights switched off automatically after a certain time. from behind are distracting: The rear window is demisted/defrosted auto- 1. Use dimming by moving the control in matically if the car is started in an outside tem- towards the passenger compartment. perature lower than +9 °C. Automatic defrost- 2. Return to normal position by moving the ing can be selected in the menu system MY control towards the windscreen. CAR under Settings Climate settings Automatic rear defroster. Select between

105 03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is not available in mirrors with automatic dimming. The compass* can only be specified for rear- 03 view mirrors with automatic dimming, see page 107.

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Compass*

Operation should be calibrated if the car is moved across 4. Hold the button on the underside of the several magnetic zones. rearview mirror depressed approx. 3 seconds. The number of the cur- 1. Stop the car in a large open area free from rent magnetic zone is shown. steel structures and high-voltage power lines. 5. Press the button repeatedly until the 2. Start the car. required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the 03 compass. NOTE 6. Wait until the display resumes showing the For optimum calibration - switch off all elec- character C. trical equipment (climate control system, wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are 7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no closed. more than 10 km/h until a compass direc- Rearview mirror with compass. tion is shown in the display, indicating that The upper right-hand corner of the rearview 3. Hold the button on the underside of the calibration is complete. Then drive a further mirror has an integrated display that shows the rearview mirror depressed 2 circles to fine-tune calibration. compass direction in which the front of the car approx. 6 seconds (using a paper clip for 8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. is pointing. Eight different directions are shown example) until the character C is shown. with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west). The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or in key position II, see page 82. To deactivate/activate the compass - press in the button on the underside of the mirror using a paper clip for example.

Calibration The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass is set for the geographic area to G030295 which the car was delivered. The compass Magnetic zones.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107 03 Your driving environment

Power panorama roof*

General WARNING Closing, manual The panorama roof is divided into two sections. Children, other passengers or objects can Closing, automatic Only the front section can be opened - hori- be trapped by the panorama roof's moving zontally or vertically at the rear edge (ventilation parts. The panorama roof and curtain can be oper- position). ated in key position I or II. • Always operate the panorama roof with The panorama roof has a sun blind made of 03 caution. Automatic operation perforated fabric and located under the glass • Do not allow children to play with the 1. To open the curtain all the way - press the roof to provide extra protection from factors controls. control rearward to the automatic opening such as strong sunlight. • If leaving the car, always take the position and release. remote control key/PCC with you*, and 2. To then open the panorama roof all the way so prevent the panorama roof from - press the control rearward again to the being operated. automatic opening position and release. Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preced- Operating ing procedure in reverse order - press the control forward to the automatic closing position instead. Rapid opening/closing The panorama roof and curtain can be opened/ closed simultaneously: • To open - press the control rearward to the The panorama roof and curtain are operated automatic operation position twice and with a control located in the roof. The control release. is activated when the key is in position I or II, • To close - press the control forward to the see page 82. automatic operation position twice and release.

Opening, automatic Opening, manual

108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Power panorama roof*

Manual operation Ventilation position Closing using the remote control key or 1. To open the curtain - press the control central locking button rearward to the point of resistance for manual opening. The curtain moves towards maximum opening as long as the button is depressed. 2. To angle the panorama roof - press the 03 control rearward again to the point of resistance for manual opening 3. To open the panorama roof - press the control rearward to the point of resistance for manual opening a third time. The panorama roof moves towards maximum Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge. opening as long as the button is kept Open by pressing the rear edge of the con- depressed. One long press on the lock button, see pages trol upward. 51 (remote control key) and 60 (central locking Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preced- Close by pulling the rear edge of the con- button), closes the panorama roof and all the ing procedure in reverse order - press the control down. windows. The door mirrors are retracted* and trol forward to the manual closing position When the ventilation position is selected the the doors and tailgate are locked. To interrupt instead. front section is raised at its rear edge. If the closing, press the lock button again. curtain is fully closed when ventilation position NOTE is selected - then it opens automatically WARNING approx. 50 mm. For manual opening, the curtain must be If closing the panorama roof with the remote fully open before the panorama roof can be control key, make sure nothing could opened. For the reverse procedure, the become trapped. panorama roof must be fully closed before the curtain can be closed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109 03 Your driving environment

Power panorama roof*

Wind deflector

The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the panorama roof is in the open position.

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Alcoguard*

General information on the Alcolock 1. Nozzle for breath test. NOTE The function of the Alcolock is to prevent the 2. Switch. Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will car from being driven by individuals under the 3. Transmission button. keep the built-in battery fully charged and influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be 4. Lamp for battery status. the Alcolock is activated automatically started the driver must take a breath test that when the car is opened. verifies that he/she is not under the influence 5. Lamp for result of breath test. of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in 03 6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test. Before starting the engine accordance with each market's limit value in The Alcolock is activated automatically and is force for driving legally. Operation then ready for use when the car is opened. WARNING Battery 1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the Alcolock is ready for use. The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta- the driver from responsibility. It is always the tus: 2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If responsibility of the driver to be sober and the Alcolock is outside the car when it is to drive the car safely. Indicator lamp Battery status unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch (2). (4) 3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath Functions Green flashing Charging in pro- and blow with an even pressure until a gress "click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. The result will be one of the alternatives in Green Fully charged the following table Result after breath test. Yellow Semi-charged 4. If no message is shown then the transmis- Red Discharged - fit the sion to the car may have failed - in which charger in the holder case, press the button (3) to transmit the or connect the result to the car manually. power supply cable 5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock from the glovebox. in its holder. 6. Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it must be repeated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111 03 Your driving environment

Alcoguard*

Result after breath test To bear in mind tion will then be possible, see page 113 section Emergency situation. Indicator lamp Specification Before the breath test (5) + Display text In order to obtain correct function and as accu- The message can be cleared by pressing the rate a measurement result as possible: send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on Green lamp + Alco- Start the engine - no its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap- guard Approved alcohol content • Avoid eating or drinking approx. pears each time the engine is started - only 03 test measured. 5 minutes before the breath test. recalibration at a workshop1 can clear the mes- • Avoid excess windscreen washing - the sage permanently. Engine starting pos- Yellow lamp + Alco- alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an guard Approved sible - measured incorrect measurement result. Cold or hot weather test alcohol content is The colder the weather the longer it takes above 0.1 promille Change of driver before the Alcolock is ready for use: but below the limit In order to ensure that a new breath test is car- value in forceA. ried out in the event of a change of driver - Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat- depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) ing time (sec- Red lamp + Disap- Engine starting not simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At onds) proved test Wait 1 possible - measured which point the car returns to start inhibition minute alcohol content is mode and a new approved breath test is +10 — +85 10 above the limit value required before starting the engine. in forceA. –5 — +10 60 Calibration and service A Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply. See also the section entitled General information on the The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated –40 — –5 180 Alcolock on page 111 at a workshop1 every 12 months. At temperatures below -20 ºC or above 30 days before recalibration is necessary the NOTE +60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power display shows Alcoguard Calibr. required. If supply. The display shows Alcoguard insert After a completed period of driving, the calibration is not carried out within these 30 engine can be restarted within 30 minutes . In which case, connect the days then normal engine starting will be power cable without a new breath test. power supply cable from the glovebox and wait blocked - only starting with the Bypass func- until indicator lamp (6) is green.

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Alcoguard*

In extremely cold weather the heating time can Activating the Bypass function Symbols and display messages be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors. • Depress and hold the left-hand stalk In addition to the previously described mes- switch READ button and the button for sages, the combined instrument panel's dis- Emergency situation hazard warning flashers simultaneously for play can also show the following: In the event of an emergency situation, or if the approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows Alcolock is out of order or has been removed, Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to Display text Meaning/Action then Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after 03 drive the car. which the engine can be started. Alcoguard Restart The engine has been This function can be activated several times. possible switched off for less NOTE The error message shown during driving can than 30 minutes - All Bypass activation is logged and saved in only be cleared at a workshop1. engine starting pos- memory, see page 10 in the section, Activating the Emergency function sible without new Recording data. • Depress and hold the left-hand stalk test. switch READ button and the button for Alcoguard Service Contact a work- After the Bypass function has been activated hazard warning flashers simultaneously for required shop1. the display shows Alcoguard Bypass approx. 5 seconds - the display shows enabled the whole time while driving and can Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the Alcoguard No sig- Transmission failed - only be reset by a workshop1. engine can be started. nal send manually with The Bypass function can be tested without the This function can be used once, after which a button (3) or take a 1 error message being logged - in which case, reset must be made at a workshop . new breath test. carry out all the steps without starting the car. Alcoguard Invalid Test failed - take a The error message is cleared when the car is test new breath test. locked. When the Alcolock is installed, either the Alcoguard Blow Blowing too short - Bypass or Emergency function is selected as longer blow for longer. the bypassing option. This setting can be Alcoguard Blow Blowing too hard - 1 changed afterwards at a workshop . softer blow more gently.

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113 03 Your driving environment

Alcoguard*

Display text Meaning/Action Alcoguard Blow Blowing too weak - harder blow harder.

Alcoguard wait Heating not finished 03 Preheating - wait for text Alco- guard Blow 5 seconds.

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Petrol and diesel engines 2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For Keyless drive cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and diesel brake pedal.) engines. For more information on Keyless drive, see page 57. 3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button and then release it. NOTE The starter motor works until the engine starts A prerequisite for the car to start is that one 03 or until its overheating protection triggers. of the car's remote control keys with the If the engine has not started - try again by hold- Keyless drive* function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area. ing in the START/STOP ENGINE button until the engine starts. WARNING WARNING Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/ Never remove the remote control key with inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button. Always remove the remote control key from the Keyless drive* function from the car the ignition switch when leaving the car - while driving or during towing. especially if there are children in the car. For IMPORTANT information on how the key is removed from Stop the engine Do not press in the remote control key incor- the ignition switch, see page 82. To switch off the engine: rectly turned - Hold the end with the detachable key blade, see page 53. • Press START/STOP ENGINE - the engine NOTE stops. 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition The idling speed can be noticeably higher • If the car has an automatic gearbox and the switch and press it in to its end position. than normal for certain engine types during gear selector is not in a position P or if the cold starting. This is so that the emissions Note that if the car is equipped with an car is moving - Press twice or hold the system can reach normal operating tem- START/STOP ENGINE button depressed alcolock then a breath test must first be perature as quickly as possible, which min- approved before the engine can be started, imises exhaust emissions and protects the until the engine stops. see page 111. environment.

1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Steering lock A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock unlocks or locks. • The steering lock unlocks up when the START/STOP ENGINE button is depressed. 03 • The steering lock locks when the driver's door is opened after the engine has been switched off. Key positions For information on the remote control key's different key positions, see page 82

116 03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine – external battery

Jump starting 4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps IMPORTANT to the donor battery's positive terminal (1). Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks IMPORTANT forming. Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the 12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order - engine compartment. 03 first the black and then the red. > Make sure that none of the black jump 5. Open the clips on the front cover of the lead's clamps comes into contact with battery in your car and remove the cover, the battery's positive terminal or the see page 340. clamp connected to the red jump lead! 6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive terminal (2). WARNING If the battery is flat then the car can be started with current from another battery. 7. Connect one of the black jump lead's • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen clamps to the donor battery's negative ter- gas, which is highly explosive. A spark When jump starting the car, the following steps minal (3). can be formed if a jump lead is con- are recommended to avoid short circuits or nected incorrectly, and this can be 8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding other damage: enough for the battery to explode. point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at 1. Insert the remote control key in key posi- the top, the outer screw head (4). • The battery contains sulphuric acid, tion 0, see page 82. which can cause serious burns. 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are If sulphuric acid comes into contact 2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage affixed securely so that there are no sparks • with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with of 12 V. during the starting procedure. large quantities of water. If acid 3. If the donor battery is installed in another 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and splashes into the eyes - seek medical car - switch off the donor car's engine and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed attention immediately. make sure that the two cars do not touch slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm. each other. 11. Start the engine in the car with the dis- For more information on the car's battery - see charged battery. page 339.

117 03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

Manual gearbox Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted Automatic gearbox, Geartronic* on the gear lever. • Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change. • Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes. 03 Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel. • Start from neutral position N and only engage reverse gear R when the car is sta- D M + – Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox. tionary. : Automatic gear positions. ( / ): Manual gear positions. NOTE The information display shows the position of the gear selector using the following indica- With the upper variant of the shifting pattern tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4 5 or 6, see for 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustra- page 75. tion) - first press down the gear lever in the N position in order to engage reverse gear. Gear positions Parking position (P) Select P when starting the engine or when the car is parked. The brake pedal must be depressed to disengage the gear selector from the P position. Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox. The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the The 6-speed box is available in two versions - P position is engaged. Activate the electric reverse gear position differs between them. parking brake by pressing the button, see page 134.

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

IMPORTANT 6, which is equivalent to the gear that is Geartronic - Sport mode (S)1 engaged just then, see page 75. The Sport programme provides sportier cha- The car must be stationary when position racteristics and allows higher engine speed for P is selected. • Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release the lever, the gears. At the same time it responds more which returns to its rest position between quickly to acceleration. During active driving, Reverse (R) + and –. the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to The car must be stationary when position R is a delayed upshift. 03 selected. or Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever to Neutral position (N) • Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to change down a gear and release it. the side from D position to the end position at No gear is engaged and the engine can be +/–. The information display shifts the indica- started. Apply the parking brake if the car is The manual gearshift mode (+/–) can be tion from D to S. stationary with the gear selector in position N. selected at any time while driving. Sport mode can be selected at any time while Drive (D) Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driving. D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and driver allows the speed to decrease lower than down takes place automatically based on the a level suitable for the selected gear, in order Geartronic - Winter mode level of acceleration and speed. The car must to avoid jerking and stalling. It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads be stationary when the gear selector is moved To return to automatic driving mode: if 3rd gear is engaged manually. to position D from position R. • Move the lever to the side to the end posi- 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the Geartronic – Manual gear positions (+/-) tion at D. gear lever from the D position to the end The driver can also change gear manually position at +/– - the instrument panel dis- using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The play shifts the indication from D to the fig- NOTE ure . car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal 1 f the gearbox has a Sport programme then is released. 2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever the gearbox will only become manual after forward towards + (plus) twice - the display the lever has been moved forwards or back- Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving shifts the indication from 1 to 3. the lever to the side from position D to the end wards in its (-+/–) position. The information position at +/–. The information display shifts display then shifts the indication from S to 3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully. show which of the gears - is engaged. the indication from D to one of the figures 1 – 1 6

1 Only models D5 and T6.

119 03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car engine reaches its maximum speed in order to Keep your foot on the brake pedal when mov- moves off with a lower engine speed and prevent damage to the engine. ing the gear selector to another position. reduced engine power on the drive wheels. Mechanical gear selector inhibitor Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking Kick-down position (P) When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the To be able to move the gear selector from P to way to the floor (beyond the position normally other gear positions, the brake pedal must be 03 regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is depressed and the remote control key must be immediately engaged. This is known as kick- in position II, see page 82. down. Shiftlock – Neutral (N) If the accelerator is released from the kick- If the gear selector is in the N position and the down position, the gearbox automatically car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds changes up. (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked. Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking. G021351 To be able to move the gear selector from N to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be Safety function The gear selector can be moved forward and depressed and the remote control key must be To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox back freely between N and D. Other positions in position II, see page 82. control program has a protective downshift are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func- inhibitor button on the gear selector. tion. With the inhibitor button depressed the lever Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- can be moved forwards or backwards between down which would result in an engine speed P, R, N and D. high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in Automatic gear selector inhibitor this way at high engine speed – the original The automatic gearbox has special safety sys- gear remains engaged. tems: When kick-down is activated the car can Parking position (P) change one or more gears at a time depending Stationary car with engine running: on engine speed. The car changes up when the

120 03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

Deactivate automatic gear selector Automatic gearbox, Powershift*2 sion, this can be verified by checking the des- inhibitor ignation on the decal number (5) under the bonnet - see page 362. The designation "MPS6" means that there is Powershift transmission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic transmission. 03 HSA The HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that the pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the foot is moved from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal before setting off or reversing uphill.

D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gear The temporary braking effect releases after positions. several seconds or when the driver acceler- If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat ates. battery, the gear selector must be moved from Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearbox the P position so that the car can be moved. that has double mechanical clutch discs in To bear in mind contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox. Lift the rubber mat in the compartment The transmission's double clutch has overload A conventional automatic gearbox has a protection that is activated if it becomes too behind the centre console and open the hydraulic torque converter instead that trans- hatch. hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the fers power from engine to gearbox. accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a Fully insert the key blade. Press the key Powershift transmission operates in the same long time. blade down and hold (For information on way and has similar controls and functions as the key blade, see page 53.) Overheated transmission causes the car to the Geartronic automatic transmission, descri- shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu- Move the gear selector from the P position. bed in the previous section. minates and the information display shows a Powershift or Geartronic? message. The transmission can also overheat In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or the car is equipped with Powershift transmis- slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer

2 Models 2.0T and T5.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121 03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

hitched. The transmission cools down when wait another moment with your foot on the For important information regarding Powershift the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed brake pedal. transmission and towing - see page 302. and the engine running at idling speed. IMPORTANT Text message and action Overheating during slow driving in queues can In some situations the display may show a be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary message at the same time as a symbol is illu- and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car minated. 03 there is a moderate distance to the traffic with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then could then overheat.

Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action Transm. overheat brake to hold Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con- Transmission overheated. Keep the car stant engine speed. stationary using the foot brake.A

Transm. overheat park safely Significant pulling in the car's traction. Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe manner.A

Transm. cooling let engine run No drive due to overheated gearbox. Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears.

A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

The table shows three steps with an increased NOTE WARNING degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot. In parallel with the display text The table's examples are no indication that If a warning symbol combined with the text the driver is also advised that the car's elec- the car is defective but instead show that a Transm. overheat park safely is ignored safety function has been activated inten- then the heat in the gearbox may become tronics are temporarily changing the driving tionally to prevent damage to one of the so high that the power transmission characteristics. Follow the instructions on the car's components. information display where appropriate.

122 03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable level.

For more possible display messages with their 03 respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic transmission, see page 144. A display text clears automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk READ button.

123 03 Your driving environment

Eco DRIVe*

General More information and settings Eco Start/Stop DRIVe Quieter and cleaner General information on Start/Stop

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- ration's core values and it influences all of our The MY CAR menu system in the car includes operations. This target-orientation has resulted instructions which explain parts of the DRIVe The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and in the DRIVe vehicle series whose concept concept along with several possible settings cleaner.... consists of an interaction between several sep- and options - see page 147. arate energy-saving functions, all with the Certain engines can be fitted with a common purpose of reducing fuel consump- Eco Start/Stop DRIVe function which is acti- tion, which in turn contributes to reduced vated during e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at exhaust emissions. traffic lights. An car with this button on the The engine's automatic restart sequence runs instrument panel and.... so smoothly that it is hardly noticeable that the engine has actually been switched off. The experience is that the engine has been running the whole time but with an extremely quiet and low idling speed. The Eco Start/Stop DRIVe function gives the manual gearbox has the • driver the opportunity for a more active envi- Eco Start/Stop DRIVe function. ronmentally conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to disengage gear and

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Eco DRIVe* allowing the engine to "auto-stop", whenever NOTE • Depress the clutch pedal - the engine appropriate. starts. After starting with the key and each auto- or Function and operation stop the car must first reach 5 km/h before the automatic Start/Stop function is re-acti- • Depress the accelerator pedal - the engine vated - following which certain conditions starts. must also be fulfilled, refer to these under the heading "The engine does not auto- If the car is on a downhill slope: 03 stop". • Release the foot brake pedal and let the car roll faster than normal walking pace - the All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, engine starts. radio, etc. work as normal even with an auto- After starting the engine: stopped engine, except that some equipment may have its function temporarily reduced, e.g. • Engage a suitable gear and continue the journey. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system. Gear indicator Eco Start/Stop DRIVe On/Off. Auto-stopping the engine In order that the engine will auto-stop the car Illuminates briefly on activation and for text must be stationary: messages. • Set the gear lever in neutral position and The engine is auto-stopped. release the clutch pedal - the engine is The Eco Start/Stop DRIVe function is switched off. activated automatically when the As verification and reminder engine is started with the key. The driver is that the engine is auto-stop- made aware of the function by the instrument ped this symbol in the display panel symbol (2) illuminating briefly and the (3) illuminates. green lamp (1) for the On/Off button illuminating. An essential detail in connection with environ- Auto-starting the engine mental driving is to drive in the right gear and With the gear lever in neutral position: change gear in time.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125 03 Your driving environment

Eco DRIVe*

The driver is assisted by an indicator which Limitations In the following cases the engine auto-starts notifies the driver when it is most advanta- even if the driver has not depressed the clutch geous to engage the next higher or lower gear The engine does not auto-stop pedal in order to engage a gear: - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator). Even if the Eco Start/Stop DRIVe function is activated, the engine does not auto-stop if: • Misting forms on the windows. Indication is made with an up or down arrow in • Outside temperature is below 0 or above the combined instrument panel's lower dis- • the driver has opened the seatbelt's 30 °C. 03 play. buckle. • There is a temporarily high current take-off • the car has not stopped - however, the Deactivating the Eco Start/Stop DRIVe or battery capacity has dropped to the low- Start/Stop function does accept slow roll- est permissible level. function ing, the equivalent to normal walking pace. In certain situations, it may • The car is rolling faster than the equivalent • the capacity of the battery is below the normal walking pace. advisable to temporarily dis- minimum permissible level. engage the automatic • Repeated pumping of the brake pedal. the engine does not have normal operating Start/Stop function - this is • temperature. carried out with a push of this WARNING button. • outside temperature is below 0 or above 30 °C. Do not open the bonnet when the engine Disengaged Start/Stop func- has auto-stopped - the engine may sud- • the environment in the passenger com- tion is indicated by the infor- denly auto-start. In order to avoid auto-star- partment differs from the preset values - ting with raised bonnet: mation display's symbol (2) indicated by the ventilation fan running at going out and the message a high speed. • First engage a gear and apply the park- Eco DRIVe Off being dis- ing brake or take the remote control key the car has been reversed and reverse gear played for about 5 seconds - • from the ignition switch. is disengaged. while the button's lamp goes out at the same time. • battery temperature is below 0 °C or above 55 °C. The engine does not auto-start The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is In the following cases the engine does not reactivated with the button or until the next The engine auto-starts without driver auto-start after having auto-stopped: time the engine is started with the key. intervention An auto-stopped engine may restart in some cases without the driver having decided that the journey should continue.

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

Eco DRIVe*

• The driver's seatbelt buckle has been Symbol Message Info/ Symbol Message Info/ opened - a display text prompts the driver to start the engine normally. Action Action • A gear is engaged without declutching - a Eco DRIVe Illuminates Depress The engine display text prompts the driver to set the On for the foot is ready to gear lever in neutral position in order to about 5 seconds brake to auto-start - enable auto-start. after Eco start waiting for 03 Start/Stop the brake Involuntary engine stop DRIVe has pedal to be In the event that a start-up fails and the engine been acti- depressed. stops, proceed as follows: vated. 1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine Press the The engine starts automatically after the gear lever has Eco DRIVe Illuminates clutch or is ready to been set in neutral position. Prior to this the Off for brake to auto-start - information display showed the text Set about 5 seconds start waiting for the gear lever in neutral. after Eco the brake or Start/Stop clutch pedal Text message DRIVe has to be In combination with this indicator been depressed. lamp the Eco Start/Stop DRIVe func- switched off. tion may display text messages on the infor- Set the Gear is mation display for certain situations. For some Disengage The engine gear lever engaged of them there is a recommended action that to start is ready to in neutral without should be performed. The following table auto-start - declutching shows some examples. waiting for - disengage the clutch and set the pedal to be gear lever in depressed. neutral position.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127 03 Your driving environment

Eco DRIVe*

Symbol Message Info/ Symbol Message Info/ be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop Action Action is recommended. AUTO- Engine The engine Auto Start- Eco Start/ STOP Auto-Stop- is ready to Stop serv. Stop DRIVe ped auto-start - required is not opera- 03 waiting for tional. A the brake or workshop clutch pedal should be to be contacted - depressed. in which case an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Press the The engine START but- will not auto- ton startA - start the engine normally with the START/ STOP ENGINE button.

A Occurs if e.g. the seatbelt is taken off after the engine has auto-stopped.

If a message does not go out following com- pletion of the action then a workshop should

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

All-wheel drive – AWD*

All Wheel Drive is always available

All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time. The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels. An elec- tronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface. This provides the best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels. All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain, snow and icy conditions.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129 03 Your driving environment

Foot brake

General may be felt in the brake pedal when this is Cleaning the brake discs The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If engaged and this is normal. Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs one brake circuit is damaged then this will A short test of the ABS system is made auto- may result in delayed brake function. This delay mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level matically after the engine has been started is minimised by cleaning the brake linings. and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to when the driver releases the brake pedal. A Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road sur- produce the normal braking effect. further automatic test of the ABS system may faces, prior to long-stay parking and after the 03 The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The car has been washed. Carry this out by braking by a brake servo. test may be experienced as pulses in the brake gently during a short period while en route. pedal. Emergency Brake Assistance WARNING Emergency brake lights and automatic Emergency Brake Assistance EBA (Emergency The brake servo only works when the engine hazard warning flashers Brake Assist) helps to increase brake force and is running. Emergency brake lights are activated to alert so reduce braking distance. EBA detects the vehicles behind about sudden braking. The driver's braking style and increases brake force If the brake is used when the engine is switched function means that the brake light flashes as necessary. The brake force can be rein- off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force instead of - as in normal braking - shining with forced up to the level when the ABS system is must be used to brake the car. a constant glow. engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced. In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy Emergency brake lights are activated at load the brakes can be relieved by using engine speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is NOTE braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used working and/or in the event of sudden braking. if the same gear is used downhill as up. After the car's speed has been slowed below When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- 10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) For more general information on heavy loads the normal constant glow - while at the same the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the on the car, see page 368. time the hazard warning flashers are activated, brake pedal is released then all braking ceases. Anti-lock braking system and they flash until the driver changes engine The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock speed with the accelerator pedal or they are Braking System) which prevents the wheels deactivated with their button, see page 93. from locking during braking. This means the ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration

130 03 Your driving environment

Foot brake

Symbols in the combined instrument panel Symbol Specification Constant glow – Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and 03 check for the cause of the brake fluid loss.

Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started – There was a fault in the brake system's ABS function when the engine was last running.

WARNING

If and illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake system. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

131 03 Your driving environment

HDC Hill Descent Control

General WARNING gear position 1 must be selected, which is HDC can be compared to an automatic engine shown with the figure 1 in the trip computer HDC does not work in all situations, but is display, see page 119. brake. When you release the accelerator on instead only intended to be supplementary downhill gradients the car is normally braked assistance. by means of the engine striving for low engine NOTE The driver always has ultimate responsibility idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But that the car is driven safely. HDC cannot be activated in an automatic 03 the steeper the road and the more load there is gearbox with the gear selector in position in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine D. braking. In order to then reduce speed the Function driver has to assist using the footbrake. The function makes it possible to increase/ Operation reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, with HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of a foot only on the accelerator pedal, without 10 km/h forwards with engine braking and using the footbrake. The sensitivity of the 7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within accelerator pedal decreases and becomes the gear's speed register can be selected using more precise by means of the full actuation of the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator the pedal being restricted to adjusting engine pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to speed within a limited range. The brake system 10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the brakes itself and provides the car with a low hill's gradient and without the need for the foot- and even speed, so allowing the driver to fully brake. focus on steering. The brake lights come on automatically when the function is operating. The driver can brake HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch or stop the car at any time by using the foot- with an uneven road surface and slippery sec- on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the brake. tions. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer button illuminates when the function is from a ramp. switched on. When HDC is operating the HDC is deactivated: symbol illuminates and the display shows Hill descent control ON. The function only operates in first gear position and in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox,

132 03 Your driving environment

HDC Hill Descent Control

• with the on/off button on the centre console • if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a manual gearbox • if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector is moved to position D. 03 The function can be disengaged at any time. If it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then the braking effect will not release directly, but slowly instead.

NOTE With HDC activated you may experience a delay between acceleration pedal activation and engine response.

133 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Handbrake Applying the parking brake the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking is interrupted.

NOTE In the event of emergency braking at speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the 03 braking procedure.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill: • Turn the wheels away from the kerb. If the car is parked facing downhill: Parking brake control - apply. • Turn the wheels towards the kerb. Function 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly. A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrical parking brake is being applied. 2. Press the control. WARNING The noise can also be heard during the auto- > The combined instrument panel symbol Get into the habit of always applying the matic function checking of the parking brake. starts flashing - once there is a parking brake when parking on a slope - If the car is stationary when the parking brake constant glow it is applied. leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. 3. Release the foot brake pedal and make the car in all situation. If it is applied when the car is moving then the sure that the car is at a standstill position. normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over • When parking the vehicle, always engage to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta- 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the tionary. gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox). Low battery voltage In an emergency the parking brake can be If the battery voltage is too low then the parking applied when the vehicle is moving by depress- brake can neither be released nor applied. ing the control. When the control is released or Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low, see page 117.

134 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Disengaging the parking brake NOTE Releasing automatically 1. Put the seatbelt on. The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal 2. Start the engine. instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recommends the use of the brake pedal. 3. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly. 4. Move the gear selector to position D or R 03 Releasing automatically and depress the accelerator. 1. Start the engine. > The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel symbol 2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear. goes out. 3. Ease up the clutch and depress the accelerator. NOTE Parking brake control - release. > The parking brake releases and the combined instrument panel symbol For safety reasons, the parking brake is only Cars with manual gearbox released automatically if the engine is run- goes out. ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The Releasing manually parking brake is released immediately on 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition Cars with automatic gearbox cars with automatic gearbox when the switch.1 Releasing manually accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R. 2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly. 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch1. 3. Pull the control. Heavy load uphill 2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly. > The parking brake releases and the A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the combined instrument panel symbol 3. Pull the control. car to roll backward when the parking brake is goes out. > The parking brake releases and the released automatically on a steep incline. combined instrument panel symbol Avoid this by depressing the control while driving off. Release the control when the engine goes out. achieves traction.

1 For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.

135 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Replacing the brake linings parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop The rear brake linings must be replaced at a is recommended. workshop due to the design of the electric

Symbols and messages in the display 03 Symbol Message Meaning/Action "Message" Read the message on the information display

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.

Park brake not fully A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released - Try to apply and release the brake. released If the fault persists after a few attempts: Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. NOTE: A warning signal sounds if you pull away with this error message.

136 03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Symbol Message Meaning/Action Parking brake not applied A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied - Try to release and apply the brake. If the fault persists after a few attempts: Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed 03 with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.

Parking brake Service A fault has arisen - Try to apply and release the brake. required If the fault persists after a few attempts: Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

• If the car has to be parked before the fault has been rectified then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be in position P (automatic gearbox).

137 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink *

General NOTE WARNING HomeLink is designed not to work if the car If HomeLink is used to operate a garage is locked from the outside. door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in Save the original remote controls for future motion. programming (e.g. when switching to another car). 03 Do not use the HomeLink remote control Delete the button programming when the for any garage door that does not have car is to be sold. safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it Metallic sun visors should not be used in detects that something is preventing its cars fitted with HomeLink. This may have movement, and stop directly and reverse. A an adverse effect on its function. garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information - contact the supplier via the HomeLink is a programmable remote control Operation Internet: www.homelink.com. which can control up to three different devices When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote (e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light- Programming for the first time controls. ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so The first step erases the memory in replace their remote controls. HomeLink is Depress the programmed button to activate HomeLink and must not be carried out when supplied built into the left-hand sun visor. the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi- only one individual button is being reprogram- cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but- The HomeLink panel consists of three pro- med. ton is kept depressed. grammable buttons and one indicator lamp. 1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not NOTE release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash- If the ignition is not activated, HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver's ing indicates that HomeLink is set in door has been opened. "learn mode" and is ready to be programmed. The original remote controls can of course be 2. Position the original remote control used in parallel with HomeLink. 5-30 cm from HomeLink. Monitor the indicator lamp.

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink *

The particular distance that is required ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds Programming individual buttons between the original remote control and and indicates that the device has a "roll- To reprogram an individual button, proceed in HomeLink depends on the programming ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- accordance with the following: of the device in question. Perhaps several ilar is not activated when the pro- 1. Depress the required button on attempts will be required at different dis- grammed HomeLink button is HomeLink and do not release until step 3 tances. Maintain each position for approx. depressed. Continue the programming has been completed. 15 seconds before trying a new one. in accordance with the following. 03 1 2. 3. Depress the button for the original remote 5. Locate the "programming button " on the When the indicator lamp on HomeLink control and the button to be programmed receiver for the garage door for example, starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds, position the original remote control on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not normally located close to the antenna's release the buttons until the indicator lamp bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- 5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi- has changed over from slow to rapid flash- culty in finding the button - consult the cator lamp. ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful supplier's manual, or contact the supplier The particular distance that is required programming. via the Internet: www.homelink.com. between the original remote control and 4. Test the programming by depressing the 6. Depress and release the "programming HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question. Perhaps several programmed button on HomeLink and button". The button flashes for attempts will be required at different dis- watching the indicator lamp: approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period. tances. Maintain each position for approx. • Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- 15 seconds before trying a new one. minates with a constant glow when the 7. Depress the programmed button on button is kept depressed, this indicates HomeLink, while the "programming but- 3. Depress the button on the original remote that the programming is complete. The ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for control. The indicator lamp will start to garage door, gate or similar should now approx. 3 seconds and then release. flash. When the flashing has changed over be activated when the programmed Repeat the press/hold/release sequence from a slow to a rapid flashing - release HomeLink button is depressed. up to 3 times to conclude the program- both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming. • Glow not constant: The indicator lamp ming. flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds 4. Test the programming by depressing the and then changes over to a constant programmed button on HomeLink and glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- watching the indicator lamp:

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139 03 Your driving environment

HomeLink *

• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- 7. Depress the programmed button on minates with a constant glow when the HomeLink, while the "programming but- button is kept depressed, this indicates ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for that the programming is complete. The approx. 3 seconds and then release. garage door, gate or similar should now Repeat the press/hold/release sequence be activated when the programmed up to 3 times to conclude the program- 03 HomeLink button is depressed. ming. • Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds Erasing programming and then changes over to a constant It is only possible to erase the programming for glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds buttons. and indicates that the device has a "roll- Depress the two outer buttons and do not ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- release until the indicator lamp starts to ilar is not activated when the pro- flash after approx. 20 seconds. grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming > HomeLink is now set in so-called in accordance with the following. "learn mode" and is ready to be programmed once more, see page 138. 5. Locate the "programming button2" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have difficulty in finding the button - consult the supplier's manual, or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com. 6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Your driving environment

141 Menus and messages...... 144 Menu source MY CAR...... 146 Climate control...... 154 Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*...... 164 Additional heater*...... 167 Trip computer...... 168 DSTC – Stability and traction control system...... 170 Adapting driving characteristics...... 172 Cruise control*...... 173 Speed limiter ...... 175 Adaptive cruise control*...... 177 Distance Warning*...... 187 City Safety™...... 190 Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian detection*...... 194 Driver Alert System – DAC*...... 201 Driver Alert System - LDW*...... 204 Park assist syst*...... 207 Park assist camera*...... 210 BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System...... 213 Comfort inside the passenger compartment...... 217

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Combined instrument panel be acknowledged with READ for the menus to Message be shown.

Menu overview Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car. ---- km to empty tank --.- l/100km average --.- l/100km instantaneous 04 --- km/h average speed --- km/h current speed1 Information display and controls for menus. Engine oil level Wait...* Text message in the information display. READ – access to message list and mes- Tyre pressure Calibration* When a warning, information or indicator sym- sage confirmation. bol illuminates, a corresponding message 2 Thumbwheel – browse between menu Park heat timer --:-- ---* appears on the information display. An error options. Direct start Park heat ON*3 message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified. RESET – reset the active function. Used in Additional heat auto ON* certain cases to select/activate a function, Press READ to acknowledge and browse see the explanation under each respective Lane Depart Warn * between the messages. function. Driver Alert * The menus shown on the information displays in the combined instrument panel are controlled with the left-hand stalk switch. The menus shown depend on key position, see page 82. If a message appears then this must

1 Only certain markets. 2 Programming is only possible when the engine is switched off. 3 Cannot be selected when the additional heater is operating.

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

NOTE Message Specification Message Specification If a warning message appears while you are Time for regular Time for regular service Transmission Drive more smoothly or using the trip computer, the message must B stop the car in a safe be read (press READ) before the previous maintenance - contact a workshop . hot Reduce activity can be resumed. The timing is deter- speed manner. Disengage the mined by the number of gear and run the engine kilometres driven, num- at idling speed until the Message Specification ber of months since the message clearsC. last service, engine run- A Stop safely Stop and switch off the ning time and oil grade. Transmission Critical fault. Stop the engine. Serious risk of hot Stop safely car immediately in a damage - consult a Maintenance If the service intervals safe manner and con- 04 workshopB. overdue are not followed then tact a workshopB. the warranty does not A Stop engine Stop and switch off the cover any damaged Temporarily A function has been engine. Serious risk of parts - contact a work- OFFA temporarily switched damage - consult a shopB. off and is reset auto- workshopB. matically while driving Transmission Contact a workshopB to or after starting again. A B Service urgent Contact a workshop to oil Change nee- check the car as soon check the car immedi- ded as possible. Low battery The audio system is ately. Power save switched off to save Transmission The gearbox cannot mode energy. Charge the bat- B Service Contact a workshop to performance handle full capacity. tery. A required check the car as soon low Drive carefully until the A Part of message, shown together with information on where as possible. message clearsC. the problem has arisen. B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. See manualA Read the owner's man- If shown repeatedly - C For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see page 122. ual. contact a workshopB. Book time for Time to book regular maintenance service - contact a workshopB.

145 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menu source MY CAR

General information on MY CAR Operation Short and long presses also produce varying Many of the car's functions are handled results. Centre console controls in this menu source, such as setting the • Short EXIT presses go back one step in the clock, door mirrors and locks. current menu structure. Navigation in the menus is carried out using • One long EXIT press leads to the MY buttons on the centre console or with the steer- CAR source menu. ing wheel's right-hand keypad. • A long EXIT press while in the MY CAR Certain functions are standard, others are source menu, leads out of MY CAR to the optional - the range also varies depending on menu system's main menu (Parent view), the market. from where all the car's functions/menu 04 sources can be accessed, see page 228.

Centre console controls for menu navigation. Press MY CAR to open the menus under MY CAR. Press OK MENU to select/tick in the highlighted menu option or to store the selected function in the memory. Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up/down among the menu options. EXIT EXIT functions Use EXIT to go back in the menu structure or to undo the most recent selection. Depending on the menu level the cursor is on, with a press on EXIT, the cursor is moved different "lengths".

146 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menu source MY CAR

Steering wheel keypad* The following is an example of how a function MY CAR can be accessed and adjusted using the steer- The following options are available in menu ing wheel keypad: source MY CAR: 1. Press the centre console button MY CAR. 2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Settings, with the thumbwheel (1) and then press the thumbwheel - a submenu opens. 3. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car settings and press the thumbwheel - a submenu opens. 04 4. Scroll to Lock settings and press the The keypad may vary depending on market. thumbwheel - a new submenu opens. Turn the thumbwheel knob to scroll up/ 5. Scroll to Doors unlock and press the down among the menu options. thumbwheel - a submenu of selectable My XC60 Press the thumbwheel to select/tick in the functions opens. • highlighted menu option or to store the • DRIVe* 6. Choose between the options All doors selected function in the memory. and Driver door, then all and press the • Support systems (Support systems) EXIT (see additional information page thumbwheel - a cross is marked in the • Settings (Settings) 146). option's empty box. Search paths 7. Exit the programming by backing out of the Current menu level is shown at the top right of menus incrementally with short presses on the centre console display screen. Search EXIT (2) or with one long press. paths to the menu system functions are descri- The procedure is the same as with the centre bed in this manual in the following form: console's buttons - see page 146: OK MENU Settings Car settings Lock settings (2), EXIT (4) and the TUNE knob (3). Doors unlock Driver door, then all.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menu source MY CAR

My XC60 Driver support system Off: Empty square. • Select On/Off with OK - then back out of the menu with EXIT. Car settings

Car key memory p. 85 and On 104 Off 04 Lock settings p. 51, 59 and Doors automatic lock 61 MY CAR My XC60 MY CAR Support systems On The display screen shows a grouping of all of (MY CAR > Support systems) Off the car's driver support systems - these can be The display screen shows a summary of the activated or deactivated here. Doors unlock current status of the car's driver support sys- All doors My DRIVe* tems. Driver door, then Parts of Volvo's DRIVe concept are described Setup - menus here, amongst other things. all Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under • Start/Stop MY CAR Settings. Some menus have fur- Keyless entry • ECO driving guide ther submenus - these are then described in All doors detail in their respective sections. For more information - see page 124. Any door When selecting whether a function should be Doors on same activated/On or deactivated/Off a square is side displayed: Both front doors On: Selected square.

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menu source MY CAR

p. 64 p. 95 p. 172 Reduced Guard Home safe light duration Steering wheel force and 68 Activate once Low 30 sec Ask on exit Medium 60 sec High Side mirror settings p. 104 90 sec

Fold mirrors p. 93 Reset car settings Triple turn signal Tilt left mirror All menus in Car settings are On given original factory settings. Tilt right mirror Off Driving support systems 04 Light settings p. 50 p. 95 Lock confirmation light Temporary LH traffic Collision Warning p. 194 On On Collision Warning Off Off On Unlock confirmation light or Off Warning distance On Temporary RH traffic Long Off On Normal Off p. 51 Approach light duration and 95 Short p. 91 Off Active bending lights Warning sound 30 sec On On 60 sec Off Off 90 sec

149 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menu source MY CAR

Lane Departure Warning p. 204 Distance Alert p. 187 Screen saver p. 146 Lane Departure Warning On On On Off Off Off The TV screen's current content Driver Alert p. 201 fades out after a period of inac- On at start up On tivity and is replaced by a blank On screen if this option is selected. Off Off The current screen content returns if any of the TV screen's 04 Increased sensitivity System options buttons or controls are actuated. On Time p. 80 Language Off The instrument panel clock is set Selects language for menu texts. here. DSTC p. 170 Show help text On Time format p. 80 On Off 12h Off 24h City Safety p. 11 Explanatory text for the display and screen's current content is shown On 190 with this option selected. Off Distance and fuel unit p. 168 BLIS p. 213 MPG (UK) On MPG (US) Off km/l l/100km

150 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menu source MY CAR

Temperature unit Voice command list and detailed information - see page 256. Celsius Phone commands The menu options under Naviga- Fahrenheit Phone tion commands show several Selects the unit for the display of Phone call con- examples of available voice com- outside temperature and setting tact mands - only with Volvo's navi- of the climate control system. gation system RTI* installed. Phone dial num- Volumes ber Voice user setting Voice output volume Navigation commands Default setting 04 Park assist front volume Navigation User 1 Park assist rear volume Navigation User 2 repeat instruc- Here there is the option to create Phone ringing volume tion a second user profile - an advant- Navigation go to Reset system options age if more than one person shall address use the car/system regularly. All menus in System options are General commands Default setting gives factory set- given original factory settings. tings. Help Voice settings Cancel Voice tutorial Voice tutorial This menu option + OK provides The menu options under Phone spoken information about how commands show several exam- the system works. ples of available voice commands - only with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone installed. For more

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menu source MY CAR

Voice training Voice POI list Automatic blower adjust p. 154 User 1 Edit list Normal User 2 The number of facilities is exten- High sive and varies depending on With Voice training the voice Low market. Maximum 30 favourite recognition system is taught to facilities can be stored in this list. Recirculation timer recognise the driver's voice and pronunciation. A number of phra- Menu option Voice POI list is On ses are presented on the screen only shown if Volvo's navigation Off for the driver to read aloud. When system RTI* is installed. For more 04 the system has learnt how the information on Facilities and Automatic rear defroster driver talks, the presentation of Voice recognition - see the Navi- On the phrases stops. Following gation system's owner's manual. which e.g. User 1 can be Off selected in Voice user setting in Audio settings p. 224 Interior air quality system order that the system shall listen On to the right user. Climate settings Off Voice output volume Reset climate settings • A volume control appears on the screen - at which point, All menus in Climate settings proceed as follows: are given original factory settings. 1. Adjust the volume with the Favourites (FAV) p. 231 thumbwheel. 2. Test-listen using OK. Volvo On Call 3. Use EXIT to store the setting Described in a separate manual. and the menu is switched off. Information

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menu source MY CAR

Number of keys p. 50

VIN number p. 362

DivX® VOD code p. 244

Bluetooth software version in p. 250 car

Map and software version* 04 Only in cars with Volvo GPS nav- igator - see separate manual.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

General Sensor location Temporary shut-off of the air • The sun sensor1 is located on the top side conditioning Climate control of the dashboard. When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full The car is equipped with electronic climate The temperature sensor for the passenger acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the control. The climate control system cools or • compartment is located below the climate air conditioning can be temporarily switched heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas- control panel. off. There may then be a temporary increase in senger compartment. • The outside temperature sensor is located temperature in the passenger compartment. NOTE on the door mirror. Condensation • The humidity sensor* is located by the inte- In warm weather, condensation from the air The air conditioning system (AC) can be rior rearview mirror. conditioning may drip under the car. This is 04 switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compart- normal. ment and to prevent the windows from mist- NOTE Ice and snow ing, it should always be on. Do not cover or block the sensors with Remove ice and snow from the climate control clothing or other objects. system air intake (the grille between the bonnet Actual temperature and the windscreen). The temperature you select corresponds to the Side windows and panorama roof physical experience with reference to factors To ensure that the air conditioning works opti- Fault tracing and repair such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation mally the side windows, and panorama roof if Engage a workshop that has authorisation for etc. in and around the car. appropriate, should be closed. the fault tracing and repair of the climate con- The system includes a sun sensor1 which trol system. Volvo recommends that you con- Misting windows detects on which side the sun is shining into tact an authorised Volvo workshop. Remove misting on the insides of the windows the passenger compartment. This means that by primarily using the defroster function. Refrigerant the temperature can differ between the right The air conditioning system contains a refrig- To reduce the risk of misting, keep the win- and left-hand air vents despite the controls erant. This refrigerant contains no chlorine, dows clean and use window cleaner. being set for the same temperature on both which means that it is harmless to the ozone sides. layer. Engage a workshop that has authorisation for filling/changing refrigerant to carry out

1 Only applies to ECC.

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control the work. Volvo recommends that you contact the remote control key. The fan fills the and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning an authorised Volvo workshop. passenger compartment with fresh air. The agents and car care products recommended function starts when required and is dis- by Volvo, see page 357. Total airing function engaged automatically after a time or when The function opens/closes all side windows one of the passenger compartment doors Menu settings simultaneously and can be used for example to is opened. The amount of time the fan runs It is possible to activate/deactivate or change quickly air the car during hot weather, see is reduced gradually due to reduced need the default settings for four of the climate con- page 61. up until the car is 4 years old. trol system's functions via the centre console. • The air quality system IAQS is a fully auto- For general information about menu naviga- Passenger compartment filter matic system that cleans the air in the pas- tion, see page 147: All air entering the car's passenger compart- senger compartment from contaminants Fan speed in automatic mode*, see ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be • 04 such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous page 160. replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo oxides and ground-level ozone. Service Programme for the recommended • Recirculation timer for passenger compartment air, see page 161. replacement intervals. If the car is used in a NOTE severely contaminated environment, it may be • Automatic rear window defrosting, see necessary to replace the filter more often. To keep the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP page 105. the IAQS filter must be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depending on • Air quality system IAQS*, see page 161 NOTE whichever occurs first. However, up to The climate control system's functions can be There are different types of passenger com- 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP reset to the default settings via the menu sys- partment filter. Make sure that the correct and where the customer does not want to tem in MY CAR and this is carried out under: filter is fitted. keep the CZIP standard the IAQS filter must be changed at a regular service. Settings Climate settings Reset climate settings. Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* This option keeps the passenger compartment Use of tested materials in the interior clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub- equipment. stances. For more information on CZIP, see the The materials have been developed in order to brochure included with the purchase of the car. minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and they contribute to making The following is included: the passenger compartment easier to keep • An enhanced fan function that means that clean. The carpets in both the passenger com- the fan starts when the car is opened with partment and the cargo area are removable

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Air distribution Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars

The incoming air is divided between a number Open Closed of different vents in the passenger compart- Closed Open ment. Lateral airflow Lateral airflow Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode*. Vertical airflow Vertical airflow If necessary it can be controlled manually, see Aim the outer vents at the side windows to Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist- page 163. remove misting. ing in cold weather. Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat in hot weather.

NOTE Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts.

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

Temperature control, left-hand side Air distribution - air vent instrument panel Temperature control, right-hand side Electrically heated front seat, left-hand Air distribution - defroster windscreen Recirculation side Rear window and door mirror defrosters, AUTO Max. defroster see page 105 AC – – Air conditioning on/off Fan Electrically heated front seat, right-hand side Air distribution - ventilation floor

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Electronic Temperature Control, ETC

Fan Recirculation Electrically heated front seat, left-hand Electrically heated front seat, right-hand side side AC – – Air conditioning on/off Temperature control Max. defroster Air distribution - ventilation floor Air distribution - air vent instrument panel Air distribution - defroster windscreen Rear window and door mirror defrosters, see page 105

158 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Operating the controls Press the button three times for the lowest heat Press the button once for the highest heat level level – one orange lamp illuminates in the TV – three lamps illuminate. Heated seats* screen. Press the button twice for a lower heat level – Front seats Press the button four times to switch off the two lamps illuminate. heat – no lamps illuminate. Press the button three times for the lowest heat level – one lamp illuminates. WARNING Press the button four times to switch off the The heated seat should not be used by peo- heat – no lamps illuminate. ple who find it difficult to perceive temperature increase because of sensory loss or for Fan any reason have difficulty in managing to 04 use the control of the heated seat. Other- wise, burn injuries may arise. NOTE If the fan is fully switched off then the air Rear seat2 conditioning is not engaged - which can cause a risk of misting on the windows. Current heat level is shown in the centre console TV screen. Fan knob for ECC* One press on the button gives Turn the knob to increase or the highest heat level - three decrease fan speed. If AUTO orange lamps illuminate in the is selected then fan speed is centre console TV screen (see regulated automatically. The figure above). previously set fan speed is Press the button twice for a disengaged. lower heat level – two orange lamps illuminate in the TV screen.

2 Not included if 2-stage booster cushion is selected.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Fan knob for ETC figure shows the air distribution that is when AUTO is pressed. The TV screen shows Turn the knob to increase or selected. For more information on air distribu- AUTO CLIMATE. tion, see page 163. decrease fan speed. Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR under: Settings Climate settings Automatic blower adjust. Choose between Low, Normal or High: Air distribution • Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow is prioritised. 04 • Normal - Automatic fan control. • High - Automatic fan control. A more intense airflow is prioritised. For a description of the menu system, see The selected air distribution is shown in the centre page 147. console TV screen. Temperature control AUTO1 The temperature can be The Auto function automati- adjusted with the knob. For cally regulates temperature, ECC* the temperature for the driver's side and the passen- Air distribution - defroster windscreen air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation, and air distribu- ger side can be set sepa- Air distribution - air vent instrument panel tion. rately. Air distribution - ventilation floor When the car is started, the most recent setting If you select one or more manual functions, the is resumed. The figure consists of three buttons. When other functions continue to be controlled auto- pressing the buttons the corresponding figure matically. All manual settings are disengaged is illuminated in the TV screen (see figure below) and an arrow in front of each part of the

1 Only applies to ECC.

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

NOTE The following also takes place in order to pro- IMPORTANT vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by ger compartment: If the air in the car recirculates for too long, selecting a higher/lower temperature than there is a risk of misting on the insides of the the actual temperature required. • the air conditioning is automatically windows. engaged AC – Air conditioning on/off • recirculation and the air quality system are Timer When the lamp in the AC but- automatically disengaged. With the timer function activated the system ton illuminates, the air condi- will exit manually activated recirculation mode tioning is controlled by the NOTE according to a time that depends on the out- system's automatic function. The noise level increases as the fan is oper- side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, 04 This way, incoming air is ating at max. misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the cooled and dehumidified. function in the menu system MY CAR under When the lamp in the AC button is switched off When the defroster is switched off the climate Settings Climate settings the air conditioning is disconnected. Other control returns to the previous settings. Recirculation timer. For a description of the functions are still controlled automatically. menu system, see page 147. When the max. defroster function is activated Recirculation the air conditioning is switched on automati- Recirculation NOTE cally, so that the air is dehumidified at the maxi- When recirculation is When max. defroster is selected, recircula- mum setting. engaged the orange lamp in tion is always deactivated. the button illuminates. The Max. defroster function is selected to shut Used to quickly remove mist- Air quality system IAQS* out bad air, exhaust gases ing and ice from the wind- The air quality system separates gases and etc. from the passenger com- screen and side windows. Air particles to reduce the levels of odours and partment. The air in the pas- flowing to the windows. The pollution in the passenger compartment. If the senger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no light in the defroster button outside air is contaminated then the air intake outside air is taken into the car when this func- illuminates when the function is closed and the air is recirculated. tion is activated. is active. Activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Climate

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

settings Interior air quality system. For a Cars with Eco Start/Stop DRIVe* description of the menu system, see With an auto-stopped engine certain equip- page 147. ment has its function temporarily reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed. For more informa- NOTE tion, see page 125. The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment. Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting. 04 If the insides of the windows start misting up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the defroster functions for the windscreen, the side and the rear windows should also be used to demist the windows.

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Air distribution table Air distribution Use Air distribution Use Air to windows. Some air to remove ice and misting Air to the floor and win- to ensure comfortable flows from the air vents. quickly. dows. Some air flows conditions and good The air is not recirculated. from the dashboard air demisting in cold or Air conditioning is always vents. humid weather. engaged.

Air to windscreen, via to prevent misting and Air to floor and from in sunny weather with defroster vent, and side icing in a cold and humid dashboard air vents. cool outside tempera- 04 windows. Some air flows climate, (not at too low tures. from the air vents. fan speed to enable this).

Airflow to windows and to ensure good comfort in Air to floor. Some air to direct heat or cold to from dashboard air vents. warm, dry weather. flows to the dashboard the floor. air vents and windows.

Airflow to the head and to ensure efficient cooling Airflow to windows, to provide cooler air chest from the dashboard in warm weather. from dashboard air along the floor or warmer air vents. vents and to the floor. air higher up in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

163 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

Fuel-driven heater Refuelling Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel General information about the parking level is too low, the parking heater will be heater switched off automatically and a message The parking heater heats the engine and pas- appears on the information display. Acknowl- senger compartment and can be started edge the message by pressing the indicator directly or with the timer. stalk READ button once, see page 165. Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car IMPORTANT is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys- Repeated use of the parking heater com- 04 tem calculates when heating should be started bined with short journeys may discharge the based on the outside temperature. battery and impair starting.

The heater cannot start if the outside tempera- Warning label on fuel filler flap. The car should be driven for the same time ture exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower the as the heater is used to ensure that the car's maximum running time of the parking heater is battery is recharged adequately to replace WARNING 50 minutes. the energy consumed by the heater when it Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch is used on a regular basis. WARNING off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel. The car must be outdoors when the parking Check the information display to see that heater is used. the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows NOTE Park heat ON. When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous- Parking on a hill ing, which is perfectly normal. If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

Operation NOTE Sym- Display Specification bol

2 Heater The heater has

G02510 - Figure 2 in the symbol means the stopped been stopped by second climate control system in the car, 2 the car's electron- where the normal climate control system is G02510 Low bat- the first. The figure 2 has nothing to do with tery ics in order to facil- TIMER 1 or TIMER 2. itate starting the engine.

Sym- Display Specification Heater Setting the heater unavail. is not possible due 04

bol 2 to fuel level being G02510 Low fuel Fuel The heater is level too low READ button heater switched on and (approx. 7 litres) - 2 running. this is in order to Thumbwheel G02510 ON facilitate starting RESET - resets/selects Timer is The heater's timer the engine as well set for is activated after as approx. 50 km For more information on the information dis- 2 the remote control G02510 Fuel driving. play and READ, see page 144. heater key has been removed from the Park Heater not work- ignition switch and heater ing. Contact a

Symbols and display messages 2 workshop for When one of the timer's settings or leaving the car - G02510 Service repair. Volvo rec- Direct start is activated, the infor- the engine and required ommends that you mation symbol in the combined instrument passenger com- contact an author- panel illuminates while the information display partment are ised Volvo work- shows an explanatory text and a further illumi- heated at the set shop. nated symbol. The table shows symbols and time. display texts that appear.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

A display text clears automatically after a time Setting the timer Set the alternative time in the same way as or after one press on the indicator stalk The time when the car shall be used and heated Park heat timer 1. READ button. is specified with the timer. Deactivating a timer-started heater Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2. A timer-started heater can be switched off Direct start and immediate stop manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro- 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start NOTE ceed as follows: Park heat. The timer can only be programmed when 1. Press READ. 2. Press RESET to select between ON and the remote control key is in key position I, 2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text OFF. see page 82 - programming must therefore be carried out before starting the engine. Park heat timer 1 or 2. 04 ON: Parking heater switched on manually or > The text ON flashes on the display. with programmed timer. 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat 3. Press RESET. OFF: Parking heater switched off. timer 1. > The text OFF is shown with a constant Following the direct start of the heater it will be 2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- glow and the heater is switched OFF. activated for 50 minutes. ing hours setting. A timer-started heater can be switched off in Heating of the passenger compartment will 3. Select the required hour using the thumb- accordance with the instructions in the section begin as soon as the engine coolant has wheel. "Direct start and immediate stop", see reached the correct temperature. page 166. 4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- NOTE ing minutes setting. Clock/timer 5. Select the required minute using the The heater's time is connected to the car's The car can be started and driven while the clock. parking heater is running. thumbwheel. 6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting. NOTE 7. Press RESET to activate the timer. All timer programming will be cleared if the After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start car's clock is reset. time can be programmed with Park heat timer 2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel.

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Additional heater*

General information about the Passenger compartment heater* additional heater If the additional heater is supplemented with In cold climate zones1 an additional heater may timer function then it can be used as a fuel- be required to obtain the correct operating driven passenger compartment heater, see temperature in the engine and to obtain suffi- page 164. cient heating in the passenger compartment. Electric additional heater Fuel-driven additional heater Cars with certain petrol engines2 have an elec- A fuel-driven additional heater is fitted in cars tric additional heater integrated into the car's with diesel engines. climate control system. 04 The heater starts automatically when extra In a semi-cold1 climate zone diesel-driven cars heat is required when the engine is running. READ button have an electric additional heater instead of a fuel-driven version. The heater is switched off automatically when Thumbwheel the correct temperature is reached or when the The heater cannot be controlled manually but engine is switched off. RESET button is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside tempera- 1. Before starting the engine: Select key posi- tures below 14 °C and is switched off after the NOTE tion I, see page 82. set passenger compartment temperature has When the additional heater is active there 2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional been reached. may be smoke from the right-hand wheel heat auto. housing which is perfectly normal. 3. Press RESET to select between ON and OFF. Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater's automatic start sequence can be switched off if required. NOTE The menu options are only visible in key position I - any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine.

1 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned. 2 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

General Functions NOTE There may be a slight error in the reading if NOTE a fuel-driven supplementary and/or parking If a warning message appears when the trip heater* has been used. computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated. Acknowledge the Km to empty tank warning message by pressing READ. The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display To change unit for distance and speed - go to shows the approximate distance that can be 04 MY CAR Settings System options driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the Distance and fuel unit, see page 146. tank. Information display and controls. Average speed An economic driving style generally results in a READ - confirms. Average speed is calculated from the last longer driving distance. For more information resetting. Reset using RESET. on how fuel consumption can be influenced, Thumbwheel – browse between menus see page 13. and options in the trip computer list. Instantaneous No guaranteed range remains when the display Current fuel consumption is calculated every RESET – resets. shows "---- km to empty tank". Refuel as second. The information on the display is soon as possible. The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop. updated every couple of seconds. When the One of the menu options is a blank display - it car is stationary, "----" appears on the display. also marks the beginning/end of the loop. NOTE Average There may be a slight error in the reading if Average fuel consumption is calculated from the driving style has been changed. the last resetting. Reset using RESET. Resetting 1. Select --- km/h average speed or --.- l/ 100km average.

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected function. If RESET is kept depressed for at least 3 three seconds then Average speed and Average are reset simultaneously.

Current speed*1 The instrument panel display changes to show current speed in mph (miles per hour) if the speedometer is graduated in km/h. If the speedometer is graduated in mph then the display changes to km/h. 04

1 Only certain markets.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

DSTC – Stability and traction control system

General information on DSTC engine braking when driving in low gears on skidding with the rear section up to a certain The stability and traction control system, DSTC slippery road surfaces. level before it intervenes and stabilises the car. (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control) helps the Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's amongst other things, impair the driver's ability the accelerator pedal then the DSTC system traction. to steer the car. intervenes and stabilises the car. The activation of the system during braking Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA With Sport mode, maximum traction is may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car The function serves to stabilise the car and obtained if the car has become stuck, or when may accelerate slower than expected when the trailer combination if it begins to snake, see driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep accelerator pedal is depressed. page 301. snow. 04 Active Yaw Control Proceed as follows to select Sport mode: The function limits the driving and brake force NOTE 1. Press the centre console button MY CAR of the wheels individually in order to stabilise The function is deactivated if the driver and search in the display screen's menu the car. selects Sport mode. system and locate My XC60 DSTC. (For Spin Control information on the menu system, see page 146). The function prevents the driving wheels from Operation spinning against the road surface during accel- 2. Uncheck the box and back out of the menu eration. Selection of level - Sport mode system with EXIT. The DSTC system is always activated - it can- > The system then allows a more sporty Traction control system not be deactivated. The function is active at low speed and trans- driving style. fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- However, the driver can select the Sport mode, The Sport mode is active until the driver dese- ning to the one that is not. which allows for a more active driving experi- lects it or until the engine is switched off - after ence. In Sport mode the system detects the engine is started the next time the DSTC Engine drag control - EDC whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel system is back in its normal mode again. EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involun- movements and cornering are more active than tary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or in normal driving and then allows controlled

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

DSTC – Stability and traction control system

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification DSTC Temporarily OFF DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required DSTC system disengaged. • Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again. • Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

"Message" There is a message on the speedometer's display - Read it! 04 and

Constant glow for System check when the engine is started. 2 seconds.

Flashing light. DSTC system is being activated.

Sport mode is activated.

171 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adapting driving characteristics

Active chassis - Four-C* Operation Steering wheel force and select Low, Active chassis, Four-C (Continously Controlled Medium or High. Chassis Concept), regulates the characteris- For a description of the menu system, see tics of the shock absorbers so that the car's page 146. This menu cannot be accessed driving characteristics can be adjusted. There while the car is in motion. are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced. Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as being more comfortable on rough and uneven 04 road surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and the movement of the body is smooth and gentle. Chassis settings. Sport This setting means that the car is perceived as Use the buttons in the centre console to being more sporty and is recommended for change setting. The setting in use when the more active driving. Steering response is faster engine is switched off is activated next time the than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is engine is started. harder and the body follows the road in order to reduce rolling during cornering. Speed related power steering* Advanced Steering force increases with the speed of the This setting is only recommended on very even car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The and smooth road surfaces. steering is firmer and more immediate on motorways. Steering is light and requires no The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi- extra effort when parking and at low speed. mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further minimised. The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity. Go to the menu system MY CAR and locate Settings Car settings

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control*

Operation The cruise control is then activated with or Temporary deactivation - standby mode , after which the current speed is stored in Press to temporarily disengage the cruise the memory - the display text (---) km/h control and set it in standby mode - set speed changes to show the selected speed, e.g. 100 is shown in brackets in the display (5), e.g. km/h. (100) km/h. Automatic standby mode NOTE Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and Cruise control cannot be engaged at set in standby mode if: speeds below 30 km/h. • wheels lose traction 04 Changing the speed • the foot brake is used In active mode the speed is adjusted with long • speed falls below approx. 30 km/h Steering wheel keypad and display. or short presses on or - the last press is • the clutch pedal is depressed Cruise control - On/Off. stored in the memory. • the gear selector is moved to neutral position (automatic gearbox) Standby mode ceases and the stored A temporary increase in speed with the accel- speed is resumed. erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not • the driver maintains a speed higher than affect the cruise control setting - the car returns the set speed for longer than 1 minute. Standby mode to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is The driver must then regulate the speed. Activate and adjust the speed. released. Resume set speed Selected speed (in brackets = Standby NOTE Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated mode). with one press on the steering wheel button If any cruise control button is held - the speed is then set to the last stored Activating and setting the speed depressed for more than approx. 1 minute speed. Switch on the cruise control with one press on then cruise control is disengaged. The engine must be switched off in order to reset the steering wheel button - the symbol cruise control. NOTE is illuminated in the display (5) and the brackets around (---) km/h show that the cruise control A significant increase in speed may arise is set in standby mode. after the speed has been resumed with .

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control*

Deactivate The cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button or by switching off the engine - the set speed is deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the button.

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Speed limiter

General information on the speed Activate and adjust the maximum speed When stationary limiter (each press gives +/-5 km/h). 1. Press the steering wheel button to A speed limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regar- Stored maximum speed (in brackets = switch on the speed limiter. ded as a reverse cruise control - the driver reg- Standby mode). 2. Scroll with the button until the instru- ulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a Switch on and activate ment panel display shows the desired pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter. When the speed limiter is maximum speed. active the display will show its > The speed limiter is then active and the symbol in combination with display (5) shows the maximum speed Operation the set maximum speed. selected and the maximum speed stored in the memory. Selection and storage of the 04 highest possible speed in the Temporary deactivation - standby mode memory can be made both during a journey To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and and while stationary. set it in standby mode: While driving Press . 1. When the car is moving at the desired highest possible speed: Press the steering > The display shows the stored maximum wheel button to switch on the speed speed in brackets (5) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum limiter. speed. > The symbol for the speed limiter is illuminated on the instrument panel dis- The speed limiter is re-activated by one Steering wheel keypad and display. play. press on at which the display's Speed limiter - On/Off. brackets disappear and the car's maxi- 2. Press one of the steering wheel buttons mum speed is again limited. Standby mode ceases and stored speed or until the instrument panel display resumes - each extra press gives +1 km/h. shows the desired maximum speed. Temporary deactivation with the Standby mode. > The speed limiter is then active and the accelerator pedal display (5) shows the maximum speed The speed limiter can also be set in standby selected and the maximum speed mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rap- stored in the memory. idly accelerating the car out of a situation:

175 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Speed limiter

Depress the accelerator pedal fully. Press the steering wheel button . > The display shows the stored maximum > The display's symbol for the speed lim- speed in brackets (5) and the driver can iter and the set speed (5) are cleared. temporarily exceed the set maximum The selected and stored speed are thus speed. deleted from the memory and cannot be The speed limiter is automatically re- resumed with the button. activated after the release of the accel- The driver can then use the accelerator erator pedal and the car's speed is pedal to choose a speed without limita- slowed down to below the selected/ tion. stored maximum speed - the display's 04 brackets disappear and the car's maximum speed is again limited.

Alarm for speed exceeded On steep roads the engine braking effect may be inadequate and the selected maximum speed exceeded. The driver is alerted about this with an acoustic signal. The signal is active until the driver has slowed to below the selected maximum speed.

NOTE The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h provided that none of the buttons or has been depressed during the last half minute.

Deactivate To deactivate the speed limiter:

176 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

General information on ACC WARNING Function The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive The driver must always be observant with Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe regard to the traffic conditions and intervene distance from the vehicle ahead. The cruise when the adaptive cruise control is not control provides a more relaxing driving expe- maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis- rience on long journeys on motorways and long tance. straight main roads in smooth traffic flows. The adaptive cruise control cannot handle The driver sets the desired speed and time all traffic, weather and road conditions. interval to the car in front. When the radar Read the whole of this section for informa- detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. control. The driver must be familiar with this 04 When the road is clear again the car returns to information before using the adaptive cruise the selected speed. control. 1 The driver always bears responsibility for Function overview . If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or maintaining the correct distance and speed, Warning lamp, braking by driver required set to the standby mode and the car comes too even when the adaptive cruise control is close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is being used. Steering wheel keypad warned by Distance Warning (see page 187) about the short distance. Radar sensor IMPORTANT Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise Maintenance of adaptive cruise control control system and a coordinated spacing sys- components must only be performed at a tem. workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Automatic gearbox Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced functionality with the adaptive cruise control's Queue Assistant, see page 181.

1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

WARNING The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the If the car needs to be braked more heavily than vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval cruise control capacity and the driver does not Adaptive cruise control is not a collision set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see brake, then the cruise control uses the collision avoidance system. The driver must inter- any vehicle in front then the car will instead warning system's warning lamp and warning vene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front. maintain the cruise control's set speed. This sound (see page 195) to alert the driver that also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front immediate intervention is required. The adaptive cruise control does not brake exceeds the cruise control's set speed. for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. The cruise control aims to control the speed in NOTE Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi- a smooth way. In situations that demand sud- The warning lamp may be difficult to notice cles and objects. den braking the driver must brake himself/her- in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are 04 Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for self. This applies with large differences in being worn. example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking WARNING water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ may come unexpectedly or not at all, see snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or page 183. Cruise control only warns of vehicles on slip roads. detected by the radar sensor. Consequently The adaptive cruise control can be activated to there may be no warning or it may be sub- follow another vehicle at speeds from The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but 2 measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control 30 km/h up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls brake when it is necessary. regulates the speed with acceleration and below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low too low, the cruise control is set in standby Steep roads and/or heavy load mode at which automatic braking ceases - the sound when they are being used by cruise con- Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is driver must then take over himself/herself to trol. primarily intended for use when driving on level maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead. road surfaces. The cruise control may have dif- WARNING Warning lamp - braking by driver ficultly in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep roads, The brake pedal moves when the cruise required with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which control brakes. Do not rest your foot under Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity case, be extra attentive and ready to slow the brake pedal as it could become trapped. that is equivalent to more than 40% of the car's down. braking capacity.

2 Queue Assistant (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h, see page 181.

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

Operation Activating and setting the speed Switch on cruise control with one press on the steering wheel button - the symbol is illuminated in the display. The brackets (6) at (---) mean that cruise control is set in standby mode. The cruise control is then activated with or , after which the current speed is stored in the memory - the display text (---) changes to show the selected speed, e.g. 100 without 04 brackets. Steering wheel keypad4 and display. When the symbol changes Steering wheel keypad3 and display. Standby mode ceases and the stored to the radar sensor has Cruise control - On/Off. speed is resumed. detected a vehicle. Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode. Standby mode ceases and stored speed Only when the symbol resumes - each extra press gives +1 km/h. Time interval - Increase/decrease. (with car) is illuminated, is the Standby mode Activate and adjust the speed. distance to the vehicle in front regulated by the cruise control. Time interval - Increase/decrease. Selected speed (in brackets = Standby Activate and adjust the speed (each press mode). Changing the speed gives +/-5 km/h). Time interval - On, during adjustment. In active mode the speed is adjusted 5 km/h with each press on or . In active mode Selected speed (in brackets = Standby Time interval - On, after adjustment. mode). the button has the same function as but results in a lower increase in speed. The last Time interval - On, during adjustment. press is stored in the memory. Time interval - On, after adjustment.

3 Cars with Speed limiter. 4 Cars without Speed limiter. A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

NOTE The adaptive cruise control allows the time Temporary deactivation - standby mode interval to vary noticeably in certain situations Press the steering wheel button to tempo- If any cruise control button is held in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in rarily disengage the cruise control and set it in depressed for more than approx. 1 minute front smoothly and comfortably. then cruise control is disengaged. The standby mode - set speed is shown in brackets engine must be switched off in order to reset Note that a short time interval only allows the in the display, e.g. (100). cruise control. driver a short time to react and take action if Keypad without Speed limiter* any unforeseen traffic problem should arise. In certain situations, cruise control cannot Press the steering wheel button to tempo- be activated. Then the display shows The number of lines for the Cruise control Unavailable, see rarily disengage cruise control and set it in page 185. selected time interval is standby mode. shown during the setting itself 04 and for several seconds after- Standby mode due to driver intervention Set time interval wards. Then a smaller scale Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and Different time intervals to the version of the symbol is set in standby mode if: vehicle in front can be shown to the right of the dis- • the foot brake is used selected and shown in the play. The same symbol is also shown when display as 1-5 horizontal lines Distance Warning is activated, see page 187. • the clutch pedal is depressed for longer - the more lines the longer the than 1 minute5 time distance. One line corre- NOTE • the gear selector is moved to N position sponds to approximately (automatic gearbox) 1 second, 5 lines approximately 2.5 seconds. Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations. • the driver maintains a speed higher than The time interval is increased or decreased the set speed for longer than 1 minute If cruise control does not seem to react to with the steering wheel keypad's thumbwheel activation the reason may be that the time The driver must then regulate the speed. (or the buttons / for cars without Speed interval to the closest vehicle prevents an A temporary increase in speed with the accel- limiter). increase in speed. erator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not At low speed, when the distances are short, the The higher the speed, the longer the calcu- affect the cruise control setting - the car returns adaptive cruise control increases the time lated distance in metres for a specific time to the last stored speed when the accelerator interval slightly. interval. pedal is released.

5 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

Automatic standby mode NOTE • Automatic activation parking brake. Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other Note that the lowest programmable speed for A significant increase in speed may arise systems e.g. stability and traction control the cruise control is 30 km/h - even though the after the speed has been resumed with . (DSTC). If any of these systems stop working cruise control is capable of following another then cruise control is automatically deacti- vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed vated. Deactivate cannot be selected. In the event of automatic deactivation a signal The cruise control is switched off with the Extended speed range will sound and the message Cruise control steering wheel button . The set speed is Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver cleared and cannot be resumed with the must then intervene and adapt the speed and button. NOTE distance to the vehicle ahead. In order to activate the cruise control the 04 Keypad without Speed limiter driver's door must be closed and the driver An automatic deactivation can be due to: The cruise control is switched off with the must be wearing the seatbelt. • engine speed is too low/high steering wheel button in standby mode or with one long press in active mode. The set • speed falls below 30 km/h6 • With the automatic gearbox the cruise con- speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with • wheels lose traction trol can follow another vehicle within the the button. range of 0-200 km/h - right down to sta- • brake temperature is high tionary and up to 200 km/h. • the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet Queue Assistant snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked). In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive NOTE Resume set speed cruise control has the Queue Assistant function Activation of the cruise control below Cruise control in standby mode is re-activated (sometimes also referred to as "Queue 30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a with one press on the steering wheel button Assist". reasonable distance. - the speed is then set to the last stored Queue Assistant has the following functions: speed. For shorter stops in connection with inching in • Extended speed range slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is auto- • Change of target matically resumed if the stops do not exceed • Automatic braking ceases when stationary about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the cruise

6 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

control is set in standby mode. The driver must Change of target Automatic standby mode with change of then re-activate the cruise control in one of the target following ways: Cruise control is disengaged and set in • Press the steering wheel button . standby mode: or • when the speed is below 15 km/h and cruise control is not sure whether the target • Press the accelerator pedal and accelerate object is a stationary vehicle or some other up to at least about 4 km/h (normal walking object, e.g. a speed bump. pace). • when the speed is below 15 km/h and the The cruise control will then resume following vehicle in front turns off so the cruise con- 04 the vehicle in front. If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front. trol no longer has a vehicle to follow. NOTE When the cruise control is following another Automatic braking ceases when vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and changes stationary The cruise control can hold the car station- target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the In certain situations the cruise control inter- ary for a maximum of 2 minutes - then the cruise control will slow down for the stationary parking brake is applied and the cruise con- rupts braking when stationary. This means that trol is disengaged. vehicle. the foot brake is released and the driver must brake himself/herself. • The driver has to release the parking WARNING brake before the cruise control can be Cruise control releases the foot brake and is reactivated. When the cruise control is following another set in standby mode when: vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km/h and the driver puts his/her foot on the brake the target is changed from a moving vehicle • to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will pedal ignore the stationary vehicle and instead • the parking brake is applied select the stored speed. • the gear selector is moved to P, N or R • The driver must intervene him/herself position and brake. • the driver sets the cruise control in standby mode.

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

Automatic activation parking brake WARNING WARNING In some situations the cruise control applies the parking brake in order to keep a stationary The driver must always be observant with Adaptive cruise control is not a collision regard to the traffic conditions and intervene avoidance system. The driver must inter- car remaining stationary. when the adaptive cruise control is not vene if the system does not detect a vehicle This takes place if: maintaining a suitable speed or suitable dis- in front. tance. • the driver opens the door or takes off his/ The adaptive cruise control does not brake her seatbelt The adaptive cruise control cannot handle for humans or animals, and not for small all traffic, weather and road conditions. vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. • DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi- Read the whole of this section for informa- mode cles and objects. tion on the limitations of the adaptive cruise • cruise control has held the car stationary control. The driver must be familiar with this Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for 04 for more than 2 minutes information before using the adaptive cruise example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at • the engine is switched off control. junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ The driver always bears responsibility for • the brakes have overheated. snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or maintaining the correct distance and speed, on slip roads. even when the adaptive cruise control is The radar sensor and its limitations being used. Apart from the adaptive cruise control, the The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehicles in front is reduced significantly: radar sensor is also used by the Collision WARNING Warning with Auto Brake function (see • if the radar sensor becomes blocked and page 194) and the Distance Warning function Accessories or other objects such as auxil- cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy (see page 187). The function of the radar sen- iary lamps must not be installed in front of rain or slush, or if other objects have col- the grille. sor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the lected in front of the radar sensor. same direction, in the same lane. Modification of the radar sensor could result in NOTE it being illegal to use. Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor clean.

• if the speed of vehicles in front is significantly different from your own speed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

Examples where the cruise control does Sometimes the radar sensor is late at not work optimally detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g. The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In a vehicle that drives in between the car and some situations another vehicle is not vehicles in front. detected, or the detection is made later than Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or expected. vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected. In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view. 04 Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Radar blocked See manual this means that the radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked and that vehicles in front of the car could not be detected. In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise Control, Distance Warning and Collision Warn- ing with Auto Brake functions are not operating either. The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action.

ACC field of vision.

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

Cause Action The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig- No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy nals. road surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked. 04

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.

Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.

Time interval activated, during adjustment.

Time interval activated, after adjustment.

DSTC Normal for inc. of Cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC) has been cruise set in Normal mode - see page 170.

Cruise control Cancelled The cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control*

Symbol Message Specification Cruise control Unavailable Cruise control cannot be activated. This could be due to: • brake temperature is high • the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain. Radar blocked See manual Cruise control temporarily disengaged. • The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy 04 rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 183.

Cruise control Service Cruise control disengaged. required • Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Press Brake To hold + The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to acoustic alarm take over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll. (Only with Queue Assistant) • The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.

Below 30 km/h Only fol- Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in front lowing within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres). (Only with Queue Assistant)

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Warning*

General NOTE Some combinations of the selected equipment Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function leave no vacant space for a button in the centre Distance warning is deactivated during the console - in which case the function is handled that informs the driver about the time interval time the adaptive cruise control is active. to vehicles in front. by the car's menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings Warning Distance Warning is active at speeds above WARNING distance. For a description of the menu sys- 30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in tem - see page 146.) front of the car, in the same direction. No dis- Distance warning only reacts if the distance tance information is provided for oncoming, to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the pre- Set time interval slow or stationary vehicles. set value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected. 04 Operation

Controls and display for time interval. Orange warning lamp1. Time interval - Increase/decrease. Press An orange warning lamp in the windscreen illu- up to increase, down to decrease. minates with a constant glow if the distance to Time interval - On (during adjustment). the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time Press the button in the centre console to switch Time interval - On (after adjustment). interval. the function on or off. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Warning*

Different time intervals to the NOTE ing system. For more information on the radar vehicle in front can be sensor and its limitations, see page 183. selected and shown in the The higher the speed, the longer the calcu- display as 1-5 horizontal lines lated distance in metres for a specific time interval. NOTE - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre- The set time interval is also used by the Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing sponds to approximately adaptive cruise control function, see page 179. sunglasses, could mean that the warning 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approx- light in the windscreen cannot be seen. imately 2.5 seconds. Only use the time interval that is allowed in accordance with local traffic regulations. Poor weather or winding roads could affect The number of lines for the the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehi- 04 selected time interval is cles in front. shown during the setting itself Limitations The size of other vehicles could also affect and for several seconds after- The function uses the same radar sensor as detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This wards. Then a smaller scale adaptive cruise control and the collision warn- could mean that the warning lamp illumi- version of the symbol is nates at a shorter distance than the setting shown to the right of the dis- or that the warning is temporarily absent. play. The same symbol is also shown when Extremely high speeds can also cause the adaptive cruise control is activated. lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Set time interval, during adjustment.

Set time interval, after adjustment.

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Warning*

Symbol Message Specification Radar blocked See manual Distance Warning temporarily disengaged. The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 183.

Collision warn. Service Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged. required Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

General If the car is also equipped with a Collision Function City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two to avoid a collision when driving in queues, systems complement each other. For more amongst other things, when changes in the information on Collision Warning function with traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in atten- Auto Brake, see page 194. tion, could lead to an incident. IMPORTANT The function is active at speeds below 30 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically Maintenance and replacement of City braking the car in the event of imminent risk of Safety™ components must only be per- collision with vehicles in front, should the driver formed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 04 not react in time by braking and/or steering away. WARNING City Safety™ is activated in situations where Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window1. the driver should have started braking earlier, City Safety™ does not engage in all driving which is why it cannot help the driver in every situations or traffic, weather or road condi- City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the situation. tions. car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of City Safety™ is designed to be activated as City Safety™ does not react to vehicles collision, City Safety™ will automatically brake driving in a different direction from the car, late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary the car, which may be experienced as sudden intervention. to small vehicles, motorcycles and bicycles or to humans and animals. braking. City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse City Safety™ can prevent collision at a If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation for the driver to change his/her driving style. If speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do higher speed difference, it is only possible completely prevent a collision. the braking, there will be a collision sooner or to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain later. full brake function, the driver must depress City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking the brake pedal. and stops the car in normal circumstances, just The driver or passengers normally only notice behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this City Safety™ if a situation arises where the car Never wait for City Safety™ to engage. The driver always bears responsibility for main- is well outside normal driving style and may be is extremely close to being in a collision. taining the proper distance and speed. experienced as being uncomfortable.

1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

If the difference in speed between the vehicles Using MY CAR on the centre console display Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for is greater than 15 km/h then City Safety™ may screen with its menu system, search and locate projecting load, or accessories such as auxili- not prevent the collision on its own. To obtain Settings Car settings Driving support ary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the full brake force, the driver must depress the systems City Safety. Select the Off option. bonnet limit the function. brake pedal. This could then make it possible For more information on the menu system MY The infrared light from the sensor in City to prevent a collision, even at speed differen- CAR, see page 146). Safety™ measures how the light is reflected. ces above 15 km/h. The sensor cannot detect objects with low However, the function will be enabled the next When the function is activated and brakes, the reflection capacity. The rear sections of the time the engine is started, regardless of instrument panel display shows a message to vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently whether the system was enabled or disabled the effect that the function is/has been active. thanks to the number plate and rear light reflec- when the engine was switched off. tors. 04 NOTE WARNING On slippery road surfaces the braking distance The brake lights come on when City is extended, which may reduce the capacity of The laser sensor also transmits laser light Safety™ brakes the car. City Safety™ to avoid a collision. In such sit- when City Safety™ is disabled manually. uations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with main- Operation To enable City Safety™ again: tained stability. • Follow the same procedure as for disa- When the car is reversing City Safety™ cannot NOTE bling, but select the On option. be activated. The City Safety™ function is always ena- City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds - bled after the engine has been started via Limitations key position I and II (see page 82 on key under 4 km/h, which is why the system does positions). The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to not intervene in situations where a vehicle in detect cars and other large vehicles in front of front is being approached very slowly, e.g. the car irrespective of whether it is day or night. when parking. On and Off In certain situations, it may advisable to disable However, the sensor has limitations and has Driver commands are always prioritised, which City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches could poorer functionality in e.g. heavy snowfall or is why City Safety™ does not intervene in sit- sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen. rain, dense fog, dust storms or snow flurries. uations where the driver is steering, braking or Mist, dirt, ice or snow on the windscreen may accelerating in a clear manner, even if a colli- After starting the engine City Safety™ can be disrupt the function. sion is unavoidable. deactivated as follows:

191 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

When City Safety™ has prevented a collision The Windscreen Sensors blocked message IMPORTANT with a stationary object the car remains sta- is not shown for all situations in which the laser tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, diligent about keeping the windscreen and laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a then speed is reduced to the same speed as area in front of the laser sensor clean. surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), that maintained by the vehicle in front. The following table presents possible causes then a workshop must be contacted for On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops for the message being shown, along with sug- repair or replacement of the windscreen (see the illustration for sensor location, page when City Safety™ has stopped the car, unless gestions for appropriate action. 190) - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec- the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal ommended. beforehand. Cause Action Failure to take action may result in reduced 04 performance for City Safety™. NOTE The windscreen sur- Clean the wind- face in front of the screen surface in To avoid the risk of reducing City Safety™ • Keep the windscreen surface in front of laser sensor is dirty front of the sensor performance the following also applies: the laser sensor free from ice, snow and or covered with ice from dirt, ice and dirt (see the illustration for sensor loca- • The same type or a Volvo-approved or snow. snow. tion, page 190). windscreen must be fitted during replacement • Do not affix or mount anything on the The laser sensor Remove the block- windscreen in front of the laser sensor field of vision is ing object. • The same type or Volvo-approved blocked. windscreen wipers must be fitted during • Remove ice and snow from the bonnet replacement. - snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm. Laser sensor Fault tracing and action The City Safety™ function includes a sensor If the message Windscreen Sensors which transmits laser light. Contact a qualified blocked is shown on the instrument panel dis- workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser play, it indicates that the laser sensor is sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of workshop is recommended. the car. This means that City Safety™ is not operational.

192 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

City Safety™

WARNING For more information on the laser sensor, see A text message can be acknowledged by page 11. briefly pressing the READ button on the direc- Never look into the laser sensor (which tion indicator stalk. emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magni- Symbols and messages in the display fying optics such as a magnifying glass, In conjunction with automatic braking by the microscope, lens or similar optical instru- City Safety™ system, one or more symbols ments - this would involve a risk of eye injury may illuminate on the instrument panel and a (the illustration on page 190 shows sensor location). message may appear on its display.

04 Symbol Message Meaning/Action Auto braking by City Safety City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it. blocked • Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor. Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 191.

City Safety Service City Safety™ is not operational. required • Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

193 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian detection*

General The collision warning system must not be used WARNING Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Pedes- as an excuse for the driver to change his/her The collision warning system does not trian Detection (Collision Warning with Full driving style. If the driver solely relies on Colli- sion Warning with Auto Brake to do the brak- engage in all driving situations or traffic, Auto Brake and Pedestrian Detection) is weather or road conditions. The collision designed to assist the driver when there is a ing, there will be a collision sooner or later. warning system does not react to vehicles risk of colliding with a pedestrian or vehicles in The collision warning system and City driving in another direction to the car or to front that are stationary or moving in the same Safety™ complement each other. For more animals. direction. information on City Safety™, see page 190. Warning only activated in the event of a high The collision warning system has the following risk for collision. The Function section and the section after advise about limitations of three functions. IMPORTANT which the driver should be aware before 04 • Collision Warning – Warns the driver of a Maintenance of collision warning system using Collision Warning with Auto Brake. potentially imminent collision. components must only be performed at a Warnings and brake interventions for workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop pedestrians are switched off at vehicle • Brake Support – Assists the driver to is recommended. brake effectively in a critical situation. speeds exceeding 80 km/h. • Auto Brake - Brakes the car automatically Warnings and brake interventions for in the event of an imminent risk of collision WARNING pedestrians do not work in darkness and tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit. with a pedestrian or vehicle in front, if the No automatic system can guarantee driver does not himself/herself react in time 100 % correct function in all situations. The auto-brake function can prevent a col- by braking and/or steering away. The Auto Therefore, never try out the Auto brake sys- lision or reduce collision speed. To ensure Brake function can prevent a collision or tem by driving towards people - this may full brake performance, the driver should reduce collision speed. cause serious injuries or risk death. always depress the brake pedal - even when the car auto-brakes. The collision warning system is activated in situations where the driver should have started Never wait for a collision warning. The driver braking a lot earlier, which is why the function is always responsible that the correct distance and speed are maintained - even cannot help the driver in every situation. when the collision warning system with Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed auto-brake is used. to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian detection*

Function Brake support Operation If the risk of collision still increases after the Settings are made from MY CAR via the centre collision warning then the brake support is acti- console display screen and menu system. For vated. The brake support prepares the brake information on how the menu system is used, system for rapid braking and the brakes are see page 146. applied gently, which may be noticed as a slight jerk. NOTE If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently The Brake Support and Auto Brake func- quickly then full brake function is implemented. tions are always enabled - they cannot be Brake support also reinforces the driver's brak- deactivated. ing if the system considers that the braking is 04

G017382 not sufficient to avoid a collision. On and Off Function overview1. To select whether the collision warning system Auto Brake should be switched on or off: Search with the Visual warning signal in the event of a col- If the driver has not yet started an evasive menu system MY CAR via the centre console lision risk manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a display screen and locate Settings Car Radar sensor collision is imminent then the Auto Brake function comes into effect, without the driver need- settings Driving support systems Camera sensor ing to touch the brake pedal. Braking then Collision Warning. For information on the takes place with full brake force in order to menu system, see page 146. Collision warning reduce collision speed, or with limited brake An activated function is tested at each engine Together with a camera sensor, the radar sen- force if it is sufficient to avoid collision. start by briefly illuminating the warning lamp's sor detects pedestrians, stationary vehicles as separate points of light. well as vehicles driving in the same direction in front of the car. When starting the engine, the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is In the event of there being a risk of collision with obtained automatically. a pedestrian or such a vehicle your attention is drawn with a red flashing warning signal and a warning sound.

1 NOTE: The picture is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian detection*

Activating/deactivating warning signals NOTE Limitations The warning lamp is activated automatically The collision warning system is active from and when the engine is started if the system is When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be including approx. 4 km/h. switched on. used by the cruise control even if the colli- The visual warning signal may be difficult to The warning sound can be activated/deacti- sion warning system is switched off. notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflec- vated separately using the options for On or The collision warning system warns the tions, when sunglasses are being worn or if the Off in the menu system MY CAR under driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn- Settings Car settings Driving support the function cannot shorten driver reaction ing sound should therefore always be acti- time. systems Warning sound if risk of vated. In order for the collision warning system to collision. On slippery road surfaces the braking distance 04 be effective, always drive with the Distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity to Set warning distance Alert set at time interval 4 – 5. see page 187. avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS The warning distance regulates the distance at and DSTC systems will provide best possible which the visual and acoustic warnings are braking force with maintained stability. deployed. Select one of the options from NOTE Long, Normal or Short in the menu system Even if the warning distance has been set to NOTE MY CAR under Settings Car settings Long warnings could be perceived as being The visual warning signal can be temporarily Driving support systems Collision late in certain situations, e.g. when there are disengaged in the event of high passenger large differences in speed or if vehicles in Warning Warning distance. compartment temperature caused by front brake heavily. strong sunlight for example. If this occurs The warning distance determines the system's then the warning sound is activated even if sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an Checking settings it is deactivated in the menu system. earlier warning. First test with Long and if this The settings required can be controlled on the setting produces too many warnings, which • Warnings may not appear if the dis- centre console display screen. Search with the could be perceived as irritating in certain sit- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if menu system under steering wheel and pedal movements uations, then change to warning distance MY CAR Settings Car are large, e.g. a very active driving style. Normal. settings Driving support systems Collision Warning, see page 146. Only use warning distance Short in exceptional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian detection*

WARNING why the system does not intervene in situations NOTE where the car is approaching a vehicle in front Warnings and brake interventions could be very slowly, e.g. when parking. Keep the windscreen surface in front of the implemented late or not at all if the traffic camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist situation or external influences mean that Driver commands are always prioritised, which and dirt. the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a is why Collision Warning with Auto Brake does Do not attach or fit anything to the wind- pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly. not intervene in situations where the driver is screen in front of the camera sensor, as this The sensor system has a limited range for steering, braking or accelerating in a clear could reduce or prevent the function of one pedestrians and the system therefore pro- manner, even if a collision is unavoidable. or more camera-dependent systems. vides effective warnings and brake interventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h. When Auto Brake has prevented a collision For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, with a stationary object the car remains sta- The camera sensors have limitations similar to warnings and brake interventions are effec- tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark- 04 tive at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h. is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example. Under such conditions the functions Warnings for stationary or slow-moving then speed is reduced to the same speed as vehicles could be disengaged due to dark- that maintained by the vehicle in front. of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged. ness or poor visibility. On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- The collision warning system uses the same the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For beforehand. road surfaces or unclear lane markings could more information on the radar sensor and its also significantly reduce camera sensor func- limitations, see page 183. Camera sensor limitations tion when it is used to scan the carriageway The car's camera sensor is used by the three and detect pedestrians and other vehicles. If warnings are perceived as being too frequent functions - Collision Warning with Auto Brake, During very high temperatures the camera is or disturbing then the warning distance can be Driver Alert Control, see page 201 and Lane temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes reduced. This would lead to the system warn- Departure Warning, see page 204. ing at a later stage, which reduces the total after the engine is started in order to protect number of warnings. camera functionality. When the car is reversing Collision Warning with Auto Brake cannot be activated. Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian detection*

Detection of pedestrians (Pedestrian • In order for a pedestrian to be detected he/ In turn this means that the Collision Warning detection) she must appear full-length and have a with Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning and height of at least 80 cm. Driver Alert Control functions are not operating • The system cannot detect a pedestrian with full functionality. carrying larger items. The following table presents possible causes • The camera sensor's ability to see pedes- for a message being shown along with the trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like appropriate action. the human eye. • The camera sensor's capacity to detect Cause Action pedestrians is deactivated when driving in 04 darkness and tunnels - even when street- The windscreen sur- Clean the wind- lights are lit. face in front of the screen surface in camera is dirty or front of the camera WARNING covered with ice or from dirt, ice and Optimal examples of what the system regards as Collision warning with Auto brake & snow. snow. pedestrians with clear body contours. Pedestrian detection is an assistance tool. Thick fog, heavy rain No action. At times Optimal performance of the system requires It cannot detect all pedestrians in all situa- or snow means that the camera does not that the system function that detects pedes- tions and it cannot see e.g. partially trians receives as unambiguous information as obscured pedestrians, shorter people or the camera does not work during heavy possible about the contours of the body - this children (below 80 cm) or people in clothing work sufficiently rain or snowfall. implies the opportunity to identify the head, that hides the contours of the body. well. arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body • The driver is always responsible that the combined with a normal human pattern of vehicle is driven properly and with a movement. safety distance adapted to the speed. If large parts of the body are not visible to the camera then the system cannot detect a Fault tracing and action pedestrian. If the display shows the message Windscreen Sensors blocked then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians, vehicles or road markings in front of the car.

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian detection*

Cause Action Cause Action Cause Action The windscreen sur- Wait. It may take cleaned but the the camera to meas- Dirt has appeared Visit a workshop to face in front of the several minutes for message remains. ure the visibility. between the inside have the windscreen camera has been of the windscreen inside the camera and the camera. cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

04 Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Collis'n Collision warning system switched off. warning Shown when the engine is started. OFF The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

Collision The collision warning system cannot be activated. warn. Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function. Unavaila- ble The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

Auto brak- Auto Brake has been active. ing was The message clears after one press of the READ button. activated

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian detection*

Symbol Message Specification Wind- The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. screen Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example. Sensors blocked • Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 197.

Radar Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged. blocked The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy rain or if slush has See man- collected in front of the radar sensor. 04 ual Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 183.

Collision Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged. warn. • Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Service required

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System – DAC*

General information on Driver Alert General information on Driver Alert intended for major roads. The function is not System Control - DAC intended for city traffic. The Driver Alert System is intended to assist In some cases driving ability is not affected drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or despite driver fatigue. In which case there may who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are not be any warning issued for the driver. For driving on. this reason it is always important to stop and The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- take a break in the event of any signs of driver ent functions, which can either be switched on fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC at the same time or individually: issues a warning. Driver Alert Control (DAC) • NOTE 04 • Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see page 204. The function must not be used to extend a driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular A switched-on function is set in standby mode intervals and ensure that you are fully and is not activated automatically until speed The function is intended to attract the driver's rested. exceeds 65 km/h. attention when he/she starts to drive less con- The function is deactivated again when speed sistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or Limitation decreases to below 60 km/h. starts to fall asleep. In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for Both functions use a camera which is depend- A camera detects the side markings painted on example: ent on the lane having side markings painted the carriageway and compares the section of on each side. the road with the driver's steering wheel move- • if the driver tests the LDW function. ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does • in strong side winds. not follow the carriageway evenly. WARNING • on rutted road surfaces. The Driver Alert System does not work in all NOTE situations but is instead only intended to be of supplementary assistance. The camera sensor has certain limitations, see page 197. The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely. The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System – DAC*

Operation Thumbwheel. Turn until the display shows The display shows a level mark with 1-5 bars, Some settings are made from the centre con- Driver where a low number of bars indicates incon- sole display screen and its menu system. For Alert. The second row displays the Off, D sistent driving style. A high number of bars information on how the menu system is used, river Alert Standby <65 km/h, Driver indicates stable driving. see page 146. Alert Unavailable or Level If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the mark options. The current status can be checked on the trip driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as computer display with the left-hand stalk READ confirms or clears a warning in the the text message Driver Alert Time for a switch. memory. break. The warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve. Activating Driver Alert Control Using the centre console display screen with 04 WARNING its menu system MY CAR, search and locate Car settings Driver Alert. Select the On An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her option. For information on how the menu sys- own condition. tem is used - see page 146. In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tired- The function is activated when speed ness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon exceeds 65 km/h and remains active as possible and rest. as long as the speed is over Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- 60 km/h. gerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Driver Alert OFF Function not switched on.

Driver Alert Standby <65 The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h. km/h

202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System – DAC*

Symbol Message Specification Driver Alert Unavailable The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 197.

Driver Alert The function analyses the driver's driving style. The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text. break 04

Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. blocked Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example. • Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 197.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is disengaged. required • Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW*

General information on Lane Departure Operation and function If the camera can no longer detect the carria- Warning - LDW geway's side markings the display shows Lane Depart Warn Unavailable. If speed decreases to below 60 km/h then the function resumes standby mode and the display shows Lane Depart Warn Standby <65 km/h. If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side marking of the carriageway without due cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal. 04 No warning is given in the following situations: • Direction indicators activated The function is switched on or off by means of • The driver has his/her foot on the brake The function is intended to reduce the risk for a switch on the centre console. An indicator pedal1 single-vehicle accidents – accidents where, in lamp in the button illuminates when the func- • In the event of the accelerator pedal being certain situations, the vehicle leaves the car- tion is switched on. depressed rapidly1 riageway and is in danger of driving either into The trip computer display shows Lane Depart a ditch or into oncoming traffic. • In the event of rapid steering wheel move- Warn Standby <65 km/h when the function is ments1 LDW consists of a camera that detects the side in standby mode due to speed being below 65 In the event of a sudden turn so that the car markings painted on the carriageway. The km/h. • rolls. driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the The LDW function is activated automatically vehicle crosses a side marking. The camera sensor also has certain limitations. from standby mode after the camera has scan- For more information, see page 197. ned in the carriageway's side markings and speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer display then shows Lane Depart Warn Available.

1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see page 206.

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW*

NOTE The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car's wheels.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification 04 Lane departure warning The function is switched on/off. ON/Lane departure warn- Shown at switch-on/off. ing OFF The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart Warn Standby The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h. <65 km/h

Lane Depart Warn Unavail- The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. able Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 197.

Lane Depart Warn Availa- The function scans the carriageway's side markings. ble

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW*

Symbol Message Specification Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. blocked Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example. • Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 197.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is disengaged. required • Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 04

Personal preferences Increased sensitivity – This option increases Settings are made from the centre console's sensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier and display screen via the menu system in MY fewer limitations apply. CAR. From there, search and locate Settings Car settings Driving support systems Lane Departure Warning. For information on how the menu system is used - see page 146. Select from the options: On at start up - This option sets the function in standby mode each time the engine is started. Otherwise the same value as when the engine was switched off is obtained.

206 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist syst*

General Function Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle. Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console's VOL knob or in the car's menu system MY CAR - see page 146. Parking assistance is available in two variants: 04 • Rear only Display screen view - showing an obstacle left • Both front and rear. front and right rear. The system is automatically activated when the The centre console's display screen shows an engine is started - the switch's On/Off lamp is WARNING overview of the relationship between the car illuminated. If parking assistance is switched Parking assistance does not relinquish and detected obstacle. • off with the button, the lamp goes out. the driver's own responsibility during Marked sectors show which of the four sen- parking. sor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the • The sensors have blind spots where car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter obstacles cannot be detected. the distance between the car and a detected • Be aware of e.g. people or animals near obstacle. the car. The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically. When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is constant and the active sensor's field nearest the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is within the distance for the constant tone both

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist syst*

behind and in front of the car, then the tone Rear parking assistance Front parking assistance sounds alternately from the loudspeakers. IMPORTANT Certain objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone. 04 • In which case, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of The distance covered to the rear of the car is The distance covered in front of the car is about damage to vehicles or other objects about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in since the sensors are unable to function obstacles behind comes from one of the rear front comes from one of the front loudspeak- optimally. loudspeakers. ers. Rear parking assistance is activated when Front parking assistance is active up to reverse gear is engaged. 15 km/h. The lamp in the button is illuminated in order to indicate that the system is activated. The system must be deactivated when revers- When the speed is below 10 km/h the system ing with a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar is reactivated. or similar - otherwise they would trigger the sensors. NOTE NOTE Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode Rear parking assistance is deactivated is selected in a car with an automatic gear- automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo box. genuine trailer wiring is used.

208 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist syst*

IMPORTANT Cleaning the sensors NOTE When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may they must not obscure the sensors – the cause incorrect warning signals. auxiliary lamps could then be detected as obstacles.

Fault indicator If the information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the information display shows Park assist syst Service 04 required then parking assistance is disen- G031402 gaged. Sensor location, front. IMPORTANT In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with. Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Sensor location, rear. The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist camera*

General When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken The parking camera is an assist system and is lines are shown graphically which illustrate activated when reverse gear is engaged (can where the car's rear wheels will roll with the be changed in the settings menu, see current steering wheel angle, this facilitates page 146). tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer. The car's approximate The camera image is shown on the centre con- exterior dimensions are also illustrated by two sole's screen. dashed lines, the park assist lines can be deactivated in the settings menu. WARNING If the car is also equipped with parking assis- 04 • The parking camera serves as an aid. It tance sensors* then their information is dis- does not relieve the driver of responsi- played graphically as coloured fields in order to CAM bility when reversing. button location. illustrate the distance to detected obstacles, • The camera has blind spots, where The camera shows what is behind the car and see page 207. obstacles cannot be detected. if something appears from the sides. The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after • Be aware of people and animals in the The camera shows a wide area behind the car reverse gear has been disengaged or until the vicinity of the car. and part of the bumper and any towbar. car's speed exceeds 10 km/h. Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly - this is normal.

NOTE Objects on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen.

If another view is active the parking camera system takes over automatically and the camera image is displayed on the screen. Camera location next to the opening handle.

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist camera*

Light conditions which shows the driver the path the car will Boundary lines The camera image is adjusted automatically take, even when turning. according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in NOTE brightness and quality. Poor light conditions When reversing with a trailer which is can result in a slightly reduced image quality. • not connected electrically to the car, the lines on the display show the route the NOTE car will take - not the trailer. Keep camera lenses clear of dirt, snow and • The screen shows no lines when a trailer ice to ensure the best possible function. is connected electrically to the car's This is particularly important in poor light. electrical system. 04 • The parking camera is deactivated Park assist lines automatically when towing a trailer if a The system's lines. Volvo genuine trailer cable is used. Boundary line, 30 cm zone backwards from the car IMPORTANT Boundary line, free reversing zone Bear in mind that the screen only shows the area behind the car - pay attention to the "Wheel tracks" sides and front of the car when manoeuvring The unbroken line (1) frames in a zone that is during reversing. within about 30 cm from the bumper. The dashed line (2) frames in a zone up to about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as door mirrors and corners - also during Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver. turning. The lines on the screen are projected as if they The wide "wheel tracks" (3) between the side were at ground level behind the car and are lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can directly related to steering wheel movement, extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no obstacle is in the way.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park assist camera*

Cars with reversing sensors* Colour / paint Distance Limitations (metres) NOTE Yellow 1.5– A bike carrier or other accessory mounted Orange 0.3–1.5 on the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view. Red 0–0.3 Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it Settings only looks like a relatively small part of the Press OK/MENU when a camera view is image is obscured, it could be a relatively large 04 shown. Make the settings as desired. sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they are very Miscellaneous close to the car. Coloured areas (x 4, one per sensor) show dis- • The default setting is that the camera is tance. activated when reverse gear is engaged. To bear in mind If the car is also equipped with parking assis- • One press on CAM activates the camera • Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice tance sensors (see page 207) the distance indi- even if reverse gear is not engaged. and snow. cation will be more precise and the coloured • Change between normal and zoomed • Clean the camera lens regularly with luke- areas show which of the 4 sensors is/are reg- image by turning TUNE or by pressing warm water and car shampoo - take care istering an obstacle. CAM. not to scratch the lens. The colour of the areas changes with decreas- • If the car has more cameras* installed then ing distance to the obstacle - from yellow to the camera in use is changed by turning orange to red. TUNE.

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

General information on BLIS WARNING If necessary, the system can be switched off temporarily, see the section Activate/deacti- The system is a supplement to, not a vate. replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The Blind spots responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.

The system is designed to work most effectively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane highways. 04

G021426 When a camera (1) has detected a vehicle inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) BLIS camera1 illuminates with a constant glow. Indicator lamp NOTE BLIS symbol The lamp illuminates on the side of the car A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3.0 m. BLIS is an information system based on cam- where the system has detected the vehicle. era technology that under certain conditions If the car is overtaken on both sides at the can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in same time then both lamps illuminate. the same direction as the host vehicle in the so- called "blind spot". BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system. If for example the system's cameras are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown on the information display. In such cases, check and clean the lenses.

1 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

Activate/deactivate When BLIS is deactivated, the lamp in the but- Daylight and darkness ton goes out and a message is shown in the In daylight the system reacts to the shape of instrument panel display. the surrounding vehicles. The system is When BLIS is activated the light in the button designed to detect motor vehicles such as illuminates, a new text message is shown on cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles. the display and the indicator lamps in the door In darkness the system reacts to the head- panels flash 3 times. Press the READ button to lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head- delete the text message. (For a description of lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched messages, see page 144). on then the system does not detect the vehicles. This means for example that the system 04 When BLIS operates does not react to a trailer without headlamps which is towed behind a car or truck. The system operates when the car is driven at a speed above 10 km/h. Button for activating/deactivating. WARNING BLIS is activated when the engine is started. Overtaking The system does not react to cyclists or The indicator lamps in the door panels flash The system is designed to react if: moped riders. three times when BLIS is activated. • you overtake another vehicle at a speed of The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to The system can be deactivated/activated after up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle those of the human eye, i.e. they do not starting the engine with one press on the you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up "see" as well e.g. in heavy snowfall, against • strong light or in thick fog. BLIS button. to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling. Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre WARNING console - in which case the function is handled BLIS does not work in sharp bends. by the car's menu system MY CAR under Settings Car settings BLIS. (For a BLIS does not work when the car is reversing. description of the menu system, see page 146). A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can prevent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

Cleaning Message Specification Limitations In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam- In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be Blind spot syst. Reduced function in illuminate despite there being no other vehicle cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge. Reduced function the data transmis- within the blind spot. Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not sion between the scratched. BLIS system's cam- NOTE era and the car's electrical system. If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- IMPORTANT lated occasions despite there being no The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice The camera resets other vehicle within the blind spot then this or snow. If necessary, brush snow away itself when the data does not mean that a fault has arisen in the from the lenses. transmission system. 04 between the BLIS In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the system's camera display shows the text Blind spot syst. Messages on the display and the car's electri- Service required. cal system returns to Message Specification normal. The following illustrations show examples of Blind-spot info The BLIS system is Blind-spot info The BLIS system is situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may system ON activated. system OFF deactivated. illuminate even if there is no other vehicle within the blind spot. Blind spot syst. Blind spot syst. dis- Service required engaged - contact a IMPORTANT workshop. Repair of the BLIS system components Blind spot syst. The BLIS camera is must only be performed by a workshop - an Camera blocked blocked by dirt, authorised Volvo workshop is recom- snow or ice - clean mended. the lenses.

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface. 04

Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera.

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

Storage spaces

217 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

Storage compartment in door panel Tunnel console out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils. Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat cushions Glovebox Ticket clip Glovebox Storage compartment, cup holder Jacket holder

04 Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat Storage pocket

Jacket holder Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and USB*/AUX input under the armrest. The jacket holder is only designed for light clothing. Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are The owner's manual and maps can be kept WARNING specified then there is a cigarette lighter in here for example. There are also holders for the 12 V socket for the front seat, see pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, page 219, and a detachable ashtray in the be locked with the key blade, see page 53. cameras, remote controls for accessories, cup holder.) etc. in the glove compartment or other com- Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal partments. Otherwise they may injure peo- Inlay mats* ple in the car in the event of sudden braking objects in the cup holder as such objects could or a collision. accidentally trigger the alarm*, see page 67. Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay mats. Cigarette lighter and ashtray* The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached by lifting the tray straight up. Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull

218 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

WARNING 12 V socket socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least key position I, see Before setting off check that the inlaid mat page 82. in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals. IMPORTANT Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is used at a time. If both sockets are used Vanity mirror simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.

WARNING 04 G031435 Always leave the plug in the socket when 12 V socket, front seat. the socket is not in use.

NOTE Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. TV screens, music players and mobile

G021438 phones - which are connected to one of the passenger compartment's 12V electrical Vanity mirror with lighting. sockets, could be activated by the climate The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's control system, even when the remote con- side* and passenger side respectively, is trol key has been removed or when the car is locked, for example, when the parking switched on automatically when the cover is heater is activated at a preset time. raised. G021440 For this reason remove the plugs from the 12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat. electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the The electrical socket can be used for various battery could be drained in the event of such accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens, an occurrence! music players and mobile phones. For the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

Electrical socket in cargo area* For more information, see page 292.

220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Comfort and driving pleasure

221 General information on infotainment...... 224 Quick start...... 226 General infotainment functions...... 231 Radio...... 234 Media player...... 241 External audio source via AUX/USB* input...... 245 Media Bluetooth* ...... 248 TV*...... 251 Remote control* ...... 254 Bluetooth handsfree*...... 256 Voice recognition* mobile phone...... 264 RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system* ...... 268 Menu navigation, Infotainment...... 277

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 05 Infotainment system

General information on infotainment

General • AM/FM radio Made under license from Dolby Laboratories. The infotainment system in your car has one of • CD/DVD Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. the following four levels: • AUX and USB input (for e.g. iPod) Audyssey MultEQ1 Performance • Bluetooth handsfree/streaming audio • 5" TV screen TFT • 8 speakers • Steering wheel keypad* without thumb- • 4x40W amplifier wheel • AM/FM radio Premium Sound Multimedia • 7" TV screen TFT • CD • Steering wheel keypad* with thumbwheel • AUX input • AM/FM radio • 6 speakers • CD/DVD • 4x20W amplifier • AUX and USB input (for e.g. iPod) The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used 05 in the development and tuning of the sound to High Performance • Bluetooth handsfree/streaming audio • 5" TV screen TFT ensure a world-class sound experience. • 12 speakers • Steering wheel keypad* with thumbwheel • 5x130W amplifier • AM/FM radio Other • CD Dolby, Pro Logic If the Infotainment System is active when the • AUX and USB input (for e.g. iPod) engine is switched off then it is automatically activated the next time the key is inserted into Bluetooth handsfree/streaming audio • key position I or higher, and it continues with • 8 speakers the same source (e.g. radio) as before the • 4x40W amplifier engine was switched off (the driver's door must be closed on cars with Keyless systems*). High Performance Multimedia • 7" TV screen TFT The infotainment system can be used for 15 minutes at a time without the remote control • Steering wheel keypad* with thumbwheel

1 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

General information on infotainment key being in the ignition switch by pressing the On/Off button. When the car is being started the infotainment system is switched off temporarily and continues when the engine has started.

NOTE Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the infotainment system is used when the engine is switched off. This is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessarily.

225 05 Infotainment system

Quick start

Overview, Infotainment Operating the system Source buttons

A/V-AUX input* Short press starts the system and long Control panel with buttons for source selection. RADIO - Select, for example, AM, FM1, 05 press switches off. Briefly press to mute Steering wheel keypad* the sound (MUTE) or restore the sound if it FM2, DAB1*, DAB2* TV screen. The TV screen is available in had been switched off. MEDIA - Select, for example, Disc, USB*, two sizes, 5" (applies to Performance and Select a source by pressing one of the but- iPod, AUX, Bluetooth*, TV*. High Performance) and 7" (applies to High tons (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA etc.). Press TEL - Bluetooth handsfree* Performance Multimedia and Premium repeatedly in order to scroll down among Sound Multimedia). The manual shows the the options on the TV screen (e.g. FM1), MY CAR - See page 146. 7" TV screen. release and wait a second and the selec- Centre console control panel tion is accepted automatically. Alterna- tively, it is possible to turn TUNE and con- Rear control panel with headphones firm with OK/MENU. socket* TUNE - turn to fast-scroll among disc AUX and USB1 inputs for external audio tracks/folders, radio and TV* stations, sources (e.g. iPod) phone contacts* or navigate through options on the TV screen (e.g. FM1, Disc).

1 USB only applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Quick start

Basic functions, Infotainment OK/MENU - accepts selections in menus. The views have different appearances depend- Lead to submenus in selected source (e.g. ing on the source, in-car equipment, settings, RADIO or MEDIA). etc. EXIT - leads up in the menu system, interrupts the current function, rejects calls and deletes input characters. One long press leads to the highest menu level (parent view), see page 228. INFO - press the button to see more information about a function, song, etc. For more information, see page 231 FAV - shortcut to a favourite setting. The Centre console with controls for basic functions. button can be programmed for a commonly used function in AM, FM, etc. For SOUND - leads to the audio settings menu more information, see page 231. 05 (bass, treble, etc.). For more information, Example of normal view (Radio). see page 231. Views in the TV screen VOL - turn to raise or lower the volume. General information about views in the - short press starts the system and TV screen long press switches off. Briefly press to The system contains four different types of mute the sound (MUTE) or restore the views. A top-level menu, so-called Parent view, sound if it had been switched off. common to all sources, see page 228. For Preset buttons, input of numbers and let- each source there are three different basic ters. types of views: TUNE - turn to fast-scroll among disc • Normal view - normal mode for the source tracks/folders, radio and TV* stations, Quick view - fast mode when TUNE is phone contacts* or navigate through • turned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radio options on the TV screen. Example of menu view (Bluetooth handsfree). station, etc. • Menu view - for menu navigation

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227 05 Infotainment system

Quick start

Parent view • Select source (1) by turning the thumb- Steering wheel keypad* wheel on the steering wheel keypad*, press The keypad is available in three different ver- the thumbwheel to confirm the selection. sions depending on the options and the equip- • Turn the thumbwheel to one of the options ment level of the car. (2) on the TV screen (e.g. FM1), press the thumbwheel to confirm the selection. Keypad without thumbwheel This then leads to the desired source (e.g. RADIO/FM1). A long press on EXIT leads back.

NAV - Volvo's navigation system (RTI)* Example of parent view (Radio). Sources (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA, etc.), see RADIO – Radio 05 table. Source menu, e.g. (FM1, DISC, etc.). MEDIA – Media A long press on EXIT on the steering wheel Short presses scroll between disc tracks keypad* leads to the highest menu level, called or scan for the next available radio sta- TEL – Bluetooth handsfree* parent view (see illustration above). The func- tion2. Long presses are used to fast for- tion is a quick way to choose or change the ward and rewind disc tracks. source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA etc.) directly from MY CAR - Car settings Volume the steering wheel keypad* without taking your hands off the steering wheel. The function is also available from the control panel buttons in CAM - Park Assist Camera* the centre console.

2 Does not apply to DAB.

228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Quick start

Keypad with thumbwheel tion (OK) in the menu system, and accepts press leads to the highest menu level phone calls. (parent view), see page 228. MUTE - switches off the sound Thumbwheel - turn up/down to scroll up and down in the menu system. One press Keypad with thumbwheel, for voice on the thumbwheel leads to the menu recognition3 (equivalent to MENU), or confirms a selection (OK) in the menu system, and accepts phone calls. Voice recognition (for Bluetooth-connected mobile phone and navigation system*)

Short presses scroll between disc tracks Rear control panel with headphones or preset radio stations2. Long presses socket* 05 are used to fast forward and rewind disc Headphones with an impedance of tracks. 16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher are recommended for best sound reproduc- Volume tion. Short presses scroll between disc tracks EXIT – leads up in the menu system. Inter- or preset radio stations2. Long presses rupt current function, end/refuse phone are used to fast forward and rewind disc calls, clear entered characters. One long tracks. press leads to the highest menu level (parent view), see page 228. Volume Thumbwheel - turn up/down to scroll up EXIT – leads up in the menu system. Inter- and down in the menu system. One press rupt current function, end/refuse phone on the thumbwheel leads to the menu calls, clear entered characters. One long (equivalent to MENU), or confirms a selec-

2 Does not apply to DAB. 3 Only cars with navigation.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229 05 Infotainment system

Quick start

Limitations

NOTE The audio source (e.g. FM1, AM, Disc etc.) being played back through the speakers cannot be controlled from the rear control panel.

NOTE In order that an audio source can be selected with MODE and listened to it is VOLUME – Volume, left and right. required that the audio source is available and connected in the car. Scroll/search forward and backward. 05 MODE - Select between AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*, Disc, USB*, iPod*, Bluetooth*, AUX, TV* and On/Off. For connection via USB* or AUX, see page 245 or via Bluetooth*, see page 249. Headphones sockets (3.5 mm).

Activate/deactivate The control panel is activated with MODE. Deactivation is possible via a long press on MODE or when the engine is switched off. Scroll/search forward and backward Pressing (2) scrolls between disc tracks/audio files or seeks the next available radio station.

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

General infotainment functions

FAV - store a preset • Bluetooth* INFO - shows additional information • AUX • TV* It is also possible to select and store a favourite for TEL*, MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*. Favour- ites can also be selected and stored under MY CAR. For more information on the menu system MY CAR, see page 146. To store a function in the FAV button: 1. Select an infotainment source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA etc.). 2. Select a wavelength or source (AM, Disc, The FAV button can be used to store functions etc.). In some cases there is more information avail- that are used frequently so that the function able (on a radio station, song, artist, etc.) than 05 can be started simply by pressing FAV. You 3. Press and hold the FAV button until the can be shown in the TV screen. To see more can select a favourite (e.g. Equalizer) for each "favourites menu" is shown. information, press the INFO button. function as follows: 4. Turn TUNE to select an option from the list In RADIO mode: and press OK/MENU to save. General audio settings > When the source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA • AM Press SOUND to access the audio settings etc.) is active the stored function is menu (Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward with FM1/FM2 • available by means of a short press on SOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g. • DAB1*/DAB2* FAV. Treble). In MEDIA mode: Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save • DISC the setting with OK/MENU. • USB* Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to • iPod* access other options:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231 05 Infotainment system

General infotainment functions

• Surround1 - Can be set to the On/Off posi- Advanced audio settings For general information on menu navigation tion. When On is selected, the system and menu structures, see page 277. selects the setting for optimal sound repro- Equalizer3 duction. Normally DPLII and then The volume level can be adjusted separately Audio volume and automatic volume appear in the TV screen. If the recording is for different wavelengths. control The audio system compensates for disrupting made with Dolby Digital technology then 1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio noises in the passenger compartment by playback will take place with this setting, settings and select Equalizer. then appears in the TV screen. increasing the volume in relation to the speed When Off is selected, 3-channel stereo is 2. Select wavelength by turning TUNE and of the car. The compensation level can be set available. confirm with OK/MENU. to low, medium, high or off. Select the level • Bass - Bass level. 3. Adjust the volume level by turning TUNE under Audio settings Volume compensation. • Treble - Treble level. and confirm with OK/MENU. Continue in the same way with other wavelengths. For general information on menu navigation • Fader – Balance between the front and rear speakers. 4. When you are finished with the settings, and menu structures, see page 277. turn TUNE OK and confirm by pressing 05 • Balance – Balance between the left and External audio source audio volume OK/MENU or EXIT. right-hand speakers. If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3 player • Subwoofer*1 - Bass speaker level. For general information on menu navigation or iPod) is connected to the AUX input then and menu structures, see page 277. • DPL II center level3 channel center the audio source that is connected can have a different volume than the audio system's inter- level1 - Volume for centre speaker. 1 Sound stage nal volume (e.g. radio). Correct this by adjust- 1, 2 • DPL II surround level – Level for sur- The sound experience can be optimised for the ing the volume of the input: round. driver's seat, both front seats or the rear seat. If there are passengers in both the front and 1. Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE to rear seats then the option recommended is; AUX and wait a few seconds or press OK/ both front seats. The options can be selected MENU. under Audio settings Sound stage.

1 Only Premium Sound Multimedia. 2 Only when Surround is activated. 3 Not Performance.

232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

General infotainment functions

2. Press OK/MENU and then turn TUNE to able to adapt the sound reproduction accord- AUX input volume. Confirm with OK/ ing to personal taste. MENU. 3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the AUX input.

NOTE If the external audio source's volume is too high or too low, the quality of the sound may deteriorate. The audio quality may also be impaired if the player is charged while the infotainment system is in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging the player via the 12 V socket.

05 Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position etc. for each combination of car model and audio system. There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control, radio reception and vehicle speed. The controls explained in these operating instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and Equalizer, are only intended for the user to be

233 05 Infotainment system

Radio

Radio functions, general NOTE Station list1 The radio automatically compiles a list of the If the car is equipped with a steering wheel strongest FM stations whose signals it is cur- keypad* and/or remote control* then in many cases these can be used instead of rently receiving. This enables you to find a sta- the buttons in the centre console. For a tion when you drive into an area where you do description of the buttons in the steering not know the radio stations and their frequen- wheel, see page 228. For a description of cies. the remote control, see page 254. To go to the list and select a station:

Menus 1. Select the desired wavelength (FM1 or The menus inRADIO are controlled from the FM2). centre console and the steering wheel key- 2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction. pad*. For general information on menu naviga- This displays the list of all stations in the Centre console, controls for radio functions. tion and menu structures, see page 277. area. The currently tuned station is indi- RADIO button for selecting the wavelength cated with enlarged text in the list. 05 (AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*). Radio AM/FM 3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to Station presets (0-9) select a station from the list. Tuning Select the desired frequency/station or Automatic tuning navigate in the radio menu by turning 1. Repeatedly press on the RADIO button TUNE. until the desired wavelength (AM, FM1 Confirm your selection or go to the radio etc.) is shown, release and wait a second menu by pressing OK/MENU. or press OK/MENU. Hold in the button for next/previous avail- 2. Hold in / in the centre console (or able station. Short press for preset. in the steering wheel keypad*). The radio searches for the next/previous available station.

1 Only applies to FM1/FM2.

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Radio

NOTE in the area when you turn TUNE (see the sec- NOTE tion "Station list", page 234). When the station • The list only shows the frequencies of list is shown, press the button in the cen- The preset from the factory is that the radio stations that are currently being automatically searches for the stations in tre console to change to manual tuning. This received, not a complete list of all radio the area where you are driving (see previous allows you to select a frequency from the list of frequencies on the selected wave- section "Station list" above). all available radio frequencies in the selected length. But if you have changed over to manual tun- wavelength. In other words, if turn TUNE one ing (by pressing the button in the cen- • If the signal from the currently received step in a manual search the frequency is tre console when the station list was station is weak, this may prevent the changed from e.g. 93.3 to 93.4 MHz, etc. radio from updating the station list. If shown), then the radio remains set in the this occurs, press the button To manually select a station: function for manual tuning the next time you switch on the radio. To change back to the (while the station list is shown in the dis- 1. Repeatedly press on the RADIO button function for "Station list", turn TUNE one play screen) in order to change to man- until the desired wavelength (AM, FM1 step (to show the complete list of stations) ual tuning and set a frequency. If the etc.) is shown, release and wait a second and press the button . station list is no longer shown, turn or press OK/MENU. TUNE one step in either direction to Note that if you press when the sta- 05 show the list again, and press to 2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency. tion list is not shown then INFO is activated. switch. For more information on this function, see page 231.

The list disappears from the TV screen after a few seconds. Preset 10 presets can be stored per wavelength If the station list is no longer shown, turn (AM, FM1 etc.). TUNE one step in either direction and press the The stored presets are selected using the pre- button in the centre console to change set buttons. to manual tuning (or to return from manual tuning to the function for "Station list"). 1. Tune into a station (see "Tuning", page 234). Manual tuning The preset from the factory is that the radio 2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a few shows the station list of the strongest stations seconds, the sound disappears during this

235 05 Infotainment system

Radio

time and returns when the station is stored. • Automatically switches to a stronger trans- rupted audio source, press the OK/MENU to The preset button can now be used. mitter if reception in the area is poor. clear the message. A list of pre-selected channels can be shown2 • Searches for programme type, such as traffic information or news. Alarm in the TV screen. The function is activated/ This function is used to warn of serious acci- deactivated in FM/AM mode under FM menu • Receives text information on current radio dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be Show presets or AM menu Show programme. temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The presets. message ALARM! appears on the TV screen NOTE when an alarm message is transmitted. Scan wavelength Some radio stations do not use RDS or only The function automatically searches the cur- some if its functionality. Traffic information – TP rent wavelength for strong stations. When a This function allows traffic information sent station is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec- within a set station's RDS network to break If a required programme type is located the onds before scanning is resumed. When a sta- through. The TP symbol indicates that the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio tion is playing back it can be saved as a preset function is activated. If the preset station can source currently in use. For example, if the CD in the usual way, see the section "Pre- send traffic information then this is shown by 05 player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting set" above. TP glowing brightly in the TV screen, otherwise transmission is played at a preset volume, see TP will be grey. To start scanning go in FM/AM mode to page 238. The radio returns to the previous FM menu Scan or AM menu Scan. audio source and volume when the set pro- Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM gramme type is no longer broadcast. menu TP. NOTE The programme functions alarm (ALARM!), Enhanced Other Networks – EON Scanning stops if a station is saved. traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and pro- This function is useful in urban areas with many gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another in regional radio stations. It allows the distance RDS functions order of priority, where alarm has the highest between the car and the radio station trans- priority and programme types has the lowest. RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters mitter to determine when programme functions For additional settings of programming inter- into a network. An FM transmitter in such a should interrupt the current audio source. ruptions ( and ), see network sends information that gives an RDS EON Distant EON Local the section "Enhanced Other Networks – radio the following functions: EON" below. Press EXIT to return to the inter-

2 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

236 05 Infotainment system

Radio

Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select- Go in FM mode to FM menu News Resetting and removing PTY are performed ing one of the options under FM menu settings Set news favourite to change. under FM menu Advanced settings Advanced settings EON: PTY settings Select PTY Clear all. Programme types – PTY • Local – interrupts only if the radio station The PTY function can be used to select one or PTY search transmitter is close. more programme types, such as pop music This function searches the entire wavelength 3 • Distant – interrupts if the station trans- and serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates for the selected programme type. mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of that the function is active. This function allows 1. In FM mode select one or more PTY under static. programme types broadcast within a set sta- FM menu Advanced settings PTY tion's RDS network to break through. TP from selected station/all stations settings Select PTY. The radio can only interrupt for traffic informa- 1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting the tion from the selected station or all stations programme types under FM menu 2. Go to FM menu Advanced settings within the RDS network. Advanced settings PTY settings PTY settings Seek PTY. Go in FM mode to FM menu Advanced Select PTY. To finish searching, press EXIT. 05 settings Set TP favourite to change. 2. Then the PTY function must be activated To continue searching for another broad- under FM menu Advanced settings cast of the selected programme types, News PTY settings Receive traffic This function allows news broadcasts sent press on or . within a set station's RDS network to break bulletins from other networks. Display of programme type through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the An indicator is shown in the TV screen when The programme type of the current station can function is active. PTY is activated. be shown on the TV screen. Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM Deactivation of the PTY function is performed Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM menu News settings News. in FM mode under FM menu Advanced menu Advanced settings PTY settings PTY settings Receive traffic News from selected station/all stations settings Show PTY text. bulletins from other networks. Selected pro- The radio can only interrupt for news from the gramme types (PTY) are not reset. selected station or all stations in the RDS network.

3 Factory settings.

237 05 Infotainment system

Radio

Radio text The reset is carried out in FM mode under Service and Ensemble Some RDS stations transmit information on FM menu Advanced settings • Service - Channel, radio channel (only programme content, artists, etc. This informa- Reset all FM settings. audio services are supported by the sys- tion can be shown on the TV screen. tem). Volume control, programme types Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM • Ensemble - A collection of radio channels The interrupting programme types, e.g. on the same frequency. menu Show radio text. NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume selected for each respective programme type. If the vol- Storing channel groups (Ensemble learn) Automatic frequency update – AF ume level is adjusted during the programme When the vehicle is moved to a new broad- The function selects the strongest transmitter interruption, the new level is saved until the casting area, programming of existing channel for the set station. In order to find a strong next programme interruption. groups in the area may be necessary. transmitter the function may, in exceptional cases, need to search the entire FM wave- Programming of channel groups creates an length. Radio system - DAB* updated list of all available channel groups. The list is not updated automatically. Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM General 05 menu Advanced settings DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital Programming is carried out in the menu system Alternative frequency. broadcasting system for radio. in DAB mode under DAB menu Ensemble learn. Programming can also take place as fol- Regional radio programmes – REG NOTE lows: This function causes the radio to continue with 1. Turn one step in either direction. a regional transmitter even if its signal strength This system does not support DAB+. TUNE is low. The symbol REG shows that the func- > Ensemble learn is shown in the list of available channel groups. tion is active. NOTE 2. Press OK/MENU. Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM Coverage for DAB is not available in all loca- menu Advanced settings REG. tions. If there is no coverage then the mes- > New programming is started. sage No reception is shown in the display Programming can be cancelled with EXIT. Resetting RDS functions screen. All radio settings can be reset to the original If can take up to a minute to program a channel factory settings. group if both Band III and LBand are selected. For more information on wavelength, see page 240.

238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Radio

Navigation in channel group list Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY A preset contains one channel but no sub- (Ensemble) mode. In which case only channels of the pre- channels. If a subchannel is being played and To navigate in and access the channel group selected programme type are played. a preset is saved then only the main channel is list turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble is registered. This is because subchannels are Programme type (PTY) shown in the upper part of the TV screen. When temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve the Various types of radio programmes can be scrolling to the new Ensemble the name preset, the channel which contained the sub- selected using the programme type function. changes to the new one. A thick grey line sep- channel will be played. The preset is not There are a number of different programme arates the two channel groups from each other. dependent on the channel list. types which also include different programme 4 • Service - Shows channels irrespective of categories. After selecting a programme type, A list of pre-selected channels can be shown the channel group to which they are allo- navigation only takes place within the channels in the TV screen. The function is activated/ cated. The list can also be filtered using the that are broadcasting that type. deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu selection of programme type (PTY Show presets. filtering), see below. Programme type is selected in DAB mode under DAB menu PTY filtering. Exit this NOTE Scanning mode as follows: The function automatically searches the cur- 05 The audio system's DAB system does not rent wavelength for strong stations. When a Press EXIT. support all functions available in the DAB station is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec- > An indicator is shown in the TV screen standard. onds before scanning is resumed. When a sta- when PTY is activated. tion is playing back it is saved as a preset in the In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode Radio text usual way. For more information on presets, when DAB to DAB linking (see below) is imple- Some radio stations transmit information on see "Preset" below. mented. programme content, artists, etc. This informa- Go in DAB mode to DAB menu Scan to tion is shown on the TV screen. Preset start scanning. 10 station presets can be stored per wave- The function is deactivated/activated in DAB length. DAB has 2 memories for presets: mode under DAB menu Show radio text. NOTE DAB1 and DAB2. Storing of presets is per- Scanning stops if a station is saved. formed in the usual way, for more information see page 235. The stored presets are selected using the preset buttons.

4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia

239 05 Infotainment system

Radio

NOTE quickly than if both Band III and LBand have gory. This information is shown on the TV been selected. It is not certain that all channel screen. Only one of the functions "Show radio groups will be found. Wavelength selection The function is activated/deactivated in DAB text" and "Show presets" can be acti- does not affect the stored memories. vated at a time. If one of them is activated mode under DAB menu Advanced when the other is already activated, then the Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated in settings Show PTY text. previously activated function is deactivated DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced automatically. Both functions can be deac- Resetting the DAB settings settings DAB band. tivated. All DAB settings can be reset to the original Subchannel factory settings. Secondary components are usually named Advanced settings The reset is carried out in DAB mode under subchannels. These are temporary and can DAB menu Advanced settings DAB to DAB link contain e.g. translations of the main pro- It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no gramme into other languages. Reset all DAB settings. reception to the same channel in another channel group with better reception. There may be If one or more subchannels are broadcast then 05 a certain delay when changing channel group. the > symbol is shown to the left of the channel There may be a period of silence between the name in the TV screen. A subchannel is indi- current channel no longer being available to the cated by the - symbol appearing to the left of new channel becoming available. the channel name in the TV screen. The function can be activated/deactivated in Subchannels can only be accessed on the DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced selected main channel and not on any other channel without selecting it. settings DAB linking. Display of subchannels can be deactivated/ Wavelength activated in DAB mode under DAB menu DAB can be transmitted on two5 wavelengths: Advanced settings Sub channels • Band III - covers areas outside big cities Programme type text LBand - mainly in large cities • Some radio stations broadcast information By selecting for example Band III on its own, about programme type and programme cate- channel programming takes place more

5 Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.

240 05 Infotainment system

Media player

CD/DVD1 functions The media player supports and can play the Starting playback of a disc following main types of discs and files: Repeatedly press on the MEDIA button until • Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio). Disc is shown, release and wait a second or press OK/MENU. If there is a disc in the media Burned CD discs with audio and/or video • player then the disc starts playing back auto- files1. matically, otherwise Insert disc is shown in the • Pre-recorded DVD video discs1. TV screen. Then insert a disc, with text side up. • Burned DVD discs1 with audio and/or video The disc starts to play back automatically. files. If a disc with audio/video files is inserted into For more information about the supported for- the player then the disc's folder structure mats, see page 244. needs to be loaded. Depending on the quality of the disc and the quantity of information there NOTE may be a certain delay before playback starts. Centre console control panel. If the car is equipped with a steering wheel Disc insert and eject slot Disc eject keypad* and/or remote control* then in A disc remains in the ejected position for 05 MEDIA key many cases these can be used instead of about 12 seconds, after which it is inserted the buttons in the centre console. For a back into the player for safety reasons. Disc eject description of the buttons in the steering wheel, see page 228. For a description of Input of numbers and letters. the remote control, see page 254. Pause When the volume is turned down completely Select the disc tracks/folders, or navigate the media player is paused. When the volume through menu options by turning TUNE. Menus is increased, it starts again. The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the Confirm your selection or go to the menu centre console and the steering wheel key- Playback and navigation for the selected media source by pressing pad*. For general information on menu naviga- OK/MENU. CD audio discs tion and menu structures, see page 277. Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and Fast forward/reverse and change disc navigate in the list. Use OK/MENU to confirm track or chapter2. the selection of the disc track and start play-

1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 2 Only applies to DVD discs.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241 05 Infotainment system

Media player

back. Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist. the current folder have been played back. The DVD video discs1 A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root system automatically detects and changes For playback of DVD video discs, see level. setting when a disc containing only audio files page 243. or only video files is loaded into the media Disc tracks can also be changed by pressing player and then plays back these files. How- Fast forward/reverse on / on the centre console or the ever, the system does not change setting if a Hold in the buttons / to fast forward/ steering wheel keypad*. disc containing a mixture of audio and video rewind. Audio files are fast forwarded/rewound Burned discs audio/video files1 files is loaded into the media player, but instead at one speed, while video files are fast forwar- Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist/folder the player continues to play back the previous ded/rewound at several speeds. Repeatedly structure and navigate in the list/structure. Use file type. press the buttons / to increase the fast OK/MENU to confirm either selection of sub- forward/rewind speed for video files. Release folder or start of playback of the selected NOTE the button to return to viewing at normal speed. audio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop and A video film is only shown when the car is exit the playlist or go up (back) in the folder stationary. When the car is moving at a Music recognition, Gracenote structure. A long press on EXIT leads to the speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is If the car is equipped with navigation* then 05 playlist's root level. shown and No visual media available there is a hard drive in the car that contains a Audio/video files can also be changed by while driving appears on the display database for music recognition of CD audio screen, although the audio is heard during discs. The database contains the most popular pressing / on the centre console or the this time. The picture is shown again as songs at the moment. If the media player gets steering wheel keypad*. soon as the car's speed falls below about 6 a hit in the database then the album title and km/h. Audio files have the symbol , video files1 artist name for the media are displayed, and have the symbol and folders have the each track shows track title, artist and album. If the current CD audio disc is not found in the symbol . NOTE database then the CD text from the disc is Some audio files that are copy-protected by used. If there is no CD text on the disc then only When playback of a file is complete the play- record companies or privately copied audio back of the other files (of the same type) in that files cannot be loaded by the player. Track 1, Track 2 etc. is displayed. particular folder continues. Change3 of folder takes place automatically when all the files in

1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 3 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Media player

Scan4 has been played out, playback of the first file Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu This function plays the first ten seconds of starts again. each disc track/audio file. To scan: 1. Press OK/MENU 1. Press OK/MENU 2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder 2. Turn TUNE to Scan 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate > The first 10 seconds of each disc track the function. or audio file are played. Playback of DVD video discs1 3. Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc track or audio file being played back will con- Playback tinue playing. When playing back a DVD video disc a disc menu may appear on the display screen. The Random4 disc menu gives access to additional functions This function plays the tracks in random order. and settings, such as selecting subtitles, lan- Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu is To listen to the tracks in random order: guage and scene selection. performed using the number keys in the centre 05 1. Press OK/MENU console as illustrated above. NOTE 2. Turn TUNE to Random Changing chapter or title A video film is only shown when the car is Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and 3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate stationary. When the car is moving at a navigate through them (if the film is being the function. speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is played back then it is paused). Press OK/ shown and No visual media available Disc tracks/audio files can be changed by MENU to select the chapter, this also leads while driving appears on the display back to the original position (if the film was pressing / on the centre console or the screen, although the audio is heard during being played back then it is restarted). Press steering wheel keypad*. this time. The picture is shown again as soon as the car's speed falls below about 6 EXIT to access the title list. Repeat folder5 km/h. Titles are selected in the title list by turning This function makes it possible to play files in TUNE and the selection is confirmed with OK/ a folder over and over again. When the last file MENU, this also leads back to the chapter list.

4 Does not apply to DVD video discs. 5 Only applies to audio/video files on burned discs or USB. 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243 05 Infotainment system

Media player

6 Press OK/MENU to activate the selection and Picture settings Audio formatA CD audio, mp3, return to the start position. Use EXIT to cancel You can adjust the settings (when the car is wma the selection and this leads back to the original stationary) for brightness and contrast. position (without any selection being made). Audio formatB CD audio, mp3, 1. Press and select OK/MENU Image wma, aac, m4a The chapter can also be changed by pressing settings, confirm with OK/MENU. on / on the centre console or the C 2. Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and Video format CD video, steering wheel keypad*. confirm with OK/MENU. DVD video, divx, avi, asf Advanced settings6 3. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. A Applies to Performance. Angle B Does not apply to Performance. If the DVD video disc supports it, the function C Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium To return to the settings list, press the OK/ Sound Multimedia. can be used to choose from which camera MENU or EXIT. position a particular scene should be shown. The picture settings can be reset to factory Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced settings with the Reset option. 05 settings Angle. Compatible file formats DivX Video On Demand The media player can play back a variety of file The media player can be registered in order to types and is compatible with the formats in the play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or following table. USB. The code for registration can be found in the menu system MY CAR Settings NOTE Information DivX® VOD code. For general information on menus, see under MY CAR, see Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD Plus, page 146. CD-DVD format) are thicker than regular CD discs and therefore playback cannot be For more information visit www.divx.com/vod. guaranteed and malfunction may arise. If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and CDDA tracks, all MP3s will be ignored.

6 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

External audio source via AUX/USB* input

AUX, USB1 and external audio source NOTE The text Reading USB is shown in the TV screen when the system is loading the storage General If the car is equipped with a steering wheel media's file structure. Depending on the file keypad* and/or remote control* then in structure and number of files there may be many cases these can be used instead of the buttons in the centre console. For a some delay before loading is finished. description of the buttons in the steering wheel, see page 228. For a description of NOTE the remote control, see page 254. The system supports most iPod models produced in 2005 or later. An iPod or MP3 player with rechargeable batteries is recharged (when the ignition is on or the engine is running) if the device is plugged NOTE into the USB connection. To prevent damage to the USB connection, To connect the audio source: this is shut off if the USB connection is short-circuited or if a connected USB unit is Connection points for external audio sources. 1. Repeatedly press on MEDIA to reach the taking too much power (this may happen if 05 An external audio source, e.g. an iPod or MP3 desired audio source USB, iPod or AUX, the unit connected does not meet the USB player, can be connected to the audio system release and wait a second or press OK/ standard). The USB connection is reactivated automatically the next time the ignition MENU. via any of the connections in the centre con- is turned on, unless the fault persists. sole. An audio source connected to the USB > If USB is selected then Connect USB is input can then be handled2 with the car's audio shown in the TV screen. controls. A device connected via the AUX input Menus 2. Connect your audio source to one of the cannot be controlled via the car. The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the connections in the centre console's stor- centre console and the steering wheel key- age compartment (see previous illustra- pad*. For general information on menu navigation). tion and menu structures, see page 277.

1 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 2 Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245 05 Infotainment system

External audio source via AUX/USB* input

Playback and navigation3 the player continues to play back the previous Audio sources file type. Turn TUNE to access the playlist/folder struc- USB memory ture and navigate in the list/structure. Use OK/ 3 To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick, MENU to either confirm selection of subfolder Fast forward/reverse See page 242. only store music files on it. It takes a lot longer or start of playback of the selected audio/video for the system to load storage media that con- file. Press EXIT to either stop and exit the play- Scan3 tains anything other than compatible music list or go up (back) in the folder structure. A long See page 243. files. press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root level. Audio/video files can also be changed by Random3 NOTE pressing / on the centre console or the See page 243. The system supports mobile media compli- steering wheel keypad*. ant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system Search function3 and can handle 1000 folders with a maxi- Audio files have the symbol , video files4 The keypad on the control panel in the centre mum of 254 subfolders/files in every folder. have the symbol and folders have the console can be used to find a filename in the The top level, which can handle up to 1000 current folder. subfolders/files, is an exception to this. 05 symbol . The search function is accessed either by turn- When playback of a file is complete the playing TUNE (to access the folder structure) or by NOTE back of the other files (of the same type) in that pressing one of the letter keys. As a letter or 5 When using a longer model USB memory particular folder continues. Change of folder character in a search string is entered you get takes place automatically when all the files in stick the use of a USB adapter cable is rec- closer to your search target. ommended. This is to avoid mechanical the current folder have been played back. The wear to the USB input and the connected system automatically detects and changes Start playback of a file by pressing OK/ USB memory stick. setting when a device containing only audio MENU. files or only video files is connected to the USB 6 port and then it plays back these files. How- Repeat folder USB hub ever, the system does not change setting if a See page 243. It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB device containing a mixture of audio and video connection and thereby connect multiple USB files is connected to the USB port, but instead devices simultaneously. Selection of USB

3 Only applies to USB and iPod. 4 Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 5 If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place. 6 Only applies to USB.

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

External audio source via AUX/USB* input device is made in USB mode under USB menu Audio format mp3, wma, aac, Select USB device. m4a MP3 player Video formatA divx, avi, asf Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system. For A Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium use in the system, an MP3 player must be set Sound Multimedia. in USB Removable device/Mass Storage Device mode. iPod An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection* via the player's connection cable.

NOTE 05 The system only supports the playback of audio files from iPod.

NOTE When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.

Compatible file formats via the USB connection Audio and video files in the following table are supported by the system for playback via the USB connection.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247 05 Infotainment system

Media Bluetooth*

Streaming audio NOTE Overview General The Bluetooth media player must support The car's media player is equipped with the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile Bluetooth1 and can wirelessly play streaming (AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP). The player should use audio files from external devices with AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise Bluetooth, such as mobile phones and PDAs. some functions may not work. Navigation and control of the sound can be Not all mobile phones and external media carried out via the centre console buttons or via players available in the market are fully com- the steering wheel keypad*. In some external patible with the Bluetooth function in the devices it is also possible to change tracks car's media player. Volvo recommends that from the device. you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or To play back the audio the car's media player visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones and external media Centre console control panel. must first be set in Bluetooth mode. players. VOL – volume 05 NOTE MEDIA key The car's media player can only play the Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE. audio files via the Bluetooth function. Confirm your selection or go to the menu by pressing OK/MENU. EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops the function in progress. Short presses are used to scroll between audio files. Long presses are used to fast forward and rewind audio files.

1 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Media Bluetooth*

NOTE 4. Check that the external device is searcha- nect a new external device, see "Change to ble/visible via Bluetooth, see the manual another external device" below. If the car is equipped with a steering wheel for the external device. keypad* and/or remote control* then in Change to another external device many cases these can be used instead of 5. Press OK/MENU. It is possible to change a connected device the buttons in the centre console. For a > The infotainment system searches for with another device if there are several devices description of the buttons in the steering wheel, see page 228. For a description of external devices in the vicinity. The in the car. However, the device must first have the remote control, see page 254. search may take a little while. The devi- been paired, see "Pair and connect external ces detected are specified with their device" above. To change to another device: respective Bluetooth name in the cen- 1. Repeatedly press on MEDIA until Menus tre console TV screen. The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the Bluetooth is shown, release and wait a centre console and the steering wheel key- 6. Select the external device you want to pair second or press OK/MENU. with and press . pad*. For general information on menu naviga- OK/MENU 2. Check that the external device is searcha- tion and menu structures, see page 277. 7. Enter the series of numbers that is shown ble/visible via Bluetooth, see the manual in the centre console TV screen via the Pair and connect external device for the external device. 05 external device's keypad and press the The connection of an external device takes 3. Press OK/MENU. external device's button to confirm the place in different ways depending on whether selection. 4. Turn TUNE to Change device, and con- or not it has been previously paired. A maxi- firm with OK/MENU. mum of 10 external devices can be paired. The external device is paired and connected Pairing takes place once per external device. automatically to the infotainment system. > After a while, the external device's name To connect a device for the first time, follow the is shown in the TV screen. If several Change audio file by pressing / on the instructions below: external devices have been paired then centre console or the steering wheel keypad*. these are also shown. 1. Repeatedly press on MEDIA until Bluetooth is shown, release and wait a Automatic connection 5. Select the device to be connected by turn- second or press OK/MENU. When the Bluetooth function is active and the ing TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. last external device connected is in range it is > Connection of the external device takes 2. Press OK/MENU. connected automatically. When the infotain- place. 3. When Add device is shown, press OK/ ment system searches for the last device con- Change audio file by pressing / on the MENU. nected its name is shown in the TV screen. To centre console or the steering wheel keypad*. connect to another device, press EXIT. Con-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249 05 Infotainment system

Media Bluetooth*

Remove the connected device tion in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu 1. Press Bluetooth mode on OK/MENU. Scan. 2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth Cancel scanning with EXIT. device and confirm with OK/MENU. Version information Bluetooth 3. Select the device to be removed by turning The car's current Bluetooth version can be TUNE, and confirm with OK/MENU. seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth > A prompt asking whether or not you menu Bluetooth software version in car. want to remove the connection is shown in the TV screen. 4. Press OK/MENU to confirm. EXIT cancels. Disconnecting the device 05 Automatic disconnection takes place if the external device moves out of the infotainment system's range. For more information on connection, see page 249.

Random This function plays back the audio files on the external device in random order. Activate/ deactivate the random function in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth menu Random. Change audio file by pressing / on the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.

Scanning of audio files in external device This function play backs the first ten seconds of each audio file. Activate/deactivate the func-

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

TV*

TV* IMPORTANT NOTE General A TV licence is required for this product in If the car is equipped with a steering wheel some countries. keypad* and/or remote control* then in many cases these can be used instead of NOTE the buttons in the centre console. For a This system only supports TV transmissions Overview description of the buttons in the steering in countries which transmit signals in wheel, see page 228. For a description of mpeg-2 format and follow the DVB-T stand- the remote control, see page 254. ard. The system does not support TV transmissions in mpeg-4 format or analogue transmissions. Menus The menus inMEDIA are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel key- NOTE pad*. For general information on menu navigation and menu structures, see page 277. The TV picture is only shown when the car is stationary. When the car is moving at a Watch TV 05 speed over about 6 km/h the picture disappears, No visual media available while If this is the first time the TV function is used or driving appears on the display screen, the country of residence has changed then the although the audio is heard during this time. Centre console control panel. setting of TV channels must first be carried out. The picture reappears when the car has MEDIA key. To set the TV channels to see the sec- stopped. tion "Searching TV channels/Preset list" page Station presets, numeric input 252. NOTE Navigate in channel lists or menus by turn- Repeatedly press on MEDIA until TV is ing TUNE. shown in the TV screen, release the button The reception is dependent both on how good the signal strength and signal quality Confirm your selection or go to the menu and wait a second or press OK/MENU. are. The transmission may be disturbed by by pressing OK/MENU. > A search starts and after a short while various factors such as tall buildings or the EXIT - leads up in the menu system, stops the most recently used channel is TV transmitter being far away. Coverage shown. level can also vary depending on where in the function in progress. the country you are located. The next available channel is shown by Changing channel pressing / . It is possible to change channel as follows:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251 05 Infotainment system

TV*

• Turn TUNE, a list of all available channels Searching TV channels/Preset list NOTE in the area is shown. If any of these chan- 1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU. nels is already saved as a preset then its If the country of residence has changed, a preset number is shown to the right of the 2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/ new scan of TV channels must be run. channel name. Continue turning TUNE to MENU. reach the desired channel and press OK/ 3. Turn TUNE to Select country and press Channel management MENU. OK/MENU. The preset list can be edited. You can change • By pressing the preset buttons (0-9). > If one or more countries have previously the order of the channels that are shown in the • Via a short press on the / buttons been selected then they are shown in a preset list. A TV channel can have more than one place in the preset list. The TV channel the next available channel in the area is list. positions can also vary in the preset list. shown. 4. Turn TUNE to either Other countries or one of the previously selected countries. To change the order in the preset list, go in TV NOTE Press OK/MENU. mode to TV menu Reorganize presets. If the car has been moved within the coun- > A list of all available countries is shown. 1. Turn TUNE to the channel you want to try, for example, from one city to another, it 05 5. Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g. move in the list and confirm with OK/ is not certain that the presets are available MENU. at the new location as the frequency range Sweden) and press OK/MENU. may have changed. In which case, carry out > An automatic scan for available TV > The selected channel is highlighted. a new search and save a new preset list, see channels starts, this scan takes a little 2. Turn TUNE to the new location in the list the function "Save the available TV channels while. During this time the figure for as presets", page 253. and confirm with OK/MENU. each channel found and added as a pre- > The channels change places with each set is shown. When the scan is com- other. NOTE plete a message is shown and the picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 pre- After the preset channels (max. 30) come all the If no reception is available on the preset sets) has now been created and is avail- other channels available in the area. It is pos- buttons, it may be because the car is at a sible to move a channel up to a place in the location other than where the scan of TV able. To change channel, see channels was run, for example, if the car page 251. preset list. was driven from Germany to France. A new The scan and preset storage can be cancelled selection of country and a new search may with EXIT. then need to be carried out.

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

TV*

Save the available TV channels as EXIT, then the channel that you just watched can sometimes be displayed, such as start and presets continues to be shown. Scanning does not end times and a brief description of the current If the car has been moved within the country, affect the preset list. programme. For more information on the INFO button, see page 231. for example, from one city to another, it is not Activate scanning in TV mode under TV menu certain that the presets are available at the new Scan. To return to the TV picture, wait several sec- location as the frequency range may have onds or press EXIT. changed. In which case, carry out another scan Teletext and save a new preset list. It is possible to read Teletext. Follow these Picture settings The settings for brightness and contrast can be 1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU. steps: adjusted. For more information, see page 244. 2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/ 1. Press the button on the remote con- MENU. trol. The reception is lost If the reception for the TV channel that is being 3. Turn to and press 2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with the TUNE Autostore OK/ shown disappears then the picture will freeze. number keys (0-9) to select page. MENU. Shortly after this a message appears informing > An automatic scan for available TV > The page is shown automatically. that the reception has been lost for the current 05 channels starts, this scan takes a little Enter new page number, or press the remote TV channel, and a new search for the channel while. During this time the figure for control buttons / to go to the next page. continues. When the reception returns the dis- each channel found and added as a pre- play of the TV channel starts immediately. It is set is shown. When the scan is com- Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing possible to change channel at any time when plete a message is shown and the pic- the button on the remote control. the message is shown. ture is shown. A preset list (max. 30 presets) has now been created and is avail- It is also possible to control the teletext with the If the message Reception lost, searching is able. To change channel, see coloured buttons on the remote control. shown then this is because the system has page 251. detected that there is no reception for all TV Information about the current channels. One possible reason may be that a Scanning the TV channels programme border has been crossed and that the system This function automatically scans through the Press the INFO button in order to display the is set to the wrong country. In which case, frequency range for all channels available in the information about the current programme, the change to the right country in accordance area where you are. When a channel is found, next programme and its start time. If the with "Searching TV channels/Preset list", see it is shown for approx. 10 seconds before INFO button is pressed once more then addi- page 252. scanning is resumed. Scanning is stopped with tional information on the current programme

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253 05 Infotainment system

Remote control*

Remote control* The remote control can be used for all func- NOTE tions in the infotainment system. The remote control's buttons have the same functions as Do not expose the remote control to direct the buttons in the centre console or steering sunlight (e.g. on the instrument panel) - otherwise problems may arise with the batter- wheel keypad*. ies. When using the remote control, first press the remote control's button to position F. Key Function Then aim the remote control at the IR receiver, which is located to the right of the INFO button Change between: (see page 231) in the centre console. L = Rear left TV screen* If the car is fitted with rear TV screens* and you want to operate one of these, select the F = Front TV screen required TV screen with the button on the R = Rear right TV screen* remote control. Then aim the remote control at Change to navigation* 05 the IR receiver for the TV screen to be operated, see page 268. Change to radio source (AM, WARNING FM1 etc.) Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, Change to media source (Disc, cameras, remote controls for accessories, TV* etc.) etc. in the glove compartment or other com- partments. Otherwise they may injure peo- Change to Bluetooth hands- ple in the car in the event of sudden braking free* or a collision. Scroll/fast rewind, change track/ song.

Play/pause

Scroll wheel, corresponds to TUNE in the centre console.

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Remote control*

Key Function Key Function Stop Information about the current programme, song, etc. Also used Scroll/fast forward, change when there is more information track/song. available than can be shown in the TV screen. Menu Selection of language for sound- track To previous, cancels function, deletes input characters Subtitles, selection of language for text Navigate up/down 1. Push down the catch on the battery cover Teletext*, On/Off and slide the battery cover in the direction Navigate right/left of the infrared lens. 05 Replacing the battery in the remote 2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new batteries in accordance with the symbols Confirm selection or go to the control menu system for the selected in the battery compartment and fit them. source NOTE 3. Refit the cover. Volume, decrease Battery life is normally 1-4 years and NOTE depends on how much the remote control Volume, increase is used. Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries in an environmentally safe manner.

0-9 Preset channels, number and let- The remote control is powered by four batter- ter input ies of the AA/LR6 type. Take along extra batteries for a long journey. Shortcuts for favourite setting.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255 05 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

General its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is Phone functions, controls overview connected.

NOTE Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.

Menus The menus in TEL are controlled from the cen- System overview. tre console and the steering wheel keypad*. Centre console control panel. Mobile phone For general information on menu navigation Number and letter buttons 05 and menu structures, see page 277. Microphone TEL - Activate/Disconnect Steering wheel keypad TUNE - Turn in normal view to the right to access the phone book, and to the left for Centre console control panel the call register for all calls; also used for navigation among the options on the TV 1 Bluetooth screen. A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can Accept incoming calls, confirm your selec- be connected wirelessly to the Infotainment tion or go to the Phone menu by pressing system. The infotainment system then works OK/MENU. handsfree, with the option to control a range of the mobile phone's functions remotely. The EXIT - Cancels/rejects phone calls, deletes microphone used is located by the driver's sun input characters, leads up in the menu sys- visor (2). The mobile phone can be operated by tem and cancels the current function.

1 Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

NOTE 2. Activate the vehicle's handsfree function Alternative 2 - via the mobile phone's menu by pressing TEL. Continue by pressing system If the car is equipped with a steering wheel OK/MENU. keypad* and/or remote control* then in 1. Activate the handsfree function by press- many cases these can be used instead of 3. Select, Change phone, press OK/ ing TEL in the centre console. If there is a the buttons in the centre console. For a MENU. phone connected, disconnect the con- description of the buttons in the steering > nected phone. wheel, see page 228. For a description of The menu option Add phone is shown the remote control, see page 254. on the TV screen. If one or more mobile 2. Make the car detectable/visible via phones have already been paired then Bluetooth, press OK/MENU and activate these are also shown. Press OK/ the Phone settings Discoverable Remember MENU. option. Activate/deactivate 4. Check that the mobile phone's 3. Search with the mobile phone's A short press on TEL activates the handsfree Bluetooth function is switched on and Bluetooth function, see the mobile phone press OK/MENU. function. The symbol indicates that the manual. > The audio system searches for mobile handsfree function is active. 05 phones in the vicinity. The search takes 4. Select My Volvo Car in the list of units Connect mobile phone approximately 30 seconds. The mobile detected in your mobile phone. A mobile phone is connected in different ways phones detected are specified with their 5. Enter an optional PIN code on your mobile depending on whether or not it has been con- respective Bluetooth name in the TV phone via the mobile phone's keypad nected previously. To connect a mobile phone screen. The handsfree function's when prompted to enter the PIN code. for the first time, follow the instructions below: Bluetooth name is shown in the mobile Then key in the same PIN code via the car's keypad. There are two options for connecting a mobile phone as My Volvo Car. phone, either via the car's menu system or via 5. Choose one of the mobile phones in the 6. Select to connect to My Volvo Car from the mobile phone's menu system. If one option centre console TV screen. the mobile phone. does not work then try with the other. 6. Enter the series of numbers that is shown The mobile phone is paired (registered) and Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system in the centre console TV screen via the connects automatically to the audio system. For more information about how mobile 1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible mobile phone's keypad and press the mobile phone's button to confirm the phones are paired, see page 259. via Bluetooth, see the mobile phone's selection. manual or www.volvocars.com. When the connection is established the mobile phone's Bluetooth name is shown in the TV

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257 05 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

screen. Now the mobile phone can be con- When the mobile phone has been discon- In call menu trolled from the audio system. nected an ongoing call can be continued by Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call to using the mobile phone's built-in microphone access the following functions: To call and speaker. 1. Make sure that the symbol appears • Mute - audio system microphone is muted. at the top of the TV screen and that the NOTE handsfree function is in phone mode. • Mobile phone - the call is transferred from Even when your mobile phone has been handsfree to the mobile phone. For some 2. Dial either the desired number or speed manually disconnected, some mobile mobile phones the connection is interrup- dial number, see page 263. Or in normal phones may automatically couple up to the ted. This is normal. The handsfree function view turn TUNE to the right to access the last handsfree unit connected, e.g. when a asks if you want to reconnect. phone book, and to the left for the call reg- new call begins. Dial number - option to call a third party ister for all calls. For information on the • using the number keys (current call set in phone book, see page 260. Making and receiving calls standby). 3. Press OK/MENU. Incoming call Call lists 05 The call is interrupted with EXIT. Press OK/MENU to answer the call, even The call lists are copied to the handsfree function at each new connection and are then Disconnecting the mobile phone if the audio system is in e.g. RADIO or updated during the connection. In normal view, Automatic disconnection takes place if the MEDIA mode. turn to the left with TUNE to see the call register mobile phone moves out of the audio system's Refuse or end with EXIT. for All calls . range. The connection to the mobile phone can be interrupted manually via a long press on Automatic answer In phone mode it is possible to see all the call TEL or in phone mode under Phone menu The automatic answer function means that lists under Phone menu All calls: Disconnect phone. For more information calls are accepted automatically. • All calls on connection, see page 259. Activate/deactivate in phone mode under • Missed calls The handsfree function is deactivated when Phone menu Call options Auto Answered calls the engine is switched off or when a door is answer. • opened2. • Dialled calls • Call duration

2 Only Keyless Drive.

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

NOTE menu Phone settings Sounds and More on pairing and connecting A maximum of ten mobile phones can be Certain mobile phones show a list of the last volume Mute radio/media. dialled numbers in reverse order. paired (registered). Pairing is performed once Ring volume per phone. After pairing the phone no longer In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of Voice mailbox settings Sounds and volume Ring one mobile phone can be connected at a time. In normal view a speed dial number for the volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press voice mailbox can be programmed in and then Automatic connection EXIT to save. accessed later via a long press on 1. When the handsfree function is active and the last mobile phone connected is in range it is Voice mailbox number is changed in phone Ring signals connected automatically. If the last connected mode under Phone menu Call options The handsfree function has integrated ring signals that can be selected in phone mode under mobile phone is not available then the system Voicemail number Change number. If will try to connect a mobile phone that was Phone menu Phone settings Sounds there is no number stored then this menu can paired earlier. When the audio system be reached with one long press on 1. and volume Ring signals Ring signal 1 searches for the last phone connected its name etc. is shown in the TV screen. 05 Audio settings NOTE Manual connection If you want to change the connected mobile Phone call volume For some mobile phones, the ringtone on The phone call volume can only be changed the phone connected will not be switched phone, go in phone mode to Phone menu during a call. Use the steering wheel keypad* off when one of the inbuilt signals for the Change phone. or turn the VOL control. handsfree system is used. Remove the device Audio system volume A connected mobile phone can be deregis- In order to select the connected phone's ring Providing there is no ongoing call taking place, tered and removed. This is performed in phone signal3, go in phone mode to Phone menu the audio system volume is controlled as usual mode under Phone menu Remove Phone settings Sounds and volume by turning VOL. Bluetooth device. Ring signals Mobile phone ring signal. If an audio source is active during an incoming call then it can be muted automatically. Acti- vate/deactivate in phone mode under Phone

3 Not supported by all mobile phones.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259 05 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

Version information Bluetooth NOTE Quick search for contacts The car's current Bluetooth version can be In normal view turn TUNE to the right to obtain Changes made from the car to a record in a list of contacts. Turn TUNE to select and seen in phone mode under Phone menu the mobile phone's telephone book will press OK/MENU to call. Phone settings Bluetooth software result in a new record in the car's telephone version in car. book, i.e. changes will not be saved to the Under the name of the contact is the phone phone. From the car, this will now look like number that is selected by default. If the sym- you have double records, with different Phone book icons. Note also that when a shortcut num- bol appears to the right of the contact then there are several phone numbers stored for the There are two phone books. These are merged ber is saved or a change to a contact is made, this will result in a new record in the contact. Change and dial a different number into one in the car and are displayed as a single car's phone book. than the one that is selected by default by phone book in the car. pressing the button on the control panel • The car downloads the mobile phone's All use of the phone book requires that the in the centre console. Then turn TUNE to select phone book and only displays this phone symbol appears at the top of the TV and press OK/MENU to call. book when the mobile phone from which this phone book was downloaded is con- screen and that the handsfree function is in Search in the list of contacts by using the cen- 05 nected. phone mode. tre console's keypad to key in the start of the • The car also has a built-in phone book. This The audio system stores a copy of the phone contact's name (see "Character table keypad contains all the contacts stored in the car book from each paired mobile phone. The in centre console" for button functions). irrespective of which phone was con- phone book can be copied automatically to the The list of contacts can also be accessed from nected when saving them. These contacts audio system during each connection. normal view by pressing and holding the button are visible for all users, regardless of the Activate/deactivate the function in phone on the centre console's keypad with the letter mobile phone that is connected to the car. mode under Phone menu Phone that the contact searched for starts with. For If a contact is saved in the car then the example, a long press on the button for 6 gives settings Phonebook download. symbol is shown in front of the con- instant access to that part of the list where the tact in the phone book. If the phone book contains a ringing caller's contacts with the letter M are located. contact information then this is shown in the TV screen.

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

Character table keypad in centre Key Function NOTE console + 0 p w There is no text wheel for High Performance, Key Function so TUNE cannot be used there to input characters: only the digit and letter buttons Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1 # * on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this. A B C Å Ä Æ À Ç 2 Searching for contacts 1. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press D E F È É 3 OK/MENU to confirm. The number and letter buttons on the control panel in the centre console can also be used. G H I Ì 4 2. Continue with the next letter and so on. The result of the search is shown in the phone J K L 5 book (3). 05 3. To change the input mode to numbers or M N O Ö Ø Ñ Ò 6 special characters, or to go to the phone book, turn TUNE to one of the options (see P Q R S ß 7 explanation in the table below) in the list for changing the input mode (2), press OK/ T U V Ü Ù 8 Search contacts using the text wheel. MENU. Character list W X Y Z 9 Changing the input mode (see table below) Phone book Shift between upper and lower case letter. To search for or edit a contact, go in phone mode to Phone menu Phone book Search.

4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261 05 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

123/ Change between letters and New contact 1. When the Name row is selected, press ABC numbers with OK/MENU. OK/MENU to reach the input mode (illustration above). Change to special characters More 2. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press with OK/MENU. OK/MENU to confirm. The number and Leads to the phone book (3). letter buttons on the control panel in the Turn TUNE to select a contact, centre console can also be used. press OK/MENU to see the 3. Continue with the next letter and so on. The saved numbers and other infor- name entered is shown in the input field (2) mation. in the TV screen. 4. To change the input mode to numbers, A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- special characters, change between acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered Entering letters for New contact. uppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turn characters. Changing the input mode (see table below) TUNE to one of the options (see explana- 05 By pressing a number key in the centre console tion in the table below) in the list (1) and Input field when the text wheel is shown (see illustration then press OK/MENU. above), a new character list (1) appears in the New contacts can be added in phone mode When the name has been fully entered, select TV screen. Continue repeatedly pressing the under Phone menu Phone book New OK in the list on the TV screen (1) and press number key to the desired letter and then contact. OK/MENU. Now continue with the telephone release. Continue with the next letter and so number in the same way as above. on. When a button is depressed the entry is NOTE confirmed when another button is depressed. When the telephone number has been entered, There is no text wheel for High Performance, press OK/MENU and select a telephone num- To enter a number, hold in the corresponding so TUNE cannot be used there to input ber type (Mobile, Home, Work or General). number key. characters: only the digit and letter buttons Press OK/MENU to confirm. on the control panel in the centre console can be used for this. When all details have been filled in, select Save contact in the menu to save the contact.

4 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

123/ Change between letters and speed dial number then an option is shown to ABC numbers with OK/MENU. save a contact to the selected speed dial number. More Change to special characters with OK/MENU. Receiving a vCard It is possible to receive a vCard to the car's OK Save and go back to Add con- phone book from other mobile phones (other tact with OK/MENU. than the one currently connected to the car). In order to allow this the car is set to visible mode Change between uppercase and for Bluetooth. The function is activated in lowercase letters with OK/ phone mode under Phone menu Phone MENU. book Receive vCard. Press OK/MENU, the cursor moves to the input field (2) at the Memory status top of the TV screen. The cursor Memory status of the car's phone book and the can now be moved, with TUNE, connected mobile phone's phone book can be 05 to the appropriate place to e.g. seen in phone mode under Phone menu insert new letters or delete with Phone book Memory status. EXIT. To be able to insert new letters first go back to the input Delete phone book mode, by pressing OK/MENU. The car's phone book can be deleted, this is carried out in phone mode under Phone menu Speed dial numbers Phone book Clear phone book. Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers under Phone menu Phone book Speed NOTE dial. Deleting the car's telephone book only dele- Dialling with speed dial numbers can be per- tes contacts in the car's telephone book. formed in phone mode using the number keys Contacts in the mobile phone's phone book on the keypad in the centre console, by press- are not deleted. ing a number key and then pressing OK/ MENU. If there is no contact stored on the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263 05 Infotainment system

Voice recognition* mobile phone

Introduction WARNING Remember 1 The infotainment system's voice recognition The driver always holds overall responsibil- allows the driver to voice-activate certain func- ity for driving the vehicle in a safe manner tions in a Bluetooth-connected mobile phone and complying with all applicable rules of or in Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and the road. Traffic Information System). The voice recognition system allows the driver NOTE to voice-activate certain functions of a • The information in this section Bluetooth-connected mobile phone and in describes the use of voice commands Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and to control a mobile phone connected Traffic Information System), while the driver using Bluetooth. For detailed infor- can keep his/her hands on the wheel at the mation on using a mobile phone con- same time. The input data are in dialogue form Steering wheel keypad. nected using Bluetooth with the car's with spoken commands from the user and ver- Button for voice recognition 05 Infotainment system see page 256. bal replies from the system. The voice recognition system uses the same microphone as • The Volvo navigation system RTI (Road To activate the system and Traffic Information System) has a the Bluetooth handsfree system (see illustra- Before voice commands to a mobile phone can separate user manual which contains tion on page 256) and the voice recognition more information on voice control and system's replies come via the car's speakers. be used the mobile phone must be paired and voice commands to control that sys- connected via Bluetooth handsfree. If a tele- tem. phone command is given and no mobile phone is paired, then the system will provide information about this. For information on pairing and Voice commands offer convenience and help connecting a mobile phone, see page 257. the driver to avoid being distracted, and instead concentrate on driving and focus • Press the button for voice recognition (1) in attention on the road and traffic conditions. order to activate the system and initiate a dialogue with voice commands. The system will then display commonly used com-

1 Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System).

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Voice recognition* mobile phone

mands in the TV screen in the centre con- Help functions for voice recognition To skip a lesson and go to the next one, press sole. • Instructions: A function that helps you get the button for voice recognition and say Keep the following things in mind when you use familiar with the system and the procedure "Next". Go back to the previous lesson by say- the voice recognition system: for giving commands. ing "Previous". • For a command - speak after the tone, with • Voice training: A function that enables the Exit the instructions by means of a long press normal voice at normal speed. voice recognition system to learn to know on the button for voice recognition. your voice and your accent. The function • Do not speak while the system is replying provides an opportunity to voice train two Voice training (the system cannot understand commands user profiles. The system displays up to fifteen phrases for during this time). you to say. Voice training can be started in the The help functions can be accessed by press- menu system MY CAR under Settings • The car's doors, windows and sunroof* ing the MY CAR button on the control panel in must be closed. the centre console and then turning TUNE to Voice settings Voice training. Choose • Avoid background noise in the passenger the desired menu option. between User 1 or User 2. For a description compartment. of the menu system, see page 146. Instructions NOTE The instructions can be started in two ways: After voice training has been completed, 05 remember to set your user profile under Voice If the driver is unsure of which command to NOTE use, he (she) can say "Help" - the system user setting. then responds with a few different com- This instruction and voice training can only Additional settings in MY CAR mands which can be used in the current sit- be started when the car is parked. uation. • User setting - Two user profiles can be set, the function is activated in the menu Voice commands can be disabled by: • Press the button for Voice recognition and system MY CAR under Settings Voice say "Voice instructions". • saying "Cancel" settings Voice user setting. Choose • not speaking • Activate the instructions in the menu sys- between User 1 or User 2. For a descrip- tem MY CAR under Settings Voice • a long press on the steering wheel but- tion of the menu system, see page 146. ton for Voice recognition settings Voice tutorial. For a descrip- • Voice volume - Can be changed in the tion of the menu system, see page 146. • Press EXIT or another source button menu system MY CAR under Settings (e.g. MEDIA). The instructions are divided into 3 lessons, Voice settings Voice output which take around 5 minutes in total to com- volume. For a description of the menu sys- plete. The system starts with the first lesson. tem, see page 146.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265 05 Infotainment system

Voice recognition* mobile phone

Using voice commands commands. For a description of the menu the last spoken group of numbers) or The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice system, see page 146. "Delete" (which deletes the whole spoken commands by pressing the button for voice phone number). Dial a number recognition (see illustration on page 264). The system understands the numbers 0 (zero) Dialling from the call register Once a dialogue has been started, commonly to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pronounced The following dialogue allows you to make a used commands will be shown in the TV individually, in groups of several numbers at a phone call from one of your mobile phone's call screen. Greyed-out text or text within brackets time, or the whole number all at once. Numbers registers. is not included in the spoken command. greater than 9 (nine) cannot be handled by the The user starts the dialogue by saying: When the driver becomes accustomed to the system, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11 (eleven) are not pos- Phone > call from the call register system, he/she can speed up the command sible. or dialogue and skip the prompts from the sys- The following is an example of a dialogue with tem, by briefly pressing the button for voice voice commands. The system's reply will vary Phone call from the call register recognition. depending on the situation. Continue by responding to the system's Commands can be given in several ways prompts. 05 The user starts the dialogue by saying: Phone > call number The command "Phone call contact" can be Call a contact pronounced as e.g.: or The following dialogue allows you to call your • "Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone", wait Phone call number pre-defined contacts in the mobile phone. for the system's reply, and then continue The user starts the dialogue by saying: by saying "Call contact." System reply Number? Phone > call contact or User action or • "Phone call contact" - Say the whole com- Start saying the numbers (as individual units, mand in one sequence. Phone call contact i.e. six-eight-seven, etc.) in the phone number. If you say several numbers and pause, the sys- Continue by responding to the system's Quick commands prompts. Quick commands for the phone can be found tem will repeat them, and then say "Continue". in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Continue to say the numbers. When finished, Consider the following when you call a contact: Voice settings Voice command list finish the command by saying "Call". • If there are several contacts with similar Phone commands and General • You can also change the number by saying names, they will be presented in the dis- the commands "Correct" (which deletes

266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Voice recognition* mobile phone

play in the numbered rows and the system prompts you to select a row number. • If there are more rows in the list than can be displayed simultaneously, saying "Down" allows you to scroll down in the list (and saying "Up" allows you to scroll up in the list). Calling voice mailbox The following dialogue allows you to call your voice mailbox to check if you have received any messages. The phone number for your voice mailbox must be registered in the Bluetooth function, see page 259. The user starts the dialogue by saying: Phone > call voice mailbox 05 or Phone call voice mailbox Continue by responding to the system's prompts.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267 05 Infotainment system

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*

Overview

05 TV screen General However, only one disc at a time can be played in the media player. It is possible to play back Headphones socket The RSE system is a system for rear-seat entertainment that makes it possible to e.g. music from e.g. an iPod or steaming audio On/Off button watch video, play music, listen to the radio, files via Bluetooth. watch TV* or connect other external devices A/V-AUX input The RSE system can be controlled from the (e.g. a games console). front TV screen (parental control). Remote control The RSE system is fully integrated with the It is possible to display or play back various Headphones car's infotainment system and can be used media from different sources on each TV simultaneously with other functions of the info- screen. It is also possible to display or play IR receiver/transmitter tainment system. back media from the same source on one or When the rear seat passengers are using e.g. more of the TV screens (front, right rear and left A/V-AUX or watching TV* while listening with rear). It is not possible to play back video from headphones, the driver and front seat passenger can still use the car's radio or media player.

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*

USB while a CD or DVD disc is being played NOTE Wireless headphones back. For prolonged use (more than 10 minutes) with the engine switched off, the capacity of IMPORTANT the vehicle's battery may fall to such a low When loading luggage and large objects in level that it is not possible to start the the vehicle, ensure that sufficient space is engine. left for the TV screens in the head restraints, In this case a message will be displayed on so that the TV screens are not scratched or the screen. damaged. Cover the TV screens with appropriate covering material during loading. Menus The menus for RSE are controlled using the NOTE remote control. For general information on The TV screens and remote control do not menu navigation and menu structures, see work at very low or high temperatures - they page 274. Control for channel A (CH.A) or channel B only "come alive" after the climate control (CH.B) 05 system has created an acceptable operat- On/Off button ing temperature in the passenger compart- Remote control ment. The RSE system is equipped with a remote Volume control. Using this it is possible to control the functions for each TV screen. The remote con- Indicator lamp On/Off NOTE trol can also be used to control other functions The RSE system includes two wireless head- Clean the lens on the IR receiver regularly in the infotainment system, even from the rear phones. with a damp cloth, a dirty lens affects seat. remote control function. The wireless headphones are activated with For information on the remote control, see the On/Off button (2), an indicator lamp illumi- page 254. nates (4). Select CH.A (channel A) or CH.B Power consumption, ignition positions (channel B) using the control (1). Adjust the vol- The system can be activated in ignition position ume using the volume control (3). I or II and while the engine is running. When the car is being started the film stops temporarily The headphones are automatically switched and continues when the engine has started. off after about 3 minutes if they are not used.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269 05 Infotainment system

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*

Battery replacement in wireless Headphones socket Connection of A/V-AUX input headphones It is possible to connect external headphones The headphones are powered by two batteries via the headphones socket (3.5 mm) on the of the AAA model. side of the head restraints, see the illustration Take along extra batteries for a long journey. on page 268. The volume is controlled using the remote control.

A/V-AUX input, Electrical socket 12 V The input allows you to connect other equipment. Always follow the instructions included with the external equipment, or from the manufacturer or reseller, when connecting. Equip- ment connected via the A/V-AUX input can use The A/V-AUX input is located under the armrest in the TV screens, wireless headphones, head- the tunnel console. phones sockets and the car's speakers. 05 1. Connect the video cable to the yellow socket. NOTE Wireless headphones. 2. Connect the left-hand audio cable to the The customer is responsible that equipment white socket and the right-hand one to the connected to the A/V-AUX input or head- 1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery red socket. cover. phones socket does not cause interference in the vehicle's RSE system. 3. Connect the power cable to the electrical 2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new socket if your equipment is designed for 12 batteries in accordance with the symbols V. in the battery compartment and insert them. Always follow the instructions for the external equipment when connecting. 3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw. For electrical socket location, see page 219 Environmental care Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries in an environmentally safe manner.

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*

Playing back audio/video via the A/V- Settings from the front TV screen and wait a second and the selection is AUX input accepted automatically. 1. Switch on the rear TV screen by means 2. Turn TUNE to select the right, left-hand or pressing the On/Off button on the TV both TV screens, and confirm with OK/ screen. MENU. 2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver 3. Turn TUNE to select RADIO, MEDIA (or on the TV screen and press repeatedly on RSE settings). Press OK/MENU to con- to the source A/V AUX , release and firm. wait a few seconds and the selection is 4. Turn TUNE to the desired source (e.g. accepted. Disc) and confirm with OK/MENU. The selected source will start automatically (if 3. Switch on the connected device and press e.g. a disc is in the media player). PLAY or equivalent on the connected Cancel and go back with EXIT. device. MEDIA The remote control can also be used for set- Input volume TUNE tings. For more information on the remote con- 05 The input volume is adjusted in the menu under trol, see page 254. A/V AUX input volume. OK/MENU Parental control for the TV* EXIT To activate the system It is possible to set a permitted age limit for the TV, so that only programmes for the appropri- Selection of source in the rear TV The RSE system can be activated from either ate age can be viewed. The setting is activated the front or rear TV screen. screens for both TV screens. From the front TV screen it is possible to select From the front TV screen, press MEDIA and the source (what shall be displayed or played Activate under RSE settings TV parental select RSE. back) for the right and left-hand rear TV control, in accordance with point 2-4 in the From the rear TV screen, by means of pressing screens respectively. It is possible select the section "Selection of source in the rear TV the On/Off button on the rear TV screen and same source for both or different sources for screens", see page 271. Choose between Age then pressing or on the remote the right and left-hand TV screens respectively. 0-6, Age 7-13, Age 14-18 and No parental control and selecting a source (e.g. Disc). 1. Press on MEDIA, press repeatedly in order control. to scroll to RSE on the TV screen, release

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271 05 Infotainment system

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*

Audio off TV screen settings1 rear TV screen Normal - The image is shown in its normal It is possible to mute the two rear TV screens When playing back video files and displaying mode (normally 4:3 or 16:9 format). from the front TV screen. The function is acti- TV* a pop-up menu is available by means of Zoom 1 - Full screen used but parts of the vated under RSE settings Mute, in accord- pressing on the remote control. The pop- image are cut off. ance with point 2-4 in the section "Selection of up menu has different content depending on Zoom 2 - Full screen used but image propor- source in the rear TV screens", see page 271. what is being played back or displayed. tions may be slightly distorted. TV screen off Day/Night mode Unless otherwise stated the image is displayed It is possible to switch off the video for the two The TV screen can be set in three different in the screen format Normal. rear TV screens from the front TV screen. The modes for different light conditions. Choose function is activated under RSE settings between Auto, Day and Night. Press on the remote control and change Display off, in accordance with point 2-4 in the the mode under Display format on the TV Press on the remote control and change section "Selection of source in the rear TV screen. For general information on menu navi- screens", see page 271. the mode under Day/Night mode on the TV gation and menu structures, see page 274. screen. For general information on menu navi- 05 Press one of the remote control's numeric keys gation and menu structures, see page 274. Source menu (0 - 9) to switch on the TV screen again. The TV What is shown in the pop-up menu for the screen is also switched to the On mode when Picture settings source menu depends on what is being played the ignition is switched on. You can adjust the settings for brightness, con- back or displayed, it can be e.g. Disc menu or trast, shade and colour. USB menu. For general information on menu Switching off the remote control (front) Press on the remote control and change navigation and menu structures, see It is possible to switch off the IR receiver for the page 274. front TV screen, which means that the remote the mode under Image settings on the TV control cannot be used for the front TV screen. screen. For general information on menu navi- DVD disc's menu2 The function is activated under RSE settings gation and menu structures, see page 274. If a DVD video disc is played back then this Disable remote control (front), in accord- Display format menu option is shown in the pop-up menu. For ance with point 2-4 in the section "Selection of It is possible to choose between display for- general information on menu navigation and source in the rear TV screens", see page 271. menu structures, see page 274. mats Normal, Zoom 1 and Zoom 2.

1 Only available for playing back video files and displaying TV*. 2 Only applies to DVD video discs.

272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*

Menu settings from the rear TV screen TV settings* 1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select For general information on menu navigation CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for Searching TV channels/Preset list and menu structures, see page 274. right-hand screen. See page 252. 2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver Random3 Save the available TV channels as on the TV screen, press repeatedly on See page 243. to the desired source (Disc, USB, presets AUX etc.), release and wait a few seconds 4 See page 253. Repeat folder and the selection is accepted. See page 243. Scanning the TV channels 3. Insert a CD disc in the car's media player DivX Video On Demand4 See page 253. or connect an external audio source via the The media player can be registered in order to car's USB port/AUX input or via Blue- play DivX VOD type files from burned discs or Music, video, radio and TV* tooth . USB. The code for registration is available in Playback and navigation in playlists disc mode or USB mode under DivX® VOD Playing back music Rotate the scroll wheel on the remote control It is possible to play back music from disc code. For more information visit to access the playlist/folder structure. 05 www.divx.com/vod. tracks/audio files via the car's media player, either gives confirmation of subfolder selection USB port/AUX input or via streaming audio files or starts playing back the selected disc track/ USB hub from a Bluetooth -connected phone. audio file. It is also possible to play back the It is possible to connect a USB hub to the USB disc track/audio file using on the remote connection, see page 246. NOTE control and change the disc tracks/audio file The system only supports one iPod user at using / . Stop playback using a time in the navigation mode (playlist). . For more information, see page 241. For more information about media players, USB/AUX and Media Bluetooth, see the pages 241, 245 and 248.

3 Applies to CD-Audio, CD/DVD discs, USB and iPod. 4 Applies to CD/DVD discs and USB.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273 05 Infotainment system

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*

Watching video warded/rewound at one speed, while video 1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select It is possible to watch video from disc tracks/ files can be fast forwarded/rewound at four dif- CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for video files via the car's media player or USB ferent speeds. Fast forward/rewind is stopped right-hand screen. port. by pressing -, - or the equivalent 2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver For more information about media players and opposite / button. on the TV screen, press repeatedly on USB, see the pages 241 and 245. to TV, release and wait a few sec- Listening to radio onds and the selection is accepted. 1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select It is possible to listen to radio via the car's 3. Select a channel with one of the preset CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for radio. right-hand screen. buttons (0 - 9) on the remote control or 1. Switch on the wireless headphones, select press / , the next/previous 2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver CH.A for left-hand screen or CH.B for channel available in the area is displayed. on the TV screen, press repeatedly on right-hand screen. to the desired source (Disc or For more information on the TV, see 2. Aim the remote control at the IR receiver USB), release and wait a few seconds and page 251. on the TV screen, press repeatedly on the selection is accepted. to the desired source (AM, FM1, 05 Menu navigation RSE 3. Insert a DVD disc in the car's media player DAB1* etc.), release and wait a few sec- or connect an external source via the car's onds and the selection is accepted. USB port. General 3. Select a station with one of the preset but- The RSE menus are operated both from the Playback and navigation tons (0 - 9) on the remote control or press front TV screen, and from either of the rear TV Play back disc track/video file using on / , the radio will search for the screens. From the front TV screen it is possible the remote control and change disc track/ next/previous available station. to both activate a source for a rear TV screen, and to make certain settings for the two rear TV video file using / . Stop playback For more information on the radio, see screens. using . For more information about play- page 234. back and navigation of DVD video discs, see page 243 and for video files, see page 241. Watching TV* It is possible to watch TV via the car's media Fast forward/reverse player. Start fast forward/rewind by means of a long press on the buttons / . Then increase fast forward/rewind speed by short presses the buttons. Audio files are fast for-

274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*

5 RSE menus front TV screen Pop-up menu RSE RADIO To access the menu RSE must first be Press on the remote control when a selected under MEDIA via the front TV screen. video file is being played back or the TV* is Menu valid for AM, FM1, FM2, DAB1* and Then press OK/MENU to access the menu. being displayed in order to access the pop-up DAB2*: Turn TUNE to the desired selection and con- menu. Menu selections are made using the firm with OK/MENU. The remote control and scroll wheel and the buttons on the remote Day/Night mode steering wheel keypad can also be used. control. For information on the remote control, Display off It is possible to make settings for either right or see page 254. left-hand TV screen or both TV screens. Reset all RSE settings Display format Left RSE screen menu, Right RSE screen MEDIA menu and Both RSE screen menus: Image settings Day/Night mode RSE CD Audio menu Power off/Power on Source menu6 Disc menu RADIO DVD disc menu7 Random 05 MEDIA Day/Night mode RSE settings RSE menus rear TV screens Display off Mute Press on the remote control when a Reset settings for disc Display off source (e.g. Disc) is selected in order to access RSE CD/DVD Data menu the RSE menus for the rear TV screen. Disable remote control (front) Disc menu Menu selections are made using the scroll TV parental control Random wheel and the buttons on the remote control. Reset all RSE settings For information on the remote control, see Repeat folder page 254. DivX® VOD code

5 Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV*. 6 What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. Disc menu or USB menu. 7 Only applies to DVD video discs.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275 05 Infotainment system

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system*

Day/Night mode RSE AUX menu Display off Display off AUX menu Reset Bluetooth settings AUX input volume Reset settings for disc RSE TV menu* Day/Night mode RSE DVD Video menu TV menu Disc menu Display off Select country DVD disc menu Reset AUX settings Autostore Subtitles RSE A/V-AUX menu Scan Audio tracks A/V AUX menu Day/Night mode Advanced settings A/V AUX input volume Display off Day/Night mode Day/Night mode Reset TV settings Display off Display off 05 Reset settings for disc Reset AUX settings

RSE USB menu RSE iPod menu USB menu iPod menu Random Random Repeat folder Day/Night mode DivX® VOD code Display off Select USB device Reset iPod settings Day/Night mode RSE Bluetooth menu Display off Bluetooth menu Reset USB settings Random Day/Night mode

276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Menu navigation, Infotainment

To navigate in the menus Controls in the centre console Audio settings Equalizer, which requires The infotainment system's functions are con- that the following is carried out beforehand: trolled via the system's menus. Each source in 1. Select a source by pressing one of the but- the infotainment system (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA) tons (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA etc.). Continue has its own separate menus. In order to access to press in order to scroll down among the the menus and activate a function a source options on the TV screen (e.g. FM1), must first have been selected (e.g. RADIO/ release and wait a second and the selec- FM1). Then press OK/MENU for access into tion is accepted automatically. Alterna- the menu for the selected source. tively, turn TUNE and confirm with OK/ The menu options are selected by means of the MENU. buttons in the centre console or via the steering 2. Press OK/MENU and turn TUNE, or use wheel keypad*. The functions are described the thumbwheel* on the steering wheel under their respective sections. RADIO keypad to reach the desired menu option e.g. Audio settings and press OK/ MEDIA MENU. 05 TEL 3. Turn TUNE again to reach the desired submenu, e.g. Equalizer, and press OK/ TUNE MENU. OK/MENU Menus RADIO Search paths The search paths to the menu functions are Main menu AM specified in the owner's manual with the form: AM menu Show presets1 Scan

1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 277 05 Infotainment system

Menu navigation, Infotainment

Audio settings2 Reset all FM settings Menus MEDIA 5 Sound stage3 Audio settings Main menu CD Audio Equalizer4 Disc menu Main menu DAB1*/DAB2* Random Volume compensation DAB menu Scan Reset all audio settings Ensemble learn 5 PTY filtering Audio settings Main menu FM1/FM2 FM menu Turn off PTY filtering Main menu CD/DVD1 Data TP Show radio text Disc menu Show radio text Show presets1 Play/Pause Show presets1 Scan Stop 05 Scan Advanced settings Random News settings DAB linking Repeat folder Advanced settings DAB band Change subtitle REG Sub channels Change audio track Alternative frequency Show PTY text Scan EON Reset all DAB settings Audio settings5 Set TP favourite Audio settings5 PTY settings

2 The menu options for audio settings are the same for all audio sources. 3 Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia. 4 Does not apply to Performance. 1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 5 For submenus, see "Main menu AM".

278 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Infotainment system

Menu navigation, Infotainment

Main menu DVD1 Video Main menu USB4 Audio settings5 Disc menu USB menu DVD disc menu Play/Pause Main menu AUX AUX menu Play/Pause/Continue Stop AUX input volume Stop Random Audio settings5 Subtitles Repeat folder Audio tracks Select USB device Main menu TV* Advanced settings Change subtitle TV menu Angle Change audio track Select country DivX® VOD code Scan Reorganize presets Autostore Audio settings5 Audio settings5 Scan 05 4 4 Main menu iPod Main menu Media Bluetooth Audio settings5 iPod menu Bluetooth menu Random Random Pop-up menu6 video and TV* Scan Change device Press OK/MENU when a video file is being Audio settings5 Remove Bluetooth device played back or TV* is being shown in order to access the pop-up menu. Scan Bluetooth software version in car Image settings

1 Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia. 5 For submenus, see "Main menu AM". 4 Does not apply to Performance. 6 Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV*.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 279 05 Infotainment system

Menu navigation, Infotainment

Source menu7 Change phone DVD root menu8 Remove Bluetooth device DVD disc TOP menu8 Phone settings Discoverable Menus TEL Sounds and volume Phonebook download Main menu Bluetooth handsfree4 Phone menu Bluetooth software version in car All calls Call options All calls Auto answer Missed calls Voicemail number Answered calls 05 Disconnect phone Dialled calls Call duration Phone book Search New contact Speed dials Receive vCard Memory status Clear phone book

7 What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can be e.g. Disc menu or USB menu. 8 Only applies to DVD video discs. 4 Does not apply to Performance.

280 05 Infotainment system

281 Recommendations during driving...... 284 Refuelling...... 287 Fuel...... 288 Loading...... 291 Cargo area...... 293 Driving with a trailer...... 296 Towing and recovery...... 302

282 DURING YOUR JOURNEY 06 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

General 2nd gear under normal conditions on level IMPORTANT ground. Economical driving Engine damage can occur if water enters For more information and further advice, see the air filter. Driving economically means driving smoothly the pages 13 and 373. while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving In depths greater than 25 cm, water could style and speed to the prevailing conditions. enter the transmission. This reduces the WARNING lubricating ability of the oils and shortens • Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted the service life of these systems. to the current traffic situation and road - Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important lower engine speeds result in lower fuel In the event of the engine stalling in water, systems such as the power steering and consumption. do not try restart - tow the car from the water brake servo. to a workshop - an authorised Volvo work- • Avoid driving with open windows. shop is recommended. Risk of engine • Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration Driving in water breakdown. and heavy braking. The car can be driven through water at a maxi- • Remove unnecessary items from the car - mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of Engine, gearbox and cooling system the greater the load the higher the fuel con- 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised Under special conditions, for example hard sumption. when passing through flowing water. driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may • Use engine braking to slow down, when it During driving in water, maintain a low speed overheat - in particular with a heavy load. can take place without risk to other road and do not stop the car. When the water has users. 06 been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly For information about overheating when driv- • A roof load and ski box increase air resis- and check that full brake function is achieved. ing with a trailer, see page 296. tance, leading to higher fuel consumption Water and mud for example can make the Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front - remove the load carriers when not in use. • brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake of the grille when driving in hot climates. • Do not run the engine to operating tem- function. If the temperature in the engine's cooling perature at idling speed, but rather drive • • Clean the electric contacts of the electric system is too high the instrument panel's with a light load as soon as possible - a engine block heater and trailer coupling warning symbol is illuminated and there is cold engine consumes more fuel than a after driving in water and mud. warm one. a text message displayed there High • Do not let the car stand with water over the engine temp Stop safely - stop the car in • Cars with the D5 engine and 6-speed man- sills for any long period of time - this could a safe way and allow the engine to run at ual transmission or DRIVe engine and 6- cause electrical malfunctions. idling speed for several minutes to cool speed manual transmission are started in down.

284 06 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

• If the text message High engine temp Open tailgate least 15 minutes - battery charging is more Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop effective during driving than running the engine is shown then the engine must be WARNING engine at idling speed while stationary. switched off after stopping the car. Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic Before a long journey • In the event of overheating in the gearbox exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car • Check that the engine is working normally a built-in protection function is activated through the cargo area. which, amongst other things, illuminates and that fuel consumption is normal. the instrument panel's warning symbol and • Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil there is a text message displayed there Do not overload the battery or other fluid). Transmission hot Reduce speed or The electrical functions in the car load the bat- • Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths. Transmission hot Stop safely - follow tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the key Carrying a warning triangle is a legal the recommendation given and lower the position II when the engine is switched off. • requirement in certain countries. speed and stop the car in a safe way and Instead use the I mode - which uses less allow the engine to run at idling speed for power. Winter driving a few minutes to allow the gearbox to cool Also, be aware of different accessories that Check the following in particular before the down. load the electrical system. Do not use functions cold season: • If the car overheats, the air conditioning which use a lot of power when the engine is may be switched off temporarily. • The engine coolant must contain at least switched off. Examples of such functions are: 50% glycol. This mixture protects the • Do not turn the engine off immediately you • ventilation fan engine against frost erosion down to stop after a hard drive. approximately –35 °C. To achieve optimum 06 • headlamps NOTE antifreeze protection, different types of gly- • windscreen wiper col must not be mixed. It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to • audio system (high volume). The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent operate for a while after the engine has been • switched off. If the battery voltage is low the information dis- condensation. play shows the text Low battery Power save • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with mode. The energy-saving function then shuts lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- down certain functions or reduces certain ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel functions such as the ventilation fan and/or consumption while the engine is cold. For audio system. more information on suitable oils, see page 369. In which case, charge the battery by starting the engine and then running it for at

285 06 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

IMPORTANT Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.

• The condition of the battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold. • Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir. To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.

NOTE The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries. 06 Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.

286 06 During your journey

Refuelling

Refuelling Opening the fuel filler flap manually Opening/closing the fuel cap Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

The fuel filler flap can be opened manually A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in when electric opening from the passenger the event of high outside temperatures. Open Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the compartment is not possible. the cap slowly. lighting panel - the flap opens when the button is released. 1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo • After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it area (same side as fuel filler flap) and locate until one or more clicking sounds are The arrow on the information display's the green cord with handle. heard. symbol reminds which side of the car 06 2. Pull the cord gently straight back until the Filling up with fuel the fuel filler cap is located. fuel filler flap folds out with a "click". Do not overfill the tank but fill until the Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until • • pump nozzle cuts out. a click confirms that it is closed. IMPORTANT Pull the wire gently - minimal force is NOTE required to disengage the hatch lock. Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

287 06 During your journey

Fuel

General information on fuel IMPORTANT Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended The Lambda-sond is part of a control system Mixing different types of fuel or the use of intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel by Volvo must not be used as engine power fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's and fuel consumption is negatively affected. guarantees, and any associated service economy. agreement. This applies to all engines. An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content WARNING NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85). Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get- value is fed into an electronic system that con- ting fuel splashes in the eyes. tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any NOTE adjusted. These adjustments create optimal contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty Extreme weather conditions, driving with a conditions for efficient combustion, and of water for at least 15 minutes and seek trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- medical attention. nation with fuel grade are factors that could together with the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car- Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, affect the car's performance. bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel bon monoxide and nitrous oxides). are highly toxic and could cause permanent Catalytic converters injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical Petrol attention immediately if fuel has been swal- The purpose of the catalytic converters is to lowed. purify exhaust gases. They are located close to Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most the engine so that operating temperature is engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 06 reached quickly. and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in WARNING exceptional cases. The catalytic converters consist of a monolith Fuel which spills onto the ground can be (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel • 95 RON can be used for normal driving. ignited. walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho- • 98 RON is recommended for optimum per- Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, formance and minimum fuel consumption. ting to refuel. i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem- When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, ical reaction without being used up them- Never carry an activated mobile phone fuel with the highest possible octane rating is selves. when refuelling. The ring signal could cause recommended for optimum performance and spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, fuel economy. leading to fire and injury.

288 06 During your journey

Fuel

IMPORTANT IMPORTANT to carry out a check. Do this before starting the engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with • Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel: not to damage the catalytic converter. diesel standard. 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition The sulphur content must be a maximum of • Do not use additives not recommended switch and push it in to the end position 50 ppm. by Volvo. (see page 82). 2. Press the START button without depress- Diesel IMPORTANT ing the brake and/or clutch pedal. Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc- Diesel type fuels that must not be used: 3. Wait approx. 1 minute. ers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Diesel • Special additives 4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/ should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 stand- or clutch pedal and then press the • Marine diesel fuel ards. Diesel engines are sensitive to contami- START button again. nants in the fuel, such as excessively high vol- • Heating oil NOTE umes of sulphur particles for example. • FAME1 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil. Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin shortage: precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel accordance with Volvo recommendations • Stop the car on as flat/level ground as and generate increased wear and engine fuel designed for low temperatures around possible - if the car is tilting there is a damage that is not covered by the Volvo risk of air pockets in the fuel supply. freezing point is available from the major oil warranty. 06 companies. This fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre- Draining condensation from the fuel filter Empty tank cipitate. The fuel filter separates condensation from the The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera- The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the tion. reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When tank may need to be vented in the workshop in refuelling, check that the area around the fuel order to restart the engine after fuelling. The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star- gent and water. vation, the fuel system needs a few moments

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.

289 06 During your journey

Fuel

or if you suspect that the car has been filled When the filter has become approximately Fuel consumption and emissions of with contaminated fuel. 80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the carbon dioxide instrument panel illuminates, and the message Fuel consumption figures may change if the car IMPORTANT Soot filter full See manual is shown on the is equipped with extra equipment that affects instrument panel display. Certain special additives remove the water the car's weight. See information on weights separation in the fuel filter. Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car page 364 and table page 372. until the engine reaches normal operating tem- The manner in which the car is driven, and Diesel particle filter (DPF) perature, preferably on a main road or motor- other non-technical factors can also affect fuel way. The car should then be driven for approx- Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, consumption. imately 20 minutes more. which results in more efficient emission con- Consumption is higher and power output lower trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are col- for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON. lected in the filter during normal driving. So- NOTE called "regeneration" is started in order to burn A smaller reduction of engine power may be NOTE away the particles and empty the filter. This noticed temporarily during regeneration. requires the engine to have reached normal Extreme weather conditions, driving with a operating temperature. trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- When regeneration is complete the warning nation with fuel grade are factors that could Regeneration of the filter takes place automat- text is cleared automatically. affect the car's performance. ically at an interval of approximately Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that 06 300-900 km depending on driving conditions. the engine reaches normal operating tempera- Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It ture more quickly. may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during IMPORTANT regeneration. If the filter fills up with particles then it can Regeneration in cold weather be difficult to start the engine and the filter If the car is frequently driven short distances in will be incapable of functioning. Then there cold weather then the engine does not reach is a risk that the filter will have to be normal operating temperature. This means that replaced. regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.

290 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 During your journey

General information on loading • Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- Front seat Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The lets with straps or web lashings. The passenger seat backrest can also be total of the weight of the passengers and all folded for an extra long load, see page 84. accessories reduces the car's payload by a WARNING corresponding weight. For more detailed infor- A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a Roof load mation on weights, see page 364. frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry The tailgate is opened via a button on the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg. Using load carriers the lighting panel or the remote con- To avoid damaging the car and for maximum trol key, see page 61. WARNING possible safety while driving, the load carriers designed by Volvo are recommended. The protection provided by the inflatable WARNING curtain in the headlining may be compro- Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers. The car's driving characteristics change mised or eliminated by high loads. depending on the weight and distribution of • Never load cargo above the backrest. • Check periodically that the load carriers the load. and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps. WARNING To bear in mind when loading • Distribute the load evenly over the load Always secure the load. During heavy brak- carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the • Position the load firmly against the rear ing the load may otherwise shift, causing bottom. seat's backrest. injury to the car's occupants. • The size of the area exposed to the wind, 06 Note that objects must not prevent the function Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with and therefore fuel consumption, increase of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any something soft. with the size of the load. of the rear seat's backrests is folded down,see Switch off the engine and apply the parking Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, page 29. • brake when loading/unloading long items. heavy braking and hard cornering. • Centre the load. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into • Heavy objects should be placed as low as a drive position - and the car could then WARNING possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on move off. The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- lowered backrests. racteristics are altered by roof loads. For • Cover sharp edges with something soft to information on maximum permitted roof avoid damaging the upholstery. load, including load carriers and any space box, see page 364.

291 06 During your journey

Lowering the rear seat backrest Bag holder* 12 V electrical socket* To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear seat backrest can be folded down, see page 86.

Load retaining eyelets G017745

Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor. 1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the floor Lower the cover to access the electrical hatch. socket. 2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure the • The socket also provides voltage when the remote control key is not in the ignition carrying handle in the hooks. switch. 06 The folding load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the NOTE cargo area. Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the WARNING risk of discharging the car's battery. Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are loose or protrude could cause injury during heavy braking. Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

292 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 During your journey

Cargo area

Safety net WARNING Take care to press forward the rod's retaining hooks for each respective roof moun- Loads in the cargo area must be firmly ting's front end position. secured, even if the safety net is correctly fitted.

Attaching

NOTE The safety net is most easily fitted via one of the rear doors. G034213

The safety net is fitted into four mounting points. WARNING A safety net prevents loads or pets from being Make sure that the upper mountings of the thrown forward in the passenger compartment safety net are correctly fitted and that the Rear fitting. anchoring straps are securely fastened. in the event of sudden braking. For safety rea- 4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear sons, the safety net must always be correctly Do not use a damaged net. roof mountings, hook the safety net's fastened and secured. anchoring straps into the front floor eyes in 06 The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and 1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the cargo area. can be secured two different locations in the the split upper rod is locked in extended car: position. • Rear fitting - Behind the rear seat backrest 2. Hook one end of the rod into the front or rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap Front fitting - Behind the front seat back- • locks turned towards you. rests. 3. Hook the other end of the rod into the roof mounting on the opposite side - the tele- scopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facilitate alignment.

293 06 During your journey

Cargo area

IMPORTANT Break the rod in the centre, fold it together and roll up the net. If the seat/backrest is pressed hard backwards against the safety net then the net The folded safety net can be stored under the and/or its roof mountings could be dam- cargo compartment floor. aged. Safety grille* 5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring straps.

Removal and storage

Front fitting.

Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchoring straps into the eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats G031978 are moved forward slightly. 06 A safety grille prevents loads or pets from Pay attention to make sure that you do not being thrown forward in the passenger com- press the seat/backrest hard against the partment in the event of sudden braking. net when the seat/backrest is moved back The safety net can be easily removed and folded again - only adjust until the seat/backrest up. Folding up makes contact with the net. Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and Release the tension in the net by pressing pull back/up. in the button on the anchoring strap's lock and feeding out part of the strap. IMPORTANT Press in the catch and detach both of the The safety grille cannot be folded up or anchoring strap's hooks. down when a cargo cover is fitted.

294 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 During your journey

Cargo area

Fitting/removal Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from The safety grille is normally permanently instal- into the recesses at the cargo area's rear posts. its support shelves, and lower. led in the car because it can easily be folded up in the roof and so be out of the way if a IMPORTANT longer cargo area is required. However, if The safety grille cannot be folded up or desired, the safety grille can be dismantled and down when the cargo cover is fitted. removed from the car.

For information about the tools required and Attaching the cargo cover methods for fitting/removal, see the installation Move one end piece of the cover into the 1 instructions that were included with the initial recess on the side panel. purchase. Move the other end piece into the corres- For safety reasons, the safety grille must ponding recess. always be correctly fastened and secured when being refitted. Press both sides in. A "click" should be audible and the red marking should disappear. Cargo cover* > Check that both end pieces are locked.

Removing the cargo cover 1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out. 06 2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the other end piece loosens automatically.

Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing disc In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the

G031977 cargo area when it is fitted.

1 Installation instructions no. 30715972.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 295 06 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

General • For safety reasons, the maximum permit- stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The ted speed for the car when coupled with a which is normal. total of the weight of the passengers and all trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the Trailer weights accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights. For information on Volvo's permitted trailer payload by a corresponding weight. For more weights, see page 365. detailed information on weights, see • Maintain a low speed when driving with a page 364. trailer up long, steep ascents. NOTE If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%. the car is delivered with the necessary equip- The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. ment for driving with a trailer. Trailer cable National vehicle regulations can further limit • The car's towing bracket must be of an An adapter is required if the car's towing trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be approved type. bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow. • If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag for driving with a trailer. on the ground. WARNING • Distribute the load on the trailer so that the Direction indicators and brake lights on Follow the stated recommendations for weight on the towing bracket complies the trailer trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer with the specified maximum towball load. If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indica- may be difficult to control in the event of 06 • Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- tors are broken, then the combined instrument sudden movement and braking. mended pressure for a full load. For tyre panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes pressure label location, see page 315. faster than normal and the display shows the Manual gearbox • The engine is loaded more heavily than text Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer. usual when driving with a trailer. If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light Overheating • Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot brand new. Wait until it has been driven at trailer text is shown. climate there may be a risk of overheating. least 1000 km. • Do not run the engine at higher revolutions • The brakes are loaded much more than Level control* than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) usual on long and steep downhill slopes. The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant - otherwise the oil temperature may Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your height irrespective of the car's load (up to the become too high. speed. maximum permissible weight). When the car is

296 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

Diesel engine 5-cyl 2. Activate the parking brake. WARNING • In the event of a risk of overheating the 3. Move the gear selector to position P. optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant. 4. Release the foot brake. towbar: • Move the gear selector to park position P • Follow the installation instructions care- Automatic gearbox when parking an automatic car with a fully. hitched trailer. Always use the parking • The detachable section must be locked Overheating brake. with the key before setting off. When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot • Block the wheels with chocks when park- • Check that the indicator window shows climate there may be a risk of overheating. ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill. green. • An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed. Starting on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake. Important checks • In the event of overheating a warning sym- • The towbar's towball must be cleaned and bol illuminates on the instrument panel 2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- greased regularly. combined with a text message - follow the tion D. recommendation given. 3. Release the parking brake. NOTE Steep inclines 4. Release the foot brake and start driving off. If a towball hitch with vibration damper is • Do not lock the automatic transmission in used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- a higher gear than the engine "can cope ball. 06 with" - it is not always a good idea to drive Towing bracket at a high gear with low engine revolutions. If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose sec- IMPORTANT tion must be followed carefully, see See also the specific information on slow page 299. driving with trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission on page 121.

Parking on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.

297 06 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

Storing the detachable towbar Specifications G031713 G021485

Towbar storage space. Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

IMPORTANT A 1013 Always remove the towbar after use and B 69 store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap. C 855 06 D 428

E 109

F 296

G Side member

H Ball centre

298 06 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

Attaching the towbar G021488 G021490 G018928 The indicator window must show red. The indicator window must show green. Remove the protective cover by first pressing in the catch and then pulling the cover straight back .

G021489 G000000 06 Insert the towbar until you hear a click. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock. G021487

Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.

299 06 During your journey

Driving with a trailer G021494 G021495

Check that the towbar is secure by pulling Safety cable. Push in the locking wheel and turn it it up, down and back. anticlockwise until you hear a click. WARNING WARNING Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it the correct place. must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT Removing the towbar 06 Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward.

WARNING

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see page 298. unlocked position.

300 06 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

• Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and NOTE powerful side wind. TSA function is switched off if the driver Car with trailer drives on an uneven road • selects Sport mode, see page 170. surface or in a pothole. Sweeping steering wheel movements. • TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses severe Operation steering wheel movements to try to rectify the If snaking has started, it could be difficult or snaking because in such a situation the TSA G018929 even impossible to suppress. This makes the system cannot determine whether it is the car/trailer combination difficult to control and trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking. Push the protective cover until it snaps there is a risk that you could, for example, end tight. The DSTC symbol in the combined up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway. instrument panel flashes when the TSA is working. Trailer Stability Assist - TSA* TSA system continually monitors car movements, particularly lateral movements. If snak- The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist) serves ing is detected, the front wheels are individually to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer begins to snake. combination. This is often enough to help the The TSA function is part of the DSTC system driver regain control of the car. (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see If snaking is not eliminated the first time the 06 page 170. TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer Function combination is braked with all wheels and The snaking phenomenon can occur with any engine power is reduced. Once snaking has car/trailer combination. Normally, snaking been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer occurs at extremely high speeds. But, there is combination is once again stable, the TSA sys- a risk of it occurring at lower speeds tem stops regulating and the driver once again (70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the has full control of the car. load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back. Miscellaneous In order for snaking to occur, there must be a The TSA system can engage within the speed triggering factor, e.g.: interval 60 to 160 km/h.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 301 06 During your journey

Towing and recovery

Towing WARNING order to receive sufficient lubrication. If towing Find out the highest legal speed for towing still has to take place, the route must be as The brake servo and power steering do not short as possible and then with very low speed. before towing the car. work when the engine is switched off. The 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition brake pedal must be pressed about five In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not switch to its end position and then press times harder than normal, and the steering the car is equipped with Powershift transmis- will be considerably heavier than normal. the START/STOP ENGINE button to sion, this can be verified by checking the des- unlock the steering lock so that the car can ignation on the decal number (5) under the be steered, see page 82. Manual gearbox bonnet - see page 362. The designation Prior to towing: "MPS6" means that there is Powershift trans- 2. The remote control key must remain in the mission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic ignition switch while the car is being towed. Move gear lever into neutral and release transmission. the parking brake. 3. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot Automatic gearbox, Geartronic IMPORTANT gently pressed on the brake pedal - Avoid towing. thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking. IMPORTANT • However, the car can be towed for a 4. Be prepared to brake to stop. Note that the car must always be towed with short distance at low speed to move it the wheels rolling forward. from a dangerous position - not further WARNING than 10 km and not faster than Cars with automatic gearbox must not • 10 km/h. Note that the car must always 06 • The steering lock must be unlocked be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or be towed with the wheels rolling for- before towing. further than 80 km. ward. • The remote control key must be in key In the event of moving a longer distance position II. • Prior to towing: than 10 km, the car must be transported • Never remove the remote control key Move the gear selector to position N and with the drive wheels raised from the from the ignition switch while driving or release the parking brake. road - professional recovery is recom- when the car is being towed. mended. Automatic gearbox, Powershift The 2.0T and T5 models with Powershift trans- Prior to towing: mission should not be towed as the transmission is dependent on the engine running in Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

302 06 During your journey

Towing and recovery

Jump starting Screw the towing eye right in up to its Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged using the wheel wrench. and the engine does not start, see page 117. After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place. IMPORTANT Finish by refitting the cover onto the Bump starting the car can damage the cat- bumper. alytic converter. IMPORTANT Towing eye The towing eye is only designed for towing The towing eye is screwed into a threaded on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or socket behind a cover on the right-hand side Take out the towing eye that is located out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. of the bumper, front or rear. under the floor hatch in the cargo area - in some cases it may be hidden under the sill. Attaching the towing eye The cover for the towing eye's attachment NOTE point is available in two variants which On certain cars with towbar fitted the towing must be opened in different ways: eye cannot be attached in the rear bracket. Attach the towrope in the towbar. • Open the variant with a recess using a 06 coin or similar inserted in the recess, For this reason it is advisable to store the turning it outwards. Then turn out the detachable towbar's towball in the car. cover completely and remove it. • The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side/corner at the same time using a coin or similar - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.

303 06 During your journey

Towing and recovery

Recovery Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward. • An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be towed further than 50 km.

304 06 During your journey

305 General ...... 308 Changing wheels ...... 312 Tyre pressure ...... 315 Warning triangle and first-aid kit*...... 316 Emergency puncture repair (TMK)* ...... 317

306 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TYRES 07 Wheels and tyres

General

Driving characteristics Tyres with the greatest tread depth should New tyres Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- always be fitted to the rear of the car (to ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres- decrease the risk of skidding). sure and speed rating are important for how the car performs. NOTE

Direction of rotation Ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions, and also the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.

Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table, see page 375.

Tyre care Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction Tyre age capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. All tyres older than 6 years old should be For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as G021778 checked by an expert even if they seem possible when you replace them. This is espe- The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even cially important with regard to winter tyres. The if they are hardly ever or never used. The func- last four digits in the sequence mean the week Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed tion can therefore be affected. This applies to and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's to only turn in one direction have the direction all tyres that are stored for future use. Exam- DOT marking (Department of Transportation), of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must ples of external signs which indicate that the and this is stated with four digits, for example always rotate in the same direction throughout 07 tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discol- 1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac- its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched oration. tured in week 15 of 2010. between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice Summer and winter tyres versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's When summer and winter wheels are changed braking characteristics and capacity to force the wheels should be marked with which side rain and slush out of the way are adversely of the car they were mounted on, for example affected. L for left and R for right.

308 07 Wheels and tyres

General

Wear and maintenance Tyres with tread wear indicators Only use rims that are tested and approved by The correct tyre pressure results in more even Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso- wear, see page 315. Driving style, tyre pres- ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench. sure, climate and road condition affect how Locking wheel bolts* quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif- Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both alu- ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear minium and steel rims. Under the cargo area patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can floor there is space for the sleeve for the lock- be switched with each other. A suitable disable wheel bolts. tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo Tools workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in G021829 wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth) Tread wear indicators. between tyres have already occurred, the least Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless worn tyres must always be placed on the rear. bands across the width of the tread. On the Understeer is normally easier to correct than side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for- Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down wards in a straight line rather than having the to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos- with the tread wear indicators. Change to new sible complete loss of control over the car. This tyres as soon as possible. Remember that is why it is important for the rear wheels never tyres with little tread depth provide very poor to lose grip before the front wheels. grip in rain and snow. Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging Located under the cargo area floor are the Rims and wheel bolts 07 up - and not standing up. car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*. There is also space for the sleeve for the lock- WARNING IMPORTANT able wheel bolts. The wheel bolts must be tightened to A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control Jack* of the car. 140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts. The jack's thread must always be well greased.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 309 07 Wheels and tyres

General

The original jack should only be used for Winter tyres Using snow chains changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular Snow chains may only be used on the front must always be well greased. dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). Tools - returning into place on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this four wheels. wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

NOTE WARNING Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types lent chains designed for the car model, and are most suitable. tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you Studded tyres consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for damage to your car and lead to an accident.

G029336 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the The tools and jack* must be returned to their studs, a longer service life. IMPORTANT correct places after use. The jack needs to be Only single-sided snow chains are permit- cranked together to the correct position in NOTE ted. Use Volvo genuine snow chains or sim- order to have space. The legal provisions for the use of studded ilar that are properly suited to the car model, tyre size and wheel rim size. In the event of The foam block and spare wheel are replaced tyres vary from country to country. uncertainty Volvo recommends that you in the reverse order to taking out. consult an authorised Volvo workshop. 07 Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam Tread depth block. It must point forwards in the car. Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands Specifications IMPORTANT on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there- The car has whole vehicle approval. This fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres means that certain combinations of wheels and The tools and jack* must be stored in the that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime- tyres are approved. For the permissible com- intended location in the car's cargo area tres. binations, see page 374 when not in use.

310 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tyres

General

Wheel (rim) dimensions 103 Codes for the maximum permitted NOTE Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimen- tyre load, tyre load index (LI) sions, for example: 7Jx16x50. It is the maximum permitted speed that is stated in the table. V Speed rating for maximum permitted 7 Rim width in inches speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 270 km/h). Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres) J Rim flange profile Load index T 190 km/h 16 Rim diameter in Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, inches H 210 km/h a load index (LI). The car's weight determines 50 Off-set in mm (dis- the load capacity required of the tyres. Mini- V 240 km/h tance from wheel mum permitted index is specified in the table, centre to wheel con- see page 374. W 270 km/h tact surface against Speed ratings Y 300 km/h the hub) Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS). Tyre dimensions WARNING The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Tyre speed class must at least correspond with The car must be fitted with tyres which have Example of designation: the car's top speed. Minimum permitted speed the same or a higher load index (LI) and rating is specified in the table, see page 374. speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre 235/60 R18 103 V. with too low a load index or speed rating is The only exception to these conditions is win- used, it may overheat. 235 Tyre width (mm) ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those without), where a lower speed rating may be 60 Ratio between tyre wall height and used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not 07 tyre width (%) be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a R Radial ply maximum of 160 km/h). 18 Rim diameter in inches Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.

311 07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

Removing Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones Set up the warning triangle, see page 316 if a for example. wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The 4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur- covers. Use the removal tool to hook in and face. pull off any full-wheel wheel covers. Alter- 1. Apply the parking brake and engage natively, the wheel covers can be pulled reverse gear, or position P if the car has an away by hand. automatic gearbox.

WARNING Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt. IMPORTANT The towing eye must be screwed into all NOTE threads in the wheel bolt wrench. Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which 6. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlock- is indicated on the jack's label. wise with the wheel wrench. The label also indicates the jack's maximum 5. Screw together the towing eye with the lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting wheel wrench* until the stop position as WARNING height. illustrated below. Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack 07 2. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and and the car's jacking point. removal tool for wheel covers* located under the cargo floor in the cargo area. If 7. There are two jacking points on each side another jack is selected, see page 324. of the car. There is a recess in the plastic 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the cover at each point. Crank the foot of the wheels which will remain on the ground.

312 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

jack down so it is pressed squarely on the 2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts ground. thoroughly. 3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.

Check that the jack sits in the anchorage as illustrated and that the foot is positioned vertically under the anchorage. IMPORTANT

The ground must be firm, smooth and level. IMPORTANT 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is The jack mounting point is the rearmost of important that the wheel bolts are tight- 8. the two rear recesses. ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the torque with a torque wrench. 9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. 5. Refit any full wheel covers. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel. NOTE 07 The wheel cover outlet for the valve must be Installation positioned over the valve on the wheel rim 1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel during fitting. and hub.

313 07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

WARNING IMPORTANT Never crawl under the car when it is raised Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare on the jack. wheel on the car. Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. IMPORTANT Park the car so that passengers have the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between The car must never be driven fitted with them and the road. more than one temporary spare wheel.

The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel Spare wheel* well with the outside down. The same bolt runs The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only through to secure the spare wheel and the intended for use temporarily and must be foam block. The foam block contains all the replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos- tools. sible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is Taking out the spare wheel smaller than the normal wheel. The car's 1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay and forwards. attention to high kerbs and do not machine 2. Undo the retaining screw. wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the 3. Lift out the foam block with its tools. front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on 4. Lift out the spare wheel. the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare 07 wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table, see page 375.

314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

Tyre pressure Fuel economy, ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre pressure is recommended (applies for both full load and light load) in order to obtain optimum fuel economy.

Checking the tyre pressure The tyre pressures must be checked every month. This also applies to the car's spare wheel. Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold

G021830 tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature. After several The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the door pillar (between frame and rear door) pressure increases. shows which pressures the tyres should have Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con- at different loads and speed conditions. This is sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs also specified in the tyre pressure table, see the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre page 375. pressure that is too low could result in the tyres • Tyre pressure for the car's recommended overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres- tyre dimension sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and • ECO pressure1 steering characteristics. • Spare wheel tyre pressure (Temporary 07 Spare) NOTE Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a NOTE natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature. Temperature differences change the tyre pressure.

1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.

315 07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle and first-aid kit*

Warning triangle Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning triangle. Take the warning triangle from the case, fold out and assemble the two loose sides. Fold out the warning triangle's support legs. Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic. Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.

First aid kit*

A case with first aid equipment is located under the floor in the cargo area.

316 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*

General the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency Overview puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage. For connecting the compressor there are 12 V sockets in the centre console and by the rear seat, as well as a 12 V socket in the cargo area*. Choose the electrical socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.

Location of the emergency puncture repair kit Set up the warning triangle if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location. The emergency puncture repair kit is located under the floor in Emergency puncture repair (TMK; Temporary Label, maximum permitted speed the cargo area, see page 316. Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and Switch check and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The WARNING Cable kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing You should not drive faster than 80 km/h fluid bottle must be replaced before its expira- after the emergency tyre repair kit has been Bottle holder (orange cap) used. Volvo recommends that you visit an tion date and after use. Protective cap authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc- the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance Pressure reducing valve tured in the tread. is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if Air hose 07 NOTE it needs to be replaced. Sealing fluid bottle The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in Pressure gauge the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317 07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*

Sealing punctured tyres WARNING WARNING The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the Do not leave children in the car without case of contact with skin, wash away the supervision when the engine is running. fluid with soap and water. 8. Flick the switch to position I. 3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose. WARNING Never stand next to the tyre when the com- NOTE pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness Do not break the bottle's seal before use. arise then the compressor must be The seal is broken automatically when the switched off immediately. The journey bottle is screwed in. should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended. 4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle's stopper. NOTE 5. Screw the bottle into its holder. When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure WARNING drops after approximately 30 seconds.

G014338 Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. 9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes. For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration. IMPORTANT 07 6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw 1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture in the air hose valve connection to the bot- Risk of overheating. The compressor must repair kit. tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. not run for more than 10 minutes. 2. Detach the label for maximum permitted 7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and speed and affix it to the steering wheel. start the car. 10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum

318 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*

pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. tyre pressure table, see page 375 (1 WARNING (Release air with the pressure reducing bar=100 kPa). Release air using the valve if the tyre pressure is too high.) pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres- You should not drive faster than 80 km/h sure is too high. after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an WARNING authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of WARNING If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance in the tyre is too big. The journey should not Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped is 200 km). The staff there can determine be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if centre is recommended. it needs to be replaced. 3. Make sure the compressor is switched off. 11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the Inflating the tyres cable from the 12 V socket. dust cap. The car's original tyres can be inflated by the 12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit compressor. NOTE the valve cap. 1. The compressor must be switched off. 13. As soon as possible, drive approximately The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must Make sure that the switch is in position 0 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so be replaced after use. Volvo recommends and locate the cable and air hose. that this replacement is performed by an that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre. authorised Volvo workshop. 2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw Rechecking the repair and pressure in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. 1. Reconnect the equipment. WARNING 2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure Check the tyre pressure regularly. WARNING gauge. Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in 07 • If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is Volvo recommends that you drive to the near- danger to life. Never leave the engine run- insufficiently sealed. The journey should est authorised Volvo workshop for the replace- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- not be continued. Contact a tyre centre. ment/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the ficient ventilation. • If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid. bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 319 07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair (TMK)*

WARNING Replacing the sealing fluid canister Replace the bottle when the expiration date Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running. has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V WARNING sockets and start the car. The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch rubber-latex. to position I. Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact. IMPORTANT Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes. Store out of the reach of children.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table, see page 375. (Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.) 6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable. 7. Refit the dust cap. 07

320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tyres

321 Engine compartment...... 324 Lamps...... 331 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 337 Battery...... 339 Fuses...... 344 Car care...... 355

322 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE 08 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

General WARNING If the car is raised with a workshop jack; position the jack against the front edge on the Volvo service programme Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start engine's subframe. To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- automatically some time after the engine ble, follow the Volvo service programme as has been switched off. Do not damage the splashguard under the specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Always have the engine cleaned by a work- engine. Ensure that the workshop jack is posi- Volvo recommends engaging an authorised shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is tioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Volvo workshop to perform the service and hot. Always use axle stands or similar. maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop personnel, special tools and service literature Raising the car lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are to guarantee the highest quality of service. fixed under the lifting points. See preceding NOTE illustration. IMPORTANT Volvo recommends only using the jack that For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and belongs to the car model in question. If a Opening and closing the bonnet follow the instructions in the Service and jack is selected other than the one recom- Warranty Booklet. mended by Volvo, follow the instructions for use supplied with the equipment Check regularly Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling: • Coolant • Engine oil • Power steering fluid • Washer fluid

324 08 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

Engine compartment, overview Filling washer fluid Air filter

WARNING High voltage from the ignition system. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The remote control key must always G031911 be in 0 position when work is being done in the engine compartment, see page 82. Pull the handle by the pedals. An information symbol lights when the bonnet is open, Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil see page 76. when the remote control key is in II position or when the engine is hot. Move the catch to the left and open the The appearance of the engine compartment may bonnet. (The catch hook is located vary depending on engine variant. between the headlamp and grille, see illus- Coolant expansion tank Checking the engine oil tration.) Power steering fluid reservoir

WARNING Engine oil dipstick1 Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed. Radiator Filler opening for engine oil Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive) Battery Relay and fuse box, engine compartment 08 Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).

325 08 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

When driving under adverse conditions, see centre of the instrument unit as well as by dis- Checking the oil level in a new car is especially page 368. play texts. Certain models have both variants. important before the first scheduled oil change. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information. IMPORTANT Volvo recommends checking the oil level every Change the engine oil in accordance with the 2 500 km. The most accurate measurements In order to fulfil the requirements for the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty are made on a cold engine before starting. The engine's service intervals all engines are Booklet. measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme- filled with a specially adapted synthetic diately after the engine is switched off. The engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil Using oil of a higher than specified grade is dipstick will indicate that the level is too low has been made very carefully with regard to permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con- because the oil has not had time to flow down service life, starting characteristics, fuel ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a into the oil sump. consumption and environmental impact. higher grade than that specified on the decal, An approved engine oil must be used in see page 368. order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed For capacities, see page 369 and onwards. grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, Engine with oil dipstick2 starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used. Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-

ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. G021737 The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX Volvo uses different systems for warning of marks. low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer- Measurement and filling if required tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and G021734 1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other Dipstick and filler pipe. off the engine it is important to wait variants have an oil level sensor, and then the 08 driver is informed via the warning symbol in the

2 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.

326 08 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back Engine with electronic oil level sensor3 to the sump. 2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick. 3. Re-insert the dipstick. 4. Pull it out and check the level. 5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres should be added. If the level is significantly below, then an additional amount is required. 6. If required, check the level again, do it after driving a short distance. Then repeat steps Message and graph in the display. 1 - 4. Filler pipe.4 Message You do not need to take action with respect to Engine oil level WARNING the engine oil level before a message is shown Never fill above the MAX mark. The level in the display, see the illustration below. should never be above MAX or below MIN WARNING as this could lead to engine damage. If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may WARNING be too high. Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire. IMPORTANT In the event of the message Engine oil level Fill with 0.5 l oil, only fill with 0.5 litres.

3 Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel. 4 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).

327 08 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

NOTE > You will then see information displayed Coolant about the engine oil level. The oil level is only detected by the system Checking the level and topping up during driving. The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct.

WARNING Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) appears as shown in the illustration below. The level must never be above MAX or below MIN, as this could lead to engine damage. The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom- When topping up the coolant, follow the mended filling level is 4. WARNING instructions on the packaging. It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold water is correct for the prevailing weather con- due to the risk of fire. ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too Measuring the oil level much coolant concentrate. If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the WARNING sequence below. Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant 1. Activate key position II, see page 82. requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- 2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand sion tank cap slowly to gently release the 08 stalk switch to position Engine oil level overpressure. Wait....

328 08 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

For capacities and for standards regarding IMPORTANT Brake and clutch fluid water quality, see page 370. • A high content of chlorine, chlorides Checking the level Check the coolant regularly and other salts may cause corrosion in Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- The level must lie between the MIN and MAX the cooling system. voir. The level must be between the MIN and marks on the expansion tank. If the system is • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir. not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could agent as recommended by Volvo. Check the level regularly. occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine. • Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% Change the brake fluid every other year or at water and 50% coolant. every other regular service. • Mix the coolant with approved quality For capacities and recommended fluid grade, tap water. In the event of any doubt see page 370. The fluid should be changed about water quality, used ready-mixed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- hard, frequent braking, such as driving in ommendations. mountains or tropical climates with high • When changing coolant/replacing cool- humidity. ing system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality WARNING tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant. If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the The engine must only be run with a well- brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further • before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo rec- filled cooling system. High tempera- ommends that the reason for the loss of tures may occur, causing a risk of dam- brake fluid is investigated by an authorised age (cracks) to the cylinder head. Volvo workshop.

329 08 Maintenance and service

Engine compartment

Filling Power steering fluid

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side. The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover IMPORTANT over the cold zone in the engine compartment. Keep the area around the power steering The round cover must be removed first before fluid reservoir clean when checking. The the reservoir cap can be reached. cover must not be opened. 1. Turn and open the cover located on the covering. Check the level frequently. The fluid does not 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. require changing. The fluid level must be The level must be between the MIN and between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci- MAX marks, which are located on the ties and recommended fluid grade, see inside of the reservoir. page 370.

IMPORTANT NOTE Do not forget to refit the cap. If a fault should arise in the power steering 08 system or if the engine is switched off and the car must be towed, it can still be steered.

330 08 Maintenance and service

Lamps

General IMPORTANT WARNING All bulbs are specified, see page 336. The fol- Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with The remote control key must not be turned lowing list contains locations of bulbs and your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin- to key position I or II during bulb replace- other light sources that are specialised or gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the ment. unsuitable for changing except at a workshop: reflector and then causing damage. See the section "Key positions" - for a • Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon description of the remote control key's 3 key lamps) positions. Headlamps front • Direction indicators, door mirrors • Approach lighting, door mirrors Removing the headlamp 1. If the remote control key is turned into key • Courtesy lighting position I or II, see page 82: • Glovebox lighting • Briefly press the START/STOP General interior lighting in the roof • ENGINE button to reach key position • Reading lamps 0. • Side position, position lamps rear 2. (Upper illustration) • Brake light, Rear fog lamp, Reversing lamp Pull out the headlamp's locking pins. • LED lights, general Pull the headlamp straight forward. WARNING On cars with Xenon headlamps, the IMPORTANT replacement of Xenon lamps must be car- Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo nector. workshop is recommended. Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped with a 3. (Lower illustration) high voltage unit. All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the Detach the headlamp connector by 08 engine compartment. Loosen and remove the pressing down the clip with your thumb. whole headlamp.

331 08 Maintenance and service

Lamps

At the same time, guide out the con- switched on or the remote control key is Dipped beam, halogen nector with your other hand. inserted into the ignition switch. 4. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. Removing the cover 5. Replace the bulb in question.

Securing the headlamp

1. Detach the headlamp, see page 331. 2. Remove the cover. 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 331. 4. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder downwards. 1. Release the catches by pressing out. When securing, check that the long lock pin is 5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it 2. Remove the cover by pulling it straight out. engaged - it should be engaged in both eyes. in. It can be secured in one position. Reinstall the cover in reverse order. 1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound Reinstall the parts in reverse order. should be heard. 2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins. Check that they are correctly inserted. 3. Check the lighting. 08 The headlamp must be mounted and the connector correctly installed before the lighting is

332 08 Maintenance and service

Lamps

Main beam, Halogen Extra main beam, ABL headlamps* Direction indicators/flashers

1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the headlamp. 2. Remove the cover, see page 332 2. Remove the cover, see page 332. 2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anticlockwise. 3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. and then pulling straight out 3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the 4. Detach the bulb holder by pulling it straight bulb. 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. out. 4. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in 5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket 5. Replace the bulb and fit the new one in the and turning anticlockwise. and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It socket. It can only be secured in one posi- can be secured in one position. tion. 5. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise. Reinstall the parts in reverse order. Reinstall the parts in reverse order. 6. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 333 08 Maintenance and service

Lamps

Side marker lamps Rear fog lamp Location of rear bulbs

Lamp lens, right-hand side Before starting to replace a bulb, see The rear fog lamp is accessed behind the page 331. bumper Position (LED)/side marker lamps 1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti- Side reflector, rear clockwise. 2. Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and Brake light remove it. 2. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning the bulb anticlockwise. Reversing lamp 3. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one. It can only be installed in one way. 3. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clock- Indicator wise. 4. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and turn Brake light (LED) clockwise. 4. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

334 08 Maintenance and service

Lamps

Brake light and reversing lamp Number plate lighting Lighting, cargo area G031942

Both the brake light and the reversing lamp 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so bulbs are replaced from inside the cargo area. that the lamp housing comes loose. 2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing 1. Open the panel. and withdraw it. 2. Replace the bulb. 2. Detach the bulb holder by turning anti- 3. Replace the bulb. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press clockwise. back the lamp housing. 4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it 3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in into place. and turning anticlockwise. 4. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise. 5. Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.

335 08 Maintenance and service

Lamps

Vanity mirror lighting 2. Then press the three lower lugs back into Lighting WA Type position. Removing the mirror glass Cargo area 10 Socket SV8.5 Specification, bulbs lighting Length 43 mm Lighting WA Type Number plate 5 C5W LL lighting Dipped beam, 55 H7 LL halogen Brake light 21 P21W LL

Main beam, 65 H9 Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL Halogen Rear fog lamp 21 P21W LL

Extra main 65 H9 A Watt beam, ABL

Front direction 21 PY21W LL 1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower indicators edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the lug on the edge. Side marker 3 W3WLL 2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge lamps front on the left and right-hand sides (by the Direction indi- 5 WY5W LL black rubber sections), and prize carefully cators side, so that the mirror glass comes loose in the door mirrors lower edge. 3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire Courtesy light- 3 T10 Socket mirror glass and cover. ing front W2.1x9.5d 4. Replace the bulb. Glovebox light- 5 Socket SV8.5 ing Length 43 mm 08 Securing the mirror glass 1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mir- Vanity mirror 1.2 Socket SV5.5 ror glass back into position. lighting Length 35 mm

336 08 Maintenance and service

Wiper blades and washer fluid

Wiper blades Replacing the wiper blades Lift up the wiper arm. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and Service position pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm. Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard. Check that the blade is firmly installed.

In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they must be in service position. G021763 1. Turn the remote control key to key position 0, see page 82, and keep the remote control key in the ignition switch. NOTE 2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for The wiper blades are different lengths. The about 1 second. The wipers then move to blade on the driver's side is longer than the standing straight up. blade on the passenger side.

The wipers return to the starting position when the car is started. 08

337 08 Maintenance and service

Wiper blades and washer fluid

Replacing the wiper blades, rear window IMPORTANT Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.

Filling washer fluid G032770

1. Fold out the wiper arm. 2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow). 3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end position against the wiper arm as a lever to detach the blade more easily. The windscreen and headlamp washers share 4. Press the new wiper blade into position. a common reservoir. Check that it is firmly installed. 5. Lower the wiper arm. IMPORTANT Add washer antifreeze during the winter so Cleaning that the fluid does not freeze in the pump, For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see reservoir and hoses. page 355 and onwards. 08 For capacities, see page 370.

338 08 Maintenance and service

Battery

Operation NOTE IMPORTANT The service life and function of the battery is The life of the battery is shortened if it If the following instruction is not observed influenced by factors such as the number of becomes discharged repeatedly. then the energy saving function for infotain- starts, discharging, driving style, driving con- ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/ The life of the battery is affected by several ditions, climatic conditions etc. or the message in the information display factors, including driving conditions and cli- about the main battery's state of charge Never disconnect the battery when the mate. Battery starting capacity decreases • may be temporarily inapplicable, following gradually with time and therefore needs to engine is running. the connection of an external battery or bat- be recharged if the car is not used for a Check that the cables to the battery are tery charger: • longer time or when it is only driven short correctly connected and properly tight- distances. Extreme cold further limits star- • The negative battery terminal on the ened. ting capacity. car's main battery must never be used To maintain the battery in good condition, at for connecting an external battery or WARNING least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- battery charger - only the car chassis • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen mended or that the battery is connected to may be used as the grounding point. gas, which is highly explosive. A spark a battery charger with automatic trickle See the section "Start assistance" - for a can be formed if a jump lead is con- charging. description of how the cable clamps must nected incorrectly, and this can be A battery that is kept fully charged has a be attached. enough for the battery to explode. maximum service life. • The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. IMPORTANT If sulphuric acid comes into contact • Never use a quick charger to charge the with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with battery. large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.

339 08 Maintenance and service

Battery

Symbols on the battery Avoid sparks and naked Replacing the main battery flames. Use protective goggles. Removal First of all: Take the remote control key from the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes before any electrical connections are touched - this is because the car's electrical system Risk of explosion. needs to store the necessary information to Further information in the control modules. owner's manual.

Must be taken for recy- Store the battery out of cling. the reach of children.

The battery contains cor- NOTE rosive acid. An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally responsible manner - it contains lead.

340 08 Maintenance and service

Battery

Release the rubber moulding so that the Fitting rear cover is free. Remove the rear cover by screwing one quarter turn and lifting it away.

WARNING Connect and remove the positive and negative cables in the correct order.

1. Lower the battery into the battery box. Detach the black negative cable. 2. Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box. Detach the red positive cable. 3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery. Detach the ventilation hose from the battery. 4. Connect the ventilation hose. > Check that it is correctly connected to Loosen the screw holding the battery both battery and outlet in the body. clamp. 5. Connect the red positive cable. Move the battery to the side and lift it up. 6. Connect the black negative cable. 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal). 8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See Removal). 9. Align the front cover and secure it with the clips. (See removal).

For more information on the car's main battery 08 Open the clips on the front cover and - see page 376 remove the cover.

341 08 Maintenance and service

Battery

Eco Start/Stop DRIVe* NOTE Location of the batteries Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped The higher the current take-off in the car with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful • (extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more battery for starting and one standby battery the batteries must be charged = that helps during the Eco Start/Stop DRIVe increased fuel consumption. function's starting sequence. • When the capacity of the battery has For more information on Start/Stop - see fallen below the lowest permissible level page 124. then the Start/Stop function is disen- For more information on the car's main battery gaged. - see page 117 and 376. Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due Battery Start SupportA to high current take-off means: • The engine auto-starts1 without the driver A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car. 1. Cold start 760 120 Battery for starting2 2. Support battery. capacityB, depressing the clutch pedal. CCA (A) The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal battery that is used for SizeC, 278×175×19 150×90×106 starting. A workshop should be contacted in L×W×H 0 the event of questions or problems - an author- (mm) ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Capacity 70 8 (Ah)

A The values do not apply to the standby battery in cars with D3 engine and automatic gearbox. B In accordance with the SAE standard. C Largest possible size.

1 Auto-start can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position. 2 The battery for starting is described in detail on page 340.

342 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and service

Battery

IMPORTANT NOTE If the following instruction is not observed If the battery has become so discharged then the Start/Stop function may temporar- that everything is "black" and in principle ily cease to work after the connection of an the car does not have all the normal electri- external battery or battery charger: cal functions and the engine is subsequently started using an external battery or battery • The negative battery terminal on the charger, then the Start/Stop function will be car's main battery must never be used activated. It will then be possible for the for connecting an external battery or engine to be auto-stopped but in the event battery charger - only the car chassis of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may may be used as the grounding point. fail to auto-start the engine due to inade- See the section "Start assistance" - for a quate capacity in the battery. description of how the cable clamps must The battery must first be charged in order to be attached. ensure a successful auto-start after an auto- stop. At an outside temperature of +15 °C the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a charging time of 3-4 hours is recommended. The recommendation is that the battery is charged using an external battery charger. If this is not possible then the recommendation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been adequately recharged. For more information about recharging the battery, see the section "Battery" in the chapter "Maintenance and service".

343 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

General Location, fuse boxes All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.

Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse. Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand 2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central to see whether the curved wire has blown. electrical units under the glovebox change sides. 3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage. Engine compartment Under the glovebox WARNING , Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an Cargo area amperage higher than that specified when Engine compartment cold zone (only replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- Start/Stop*) cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

344 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

Engine compartment

345 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

General fuses, engine compartment Function A Function A On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal Primary fuse for the central elec- 50 Parking heater* 25 and fitting of fuses. tronic module (CEM) with fuse box B under the gloveboxA Ventilation fanA 40 Positions (see preceding illustration) Engine compartment, upper Primary fuse for the central elec- 50 - - tronic module (CEM) with fuse Engine compartment, front box B under the glovebox ABS pump 40 Engine compartment, lower Primary fuse for central electri- 60 ABS valves 20 These fuses are all located in the engine com- cal unit in cargo areaA partment box. The fuses in (C) are located - - Primary fuse for central electri- 60 under (A). cal unit in passenger compart- Headlamp levelling*, Active 10 On the inside of the cover is a label that shows ment with fuse box A under the Xenon headlamps - ABL* the location of the fuses. gloveboxA Primary fuse for the central elec- 20 Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse" • Primary fuse for central electri- 60 type and must only be replaced by a work- tronic module (CEM) with fuse cal unit in passenger compart- box B under the glovebox shop1. ment with fuse box A under the • Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type gloveboxA ABS 5 and should be replaced by a workshop1. • Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini - - Speed related power steering* 5 Fuse" type. PTC element, air preheater*A 100 Engine control module, Trans- 10 mission control module, Air- Headlamp washers* 20 bags

Windscreen wipers 30 Heated washer nozzles* 10 08

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

346 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

Function A Function A Function A Relay coil, relay, vacuum pump 5 Relay coil, relay, compressor A/ 5 Compressor A/C (5, 6-cyl.), 10 (5-cyl. petrol) C (not 5-cyl. diesel), Relay coil, Engine valves, Engine control relay, coolant pump (5-cyl. die- module (6-cyl.) Solenoids (6-cyl. Headlamp control 5 sel Start/Stop) without turbo), Actuator motors, intake manifold (6-cyl. without Relay coils in central electrical - - turbo), Mass air flow sensor (4- unit in engine compartment cold cyl. 2.0 l petrol), Oil level sensor - - zone Start/Stop (5-cyl. diesel) Actuator solenoid, starter 30 - - Lambda-sonds (4-cyl. petrol), 10 motorA Lambda-sond (diesel), Control Internal relay coils 5 Ignition coils (4-cyl. petrol), 10 module, radiator roller cover (manual 5-cyl. 2.0 l diesel) Auxiliary lamps* 20 Glow control module (5-cyl. diesel) EVAP valve (5, 6-cyl. petrol), 15 Horn 15 Ignition coils (5, 6-cyl. petrol), 20 Lambda-sonds (5, 6-cyl. petrol) Relay coil, main relay, engine 10 Capacitor (6-cyl.) Vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol), 20 management system, Engine Engine control module (petrol) 10 control module (5, 6-cyl. petrol) Crankcase ventilation heater (5- Engine control module (diesel) 15 cyl. petrol), Diesel filter heater Transmission control module 15 Crankcase ventilation heater (5- 10 Compressor A/C (not 5-cyl. die- 15 Mass air flow sensor (5, 6-cyl.), 15 cyl. diesel) sel), Coolant pump (5-cyl. diesel Control valves (5-cyl. diesel), Start/Stop) Injectors (5, 6-cyl. petrol), Glow plugs (diesel) 70 Engine control module (6-cyl.)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 347 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

Function A Cooling fan (4-cyl., 5-cyl. petrol) 60

Cooling fan (6-cyl. petrol, 5-cyl. 80 diesel)

Electro-hydraulic power steer- 100 ing

A For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is empty - see instead page 353.

348 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

Under the glovebox

Positions Box A Function A Box A Function A On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses in fuse box A. - - Control panel, rear passen- 20 ger door, right - - Box A Function A Control panel, rear passen- 20 Primary fuse for audio con- 40 - - ger door, left trol module*, Primary fuse Keyless* 20 for fuses 16 - 20 12 V socket, cargo area* 15

- - Control panel, driver's door 20 Power seat driver's side* 20

- - Control panel, front passen- 20 Power seat passenger side* 20 08 ger door

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 349 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

Box A Function A Box A Function A Box B Function A Folding head restraint* 15 Parking assistance*, Park- 5 Central locking system, fuel 10 ing camera*, Towbar control filler flap Infotainment control module 5 module * Rear window washer 15 Audio control module* 10 AWD control module* 10 Windscreen washers 15 Digital radio*, TV* Active chassis Four-C* 10 Unlocking, tailgate 10 Audio 15 - - Telematics*, Bluetooth* 5 Box B Function A Rear window wiper 15 Fuel pump 20 Rear Seat Entertainment 7.5 (RSE)* - - Movement detector alarm* 5 Sun roof*, Interior lighting 5 Interior lighting, Driver's 7.5 Climate panel roof, Climate sensor door control panel, power Steering lock 15 12 V socket, tunnel console 15 windows, Power seats, front*, Remote controlled Siren alarm*, Data link con- 5 Seat heating, rear right* 15 garage door opener* nector OBDII

Seat heating, rear left* 15 Information display (DIM) 5 - -

- - Adaptive cruise control, 10 Airbags 10 ACC*, collision warning sys- Seat heating (passenger 15 tem* Collision warning system 5 side) Interior lighting, Rain sensor 7.5 Accelerator pedal, PTC ele- 7.5 08 Seat heating (driver's side) 15 ment air preheater*, Dim- Steering wheel module 7.5 ming, interior rearview mirror*, Seat heating, rear*

350 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

Box B Function A - -

Brake light 5

Sunroof* 20

Immobiliser 5

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 351 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

Cargo area

The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.

Positions Function A Function A Function A Power operated tailgate* 20 - - Electric parking brake, left 30 - - - - Electric parking brake, right 30 - - Trailer socket 1* 40 Rear window defroster 30 - - - - Trailer socket 2* 15 08

352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

Engine compartment, cold zone - Start/Stop*

Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function. • Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse" Positions Function A type and must only be replaced by a work- Function A shop2. Main fuse for central electronic 175 • Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and Main fuse for central electrical 175 module (CEM) with fuse box B must only be replaced by a workshop2. unit in the engine compartment under the glovebox, central electrical unit in passenger • Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type. compartment with fuse box A For more information on Start/Stop - see under the glovebox, central page 124. electrical unit in cargo area

PTC element, air preheater* 100 08

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 353 08 Maintenance and service

Fuses

Function A Function A Primary fuse for the central elec- 50 Support battery 70 tronic module (CEM) with fuse box B under the glovebox Central electronic module 15 (CEM) (Reference voltage Primary fuse for central electri- 60 standby battery) cal unit in passenger compartment with fuse box A under the glovebox

Primary fuse for central electri- 60 cal unit in passenger compartment with fuse box A under the glovebox

Primary fuse for central electri- 60 cal unit in cargo area

Ventilation fan 40

- -

Actuator solenoid, starter motor 30

Internal diode 50

354 08 Maintenance and service

Car care

Washing the car IMPORTANT Automatic car washes Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. An automatic car wash is a simple and quick Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- way of washing the car, but it cannot reach Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for Use car shampoo. example. everywhere. Handwashing the car is recommended for achieving optimum results. • Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings con- NOTE tain chemicals that affect and discolour NOTE paintwork very quickly. An authorised Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog During the first few months a new car must Volvo workshop is recommended for the lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have only be handwashed. This is because the removal of any discoloration. condensation on the inside of the lens. This paintwork is more sensitive when it is new. is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to • Hose down the underbody. withstand this. Condensation is normally • Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. vented out of the lamp housing when the High-pressure washing Do not spray directly onto the locks. lamp has been switched on for a time. When using high-pressure washing, use • Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and sweeping movements and make sure that the plenty of lukewarm water. Cleaning the wiper blades nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, • exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the soap solution or car shampoo. as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades. locks. • Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. For cleaning: Testing the brakes • Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or Set the wiper blades in service position, a water scraper. see page 337. WARNING Always test the brakes after washing the WARNING NOTE car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack Always have the engine cleaned by a work- Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- the brake linings and reduce braking per- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car formance. hot. shampoo. 08 Do not use any strong solvents. Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction causes the brake lin-

355 08 Maintenance and service

Car care

ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing Polishing and waxing Water-repellent coating* after starting in very damp or cold weather. Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull Never use products such as car wax, or to give the paintwork extra protection. degreaser or similar on glass surfa- Exterior plastic, rubber and trim ces as this could ruin their water-repellent The car does not need to be polished until it is components properties. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo at least one year old. However, the car can be dealers is recommended for the cleaning and waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax Take care when cleaning so as not to damage care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim the car in direct sunlight. the glass surface. components, such as glossy trim mouldings. Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you To avoid damaging glass surfaces when When using such a cleaning agent the instruc- begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers. tions must be followed carefully. and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. There is natural wear of the water-repellent More stubborn stains can be removed using coating. IMPORTANT fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork. Treatment with a special finishing agent avail- Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq- able from Volvo dealers is recommended in rubber. uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the order to maintain the water-repellent proper- packaging carefully. Many preparations con- When using degreasant on plastic and rub- ties. This should be used first after three years ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- tain both polish and wax. and then each year. essary. Use a soft washing sponge. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear IMPORTANT away or damage the glossy surface layer. Rustproofing – inspection and Only paint treatment recommended by maintenance Polishing agent that contains abrasive must Volvo should be used. Other treatment such not be used. as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre The car received a thorough and complete sealing or similar could damage the paint- rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body work. Paintwork damage caused by such are made of galvanised sheet metal. The Rims treatments is not covered by Volvo war- underbody is protected by a wear-resistant Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by ranty. anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating Volvo. rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the exposed members, cavities, closed sections 08 surface and cause stains on chrome-plated and side doors. aluminium rims.

356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Maintenance and service

Car care

Under normal conditions the rustproofing does WARNING regular cleaning is required in order to maintain not require treatment for approximately 12 both characteristics and appearance. Volvo years. After this period, it should be treated at Before setting off check that the inlaid mat offers a comprehensive product for the clean- three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that in the driver area is firmly affixed and ing and treatment of leather upholstery which, secured in the pins in order to avoid getting you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for caught adjacent to and under the pedals. when used in accordance with the instructions, assistance if the car needs further treatment. preserves the leather's protective coating. After a period of use the natural appearance of Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is A special textile cleaner is recommended for the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend- important to keep the car clean. The car's rust- stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor ing more or less on the surface texture of the proofing needs to be checked regularly and mats should be cleaned with agents recom- leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather touched-up if necessary in order for it to be mended by your Volvo dealer! and shows that it is a natural product. maintained. Stains on fabric upholstery and roof To achieve best results Volvo recommends Cleaning the interior upholstery cleaning and the application of protective A special fabric cleaning agent, available from cream once to four times per year (or more if Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail- ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of able from your Volvo dealer. and follow the instructions included with the the upholstery. car care product. IMPORTANT Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning IMPORTANT agents. • Certain items of coloured clothing (for Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the example, jeans and suede garments) Carpets and cargo area fabric upholstery. may stain the upholstery. Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of • Never use strong solvents. Such prod- the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a Treating stains on leather upholstery ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free leather upholstery. Each inlay mat is secured with pins. and is treated to preserve its original appearance. Washing instructions for leather Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- upholstery lift the mat straight up. 08 tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at processed so that it retains its natural charac- sponge and squeeze out a strong foam. each pin. teristics. It is given a protective coating, but

357 08 Maintenance and service

Car care

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular If the steering wheel has stains: Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry movements. before allowing it to retract. Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and 3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the blood) stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the Touching up minor paintwork damage Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5% stain. Do not rub. ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a Paint is an important part of the car's rust- 4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.) proofing and should therefore be checked reg- allow the leather to dry completely. ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate) paintwork should be rectified immediately. The Protective treatment of leather 1. Same procedure as group I. most common types of paintwork damage are upholstery stone chips, scratches, and marks on the 1. Pour a small amount of the protective 2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth. edges of wings and doors. cream on the felted cloth and massage in Group 3 (dry dirt, dust) a thin layer of cream with gentle circular Materials movements on the leather. 1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt. • primer in a can 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes 2. Same procedure as group I. • spray can or touch-up pen1 before use. Treating stains on interior plastic, metal • masking tape The leather has now been given improved pro- and wood parts tection against stains and improved UV pro- A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly tection. moistened with water, available from Volvo Washing instructions for the leather dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior steering wheel parts and surfaces. • Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois- Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong tened sponge and neutral soap. stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail- • Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the able from Volvo dealers can be used for more leather steering wheel with protective plas- difficult cleaning. tic. Cleaning seatbelts Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care 08 • Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special agents are recommended for best results. textile cleaning agent is available from your

1 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen.

358 08 Maintenance and service

Car care

Colour code Before work is begun, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C. 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint. 2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a brush once the primer is dry. 3. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork. 4. After a few days, polish the touched-up Car colour code areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount It is important that the correct colour is used. of lapping paste. For product decal location, see page 362. NOTE Repairing stone chips If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged colour coat, you can paint straight after cleaning the damaged surface.

08 G021832

359 Type designations...... 362 Dimensions and weights...... 364 Engine specifications...... 367 Engine oil...... 368 Fluids and lubricants...... 370 Fuel...... 372 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ...... 374 Electrical system...... 376 Type approval...... 377 Symbols in the display...... 389

360 SPECIFICATIONS 09 Specifications

09 Type designations

Label location

362 09 Specifications

Type designations 09

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle NOTE identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer The labels shown in the owner's manual are regarding the car and when ordering spare not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show parts and accessories. their approximate appearance and location Type designation, vehicle identification in the car. The information that applies to number, maximum permissible weights, your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car. codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number. The label is visible when the right rear door is opened. Label for parking heater. Engine code, component and serial numbers. Label for engine oil. Gearbox type designation and serial number. Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle Identification Number) Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

363 09 Specifications

09 Dimensions and weights

Dimensions

Dimensions mm Dimensions mm Weights Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank A Wheelbase 2774 H Rear track 1586 90% full and all fluids. B Length 4627 I Load width, floor 1090 The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see C Load length, floor, folded rear J Width 1891 table page 365) influences the payload and is seat 1789 not included in the kerb weight. K Width including door mirrors 2120 D Load length, floor 972 Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight - L Width including folded-in door Kerb weight. E Height 1713 mirrors 1891

F Load height 802

G Front track 1632

364 09 Specifications

Dimensions and weights 09

NOTE Towing capacity and towball load The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with- NOTE out extra equipment or accessories. This The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing means that for every accessory added the bracket is recommended for trailers heavier loading capacity of the car is reduced cor- than 1800 kg. respondingly by the weight of the accessory. Examples of accessories that reduce loading capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, For information on decal location, see page 362. GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car- pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc. Max. gross vehicle weight Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- Max. train weight (car+trailer) taining the kerb weight of your own particular car. Max. front axle load Max. rear axle load WARNING Equipment level The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and Max. load: See registration document. how the load is distributed. Max. roof load: 100 kg.

365 09 Specifications

09 Dimensions and weights

Engine Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg) All All 0–1200 50

2.0T Automatic, MPS6 1800 90 (Certain markets)

T5 Automatic, MPS6 1800 90

3.2 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 1800 90

T6 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

DRIVe Manual, M66 1600 75

D3 Automatic, TF-80SC 1600 75

D3 AWD Manual, M66 1800 90

D3 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

D5 AWD Manual, M66 1800 90

D5 AWD Automatic, TF-80SC 2000 90

Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg) 750 50

366 09 Specifications

Engine specifications 09

Engine specifications

NOTE Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine Engine Output Output Torque (Nm/ No. of Bore Stroke Swept Com- codeA (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) rpm) cylin- (mm) (mm) volume pression ders (litres) ratio

2.0TB B4204T6 149/6000 203/6000 300/1750–4000 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.0:1

T5 B4204T7 177/5500 240/5500 320/1800-5000 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.0:1

T6 B6304T4 224/5600 304/5600 440/2100–4200 6 82.0 93.2 2.953 9.3:1

3.2 B6324S5 179/6400 243/6400 320/3200 6 84 96 3.192 10.8:1

D3 / DRIVe D5204T3 120/3500 163/3500 400/1500-2750 5 81.0 77 1.984 16.5:1

D3 AWD D5244T17 120/4000 163/4000 420/1500–2500 5 81.0 93.15 2.400 16.5:1

D5 AWD D5244T11C 158/4000 215/4000 420/1500–3250 5 81.0 93.2 2.400 16.5:1

D5 AWD D5244T15D 158/4000 215/4000 440/1500-3000 5 81.0 93.2 2.400 16.5:1

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 362. B Certain markets C Manual gearbox D Automatic gearbox

367 09 Specifications

09 Engine oil

Adverse driving conditions The above also apply to shorter driving dis- IMPORTANT Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- tances at low temperatures. In order to fulfil the requirements for the mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse engine's service intervals all engines are Below are some examples of adverse driving driving conditions. It provides extra protection filled with a specially adapted synthetic conditions. for the engine. engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to Check the oil level more frequently for long Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. service life, starting characteristics, fuel journeys: consumption and environmental impact. • towing a caravan or trailer An approved engine oil must be used in • in mountainous regions order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed • at high speeds grade of oil for both filling and oil change, • in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot- otherwise you will risk affecting service life, ter than +40 °C starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used. Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

368 09 Specifications

Engine oil 09

Engine oil grade

Engine Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter (litres) T6 B6304T4 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 approx 6.8

3.2 B6324S5 Viscosity: SAE 0W–30 approx 6.8

D3 / DRIVe D5204T3 approx. 5.9

D3 AWD D5244T17 approx. 5.9

D5 D5244T11A approx. 5.9

D5 D5244T15B approx. 5.9

2.0TC B4204T6 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 approx. 5.4 Viscosity: SAE 5W–30 T5 B4204T7 approx. 5.4 When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

A Manual gearbox. B Automatic gearbox. C Certain markets.

For filling engine oil, see page 325.

369 09 Specifications

09 Fluids and lubricants

Other fluids and lubricants Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid M66 1.9 BOT 350M3

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid MPS6 7.3 BOT 341

TF-80SC 7.0 AW1

Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade Coolant T6, 3.2, D3, D5, DRIVe 8.9 Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% waterA, see the packaging. 2.0T, T5 10.5

Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steering fluid Power steering – WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid Cars with headlamp 6.5 Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water. washing

Cars without headlamp 4.5 washing

Fuel Petrol engine approx. 70 Petrol, see page 288

Diesel engine approx. 70 Diesel, see page 289

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.

370 09 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants 09

NOTE Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, this may be necessary under adverse driving conditions, see page 370.

371 09 Specifications

09 Fuel

CO2 emissions and fuel consumption A B C

T5 262 11.3 161 6.9 198 8.5

T6 AWD 354 15.2 188 8.1 249 10.7

3.2 AWD 322 13.8 176 7.6 229 9.9

DRIVe 182 6.9 129 4.9 149 5.7

D3 229 8.7 148 5.6 178 6.8

D3 AWD 172 6.5 135 5.1 149 5.7

D3 AWD 233 8.9 148 5.6 179 6.8

D5 AWD 172 6.5 135 5.1 149 5.7

D5 AWD 233 8.9 148 5.6 179 6.8

A = urban driving : gram/km : litre/100 km B = extra-urban driving

372 09 Specifications

Fuel 09

C = combined driving • High speed results in increased wind resis- See further information and more advice on tance. pages 14 and 284. NOTE • Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, See page 288 for general information on fuel. weather and the condition of the car. If the consumption and emission data is missing then it is included in the enclosed Even a combination of the above-mentioned supplement. examples can result in significantly improved consumption. For further information, please Fuel consumption and emissions of refer to the regulations referred to1. carbon dioxide Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise Fuel consumption and emission values in the in a comparison with the EU driving cycles1 1 table above are based on specific EU cycles , which are used in the certification of the car that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic and on which the consumption figures in the version and without extra equipment. The car's table are based. weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, To bear in mind increases fuel consumption and carbon diox- Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce ide emissions. consumption: There are several reasons for increased fuel • Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel- consumption compared with the table's val- eration as well as braking too hard. ues. Examples of this are: • Drive with the correct air pressure in the • The driver's driving style. tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre If the customer has specified wheels larger • pressure table on page 375. than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version, then resistance increa- • Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump- ses. tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.

1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - Cars with the D5 engine and 6-speed manual transmission or DRIVe engine and 6-speed manual transmission, are started in 2nd gear. The value for combined driving, which is given in the table, according to legislation, is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving. CO2 emission - to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions from the two drive cycles, the exhaust gases are collected. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.

373 09 Specifications

09 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure

Approved dimensions shows all approved combinations of wheel drive (AWD) and the type of transmission is In certain countries not all approved dimen- rims and tyres, and the lowest permitted load needed to read the table. For information with sions are indicated by the registration docu- index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Information on respect to these details, see page 362. engine, front-wheel drive (FWD) or all-wheel ment or other documents. The table below Ⴋ = Approved

Engine FWD/ man/ 235/60R18 235/55R19 AWD aut 235/65R17 8Jx18x55 8Jx19x55 255/45R20 LIA SSB 7.5Jx17x55 7.5Jx18x55 7.5Jx19x55 8Jx20x55

D5 D5244T11 AWD man 101 V Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ

D5 D5244T15 AWD aut 101 V Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ

D3 D5244T17 AWD man/aut 101 H Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ

D3 / DRIVe D5204T3 FWD man/aut 101 H Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ

3.2 B6324S5 AWD aut 101 V Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ

T6 B6304T4 AWD aut 101 V Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ

T5 B4204T7 FWD aut 101 V Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ Ⴋ

A Lowest permitted load index (LI). The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. For more information, see page 311. B Lowest permitted speed rating (SS). The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. For more information, see page 311.

374 09 Specifications

Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure 09

Approved tyre pressures

NOTE All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.

Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA (km/h) Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear (kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) 235/65 R 17 0 - 160 240 240 270 270 270 235/60 R 18 All engines 235/55 R 19 160 + 240 240 270 270 - 255/45 R 20

Temporary Spare Tyre max. 80 420 420 420 420 -

A: Economical driving. B: In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit pascal: 1 bar = 100 kPa.

375 09 Specifications

09 Electrical system

Electrical system The battery capacity is dependent upon the IMPORTANT The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. equipment level in the vehicle. If the battery is replaced, replace it with a The electrical system is single-pole and uses battery of the same cold start capacity and the chassis and engine casing as a conductor. reserve capacity as the original (see the decal on the battery).

Battery Engine Voltage (V) Cold start capacity, Reserve capacity CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A) (minutes) Petrol (Ethanol) 12 520–800 100–160

Diesel 12 700–800 135–160

Petrol/Diesel with Start/Stop function 12 760A 135

A Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with the Start/Stop function.

NOTE • The battery's container size should be consistent with the original battery's dimensions. • The battery's height is different depending on size.

Eco Start/Stop DRIVe* For information on batteries in cars with Eco Start/Stop DRIVe, see page 342.

376 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Specifications

Type approval 09

Remote control system Country Radar system Country BR Country A, B, CY, Singapore CZ, D, DK, Delphi hereby certifies E, EST, F, that this remote control key FIN, GB, system conforms to the GR, H, I, IDA: Infocomm Development essential characteristic Authority of Singapore. IRL, L, LT, requirements and other rele- RC LV, M, NL, vant regulations of directive CCAB06LP1940T4 Brazil P, PL, S, 1999/5/EC. SK, SLO

IS, LI, N, CH

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15, Germany R-LPD1-03-0151

377 09 Specifications

09 Type approval

Bluetooth Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity) Country Countries in the EU:

Exporting country: Japan Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc. Type of equipment: Bluetooth device For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing

378 09 Specifications

Type approval 09

Country

Czech Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento Bluetooth Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými Republic: ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.

Denmark: Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Bluetooth Module overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Germany: Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät Bluetooth Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

379 09 Specifications

09 Type approval

Country

Estonia: Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

UK Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Spain: Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Greece: ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ Bluetooth Module ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.

France: Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil Bluetooth Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Italy: Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latvia: Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka Bluetooth Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.

Lithuania: Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis Bluetooth Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

Nether- Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere lands: relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Malta: Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth Module jikkonforma mal-ĘtiĒijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oĘrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Hungary: Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

380 09 Specifications

Type approval 09

Country

Poland: Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że Bluetooth Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Portugal: Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovenia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.

Slovakia: Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že Bluetooth Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.

Finland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Bluetooth Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Sweden: Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Iceland: Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

Norway: Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Bluetooth Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

381 09 Specifications

09 Type approval

Country

˖China: ㄀कϝᴵǂ䖯ষ੠⫳ѻॖଚ೼݊ѻકⱘ䇈ᯢк៪Փ⫼᠟ݠЁˈᑨߞॄϟ䗄᳝݇ݙᆍ ᷛᯢ䰘ӊЁ᠔㾘ᅮⱘᡔᴃᣛᷛ੠Փ⫼㣗ೈˈ䇈ᯢ᠔᳝᥻ࠊǃ䇗ᭈঞᓔ݇ㄝՓ⫼ᮍ⊩˗ ƵՓ⫼乥⥛˖*+] Ƶㄝᬜܼ৥䕤ᇘࡳ⥛ (,53 ˖໽㒓๲Ⲟ˘ G%L ᯊ˖싨P:៪싨G%P ǂķ Ƶ᳔໻ࡳ⥛䈅ᆚᑺ˖໽㒓๲Ⲟ˘ G%L ᯊ˖싨G%P0+] (,53 ķ Ƶ䕑乥ᆍ䰤˖SSP ˖ 䘧ᏺᆑҹ໪ֵס ᇍᑨ䕑⊶f 䕤ᇘ ࡳ⥛ Ƶᴖᬷথᇘ • 싨G%PN+] 0+] • 싨G%PN+] *+] • 싨G%P0+] *+] • 싨G%P0+] *+] • 싨G%P0+] ݊ᅗ *+] ϡᕫ᪙㞾᳈ᬍথᇘ乥⥛ǃࡴ໻থᇘࡳ⥛ ࣙᣀ乱໪ࡴ㺙ᇘ乥ࡳ⥛ᬒ໻఼ ˈϡᕫ᪙㞾໪᥹໽㒓៪ᬍ⫼݊ᅗথᇘ໽㒓˗ ℶՓ⫼ˈᑊ䞛প᥾ᮑ⍜䰸ᑆᡄৢᮍৃ㒻㓁ذՓ⫼ᯊϡᕫᇍ৘⾡ড়⊩ⱘ᮴㒓⬉䗮ֵϮࡵѻ⫳᳝ᆇᑆᡄ˗ϔᮺথ⦄᳝ᑆᡄ⦄䈵ᯊˈᑨゟे Փ⫼˗ Փ⫼ᖂࡳ⥛᮴㒓⬉䆒໛ˈᖙ乏ᖡফ৘⾡᮴㒓⬉Ϯࡵⱘᑆᡄ៪ᎹϮǃ⾥ᄺঞए⭫ᑨ⫼䆒໛ⱘ䕤ᇘᑆᡄ˗ ϡᕫ೼亲ᴎ੠ᴎഎ䰘䖥Փ⫼Ǆ

382 09 Specifications

Type approval 09

Country

Taiwan: ܅㧤෷ሽंᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲጥ෻䏺ऄรԼ㦕 รԼԲය ౨Ζפ଺๻ૠհ௽ࢤ֗ޓ᧢෷ࢨפՕף᙮෷Εޓ᧢!լ൓ᖐ۞݁ृشΔֆ׹Ε೸ᇆࢨࠌױ෷୴᙮ሽᖲΔॺᆖ๺פ܅௑հٽᎁᢞڤᆖী รԼ؄ය Ζছႈش࿳۟ྤեឫழֱ൓ᤉᥛࠌޏΔࠀشೖܛمեឫ෼ွழΔ!ᚨڶऄຏॾΙᆖ࿇෼ٽ٤֗եឫڜլ൓ᐙ᥼ଆ౰ش෷୴᙮ሽᖲհࠌפ܅ ሽं!ᘿ୴ࢤሽᖲ๻ໂհեឫΖشऄຏॾࢨՠᄐΕઝᖂ֗᠔᛭ٽ෷୴᙮ሽᖲႊݴ࠹פ܅ᄐհྤᒵሽຏॾΖ܂!ऄຏॾΔਐࠉሽॾऄ๵ࡳٽ

CCAB10LP0230T7

383 09 Specifications

09 Type approval

Country

South 뇗빃뇐ꚯ Korea: Volvo Car Korea 겛뙨녋뤏麗1,$09 뇗빃ꑀ%OXHWRRWK$XGLR1DYLJDWLRQ5DGLR ꑣ鴳ꑀ,$0 ꩫ驛뎗0DUFK Alpine Electronics, Inc Made in Japan

際闘뇐ꚯ Volvo Car Korea ꚷꚯ녋鶔뗣뤏ꍧ껿 ꫗끳겗끤ꩫ霧뼗驣鶔ꚷꚯꠇ黤 런 ꚷꚯ녋鶔뗣際闘꫷뫫 http://www.volvocars.com/kr

ꩧ끤녋늷넓ꩧ뼨 ೇ鲴뼯ꓯꫛ꫟ꟿ鱏놿볇뿷겛閻鱠ꫬ넯녃냷ꕻꈗ넳ꑀ꼃놿隷隻ꇣ鷗꫗ꟿ걟鱏뼛ꯓ꾁거鲃鲟

384 09 Specifications

Type approval 09

Country Singa- pore:

The Uni- ted Arab Emirates:

Jordan: The product that contains the Bluetooth module is approved with the following certification number. BT module certification number: TRC/LPD/2010/4. BT module name: IAM2.1BT PWB EU

385 09 Specifications

09 Type approval

Country South Africa:

Uruguay: This product contains URSEC approved transmitter [module name and model name (IAM2.1 BT PWB EU + BVJG905A, BVVE905A, BVLV905A)]

386 09 Specifications

Type approval 09

Country Jamaica: Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1

Thailand: This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.

Nigeria:

Mexico: Warning "Este equipo opera a titulo secundario, consecuentemente, debe aceptar interferencias perjudiciales incluyendo equipos de la misma clase y puede no causar interferencias a sistemas operando a titulo primario." Bluetooth module installation information This module board is to be installed only by the professional line operator and used only for car audio produced by ALPINE ELEC- TRONICS, INC. When this Bluetooth Module Board is installed in the Car Audio, we shall consider the following points: 1. Since "IAM2.1 BT PWB US" owns its FCC ID/IC Number, we shall affix an exterior label on the outside of the product if the FCC ID is not visible. The exterior label shall use wording such as either "Contains Transmitter Module Board FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B- IAM2101" or "Contains FCC ID: A269ZUA130 / IC: 700B-IAM2101". 2. "IAM2.1 BT PWB US" complies with requirements of subsections 15.19(a)(3) in FCC Rules Part 15 Subpart C. The manual statement 15.19 (a)(3) is included in User Guide of the product. COFETEL No. RCPALIA10-0353

387 09 Specifications

09 Type approval

Country Bot- swana:

Croatia:

388 09 Specifications

Symbols in the display 09

General Symbols in the display Indicator and information symbols in the There are a variety of different symbols in the combined instrument panel Indicator and warning symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into Symbol Meaning Page warning, indicator and information symbols. combined instrument panel Shown below are the most common symbols Symbol Meaning Page Fault in the 76, 91 with their meanings and a reference to where ABL system* in the manual further information can be found. Low oil pres- 78 For more information on symbols and text sure Emissions sys- 76 messages, see pages 76, 78 and 144. tem Parking 78, 134, 136 - Red warning symbol, illuminates when brake Fault in the 76, 131 ABS system a fault has been indicated which could affect Airbags - 21, 78 the safety and/or driveability of the car. At the SRS Rear fog lamp 76, 92 same time an explanatory text is displayed in on the information display. Seatbelt 18, 78 reminder Stability sys- 76, 132, 171, - Yellow information symbol, illuminates tem, DSTC, Hill 301 in combination with text in the information dis- Alternator 78 descent con- play, when a deviation in any of the car's sys- not charging trol, Trailer sta- tems has occurred. The yellow symbol infor- bility assist mation can also illuminate in combination with Fault in the 78, 131 other symbols. brake system Stability sys- 76, 171 Warning, 21, 33, 78, 79, tem, sport safety mode 122 mode Engine pre- 76 heater (diesel)

Low level in 76, 165 fuel tank

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 389 09 Specifications

09 Symbols in the display

Symbol Meaning Page Symbol Meaning Page Symbol Meaning Page Information, 76 Adaptive cruise 185, 188 Start/Stop*, Adap- 127, 185 read display control*, Distance tive cruise control* text Warning* (Distance Alert) Speed limiter 175 Main beam on 76, 91 Adaptive cruise 185, 188 Left-hand 76 control*, Distance Camera sensor*, 193, direction indi- Warning* (Distance Laser sensor* 199, cators Alert) 202, 205 Right-hand 76 Adaptive cruise 185 direction indi- control* Auto Brake*, Dis- 188, cators tance Warning* 193, 199 (Distance Alert), City DRIVe - Start/ 76, 127 Adaptive cruise 180, 187 SafetyTM, Collision Stop* control*, Distance warning system* Warning* (Distance Other information symbols in the Alert) Fuel-driven engine 165 block heater and combined instrument panel 2 Adaptive cruise 180, 187 passenger com-

G02510 Symbol Meaning Page control*, Distance partment heater* Warning* (Distance Adaptive cruise 173, Alert) ABL system* 91 control* 179, 185 Adaptive cruise 179 Adaptive cruise 185 control* control* Fuel filler flap, right- 287 hand side Radar sensor* 185, 188, 199 Low battery 165

390 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Specifications

Symbols in the display 09

Symbol Meaning Page Information symbols in the roof console display Parking brake 136 Symbol Meaning Page

Rain sensor* 99 Seatbelt reminder 19

Driver Alert System* 202 Airbag, passenger 24, 25 seat, activated

Driver Alert Sys- 202, 205 Airbag, passenger 25 tem*, Lane Depar- seat, deactivated ture Warning*

Driver Alert Sys- 205 tem*, Lane Depar- ture Warning*

Driver Alert Sys- 202 tem*, Time for a break

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 391 10 Alphabetical Index

A Air conditioning, AC...... 161 Audio system...... 224 functions...... 231 10 Air distribution...... 156, 163 A/V-AUX input...... 270 overview...... 226 Air quality system IAQS ...... 161 ACC – Adaptive cruise control...... 177 Audio volume ...... 227 Air vents...... 156 Active Bending Lights (ABL)...... 91 phone...... 259 Alarm...... 67 phone/media player...... 259 Active chassis – FOUR-C...... 172 alarm indicator...... 67 ring signal, phone...... 259 Active Xenon headlamps...... 91 alarm signals...... 68 Auto arming...... 67 Adapting driving characteristics...... 172 climate control settings...... 160 checking the alarm...... 52 Adaptive cruise control...... 177 deactivate...... 67 Automatic car washes...... 355 fault tracing...... 184 deactivating a triggered alarm...... 68 Automatic gearbox...... 118 radar sensor...... 183 reduced alarm level...... 68 manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 119 Adaptive cruise control fault tracing...... 184 Alcolock...... 111 towing and recovery...... 302 Additional heater (Diesel)...... 167 trailer...... 297 Allergy and asthma inducing sub- Adjusting headlamp pattern...... 95 stances...... 155 Automatic locking...... 61 halogen headlamp...... 96 All-wheel drive, AWD...... 129 Automatic relocking...... 60 Adjusting the steering wheel...... 89 All Wheel Drive (AWD)...... 129 Auxiliary heater...... 167 Airbag Approach light, duration...... 51, 95 AUX input...... 226, 245 activating/deactivating, PACOS...... 24 AWD, All-wheel drive...... 129 driver's and front passenger side...... 22 Audio key switch off...... 24 headphones socket...... 229 rear control panel...... 229 AIRBAG ...... 22 settings...... 231, 232 B Airbag system ...... 21 surround...... 224, 232 Backrest...... 84 Air conditioning...... 161 audio system ...... 226 general...... 154 front seat, lowering...... 84 Backrest rear seat, lowering...... 87

392 10 Alphabetical Index

Bag holder ...... 292 emergency brake lights...... 92 Catalytic converter...... 288 filling brake fluid...... 330 recovery...... 303 Battery...... 339, 376 10 headphones...... 270 symbols in the combined instrument CD ...... 241 panel...... 131 maintenance...... 339 Centre console...... 146 Remote control ...... 255 Bulbs, see Lighting...... 331 Chassis settings...... 172 remote control key/PCC...... 55 start assistance...... 117 Checking and topping up the coolant..... 328 symbols on the battery...... 340 C Checking the engine oil level...... 325 warning symbols...... 340 Children...... 34 Blind spot (BLIS)...... 213 Calls child safety locks...... 42 incoming...... 258 Blind Spot Information System, BLIS...... 213 child seats and side airbags...... 26 operation...... 258 location in the car...... 34 Bluetooth Camera sensor...... 191, 197 safety...... 34 handsfree ...... 256 media ...... 248 Car care...... 355 Child safety locks...... 66 microphone off ...... 258 Car care, leather upholstery...... 357 Child seat...... 34 streaming audio ...... 248 Cargo area Child seats...... 34 transfer call to mobile ...... 258 cargo cover...... 295 integrated two-stage booster cushion. 40 Bonnet, opening...... 324 lighting...... 94 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 42 Brake and clutch fluid...... 329 loading...... 291 recommended...... 36 mounting points...... 292 size classes for child seats with the ISO- Brake light...... 92 safety grille...... 294 FIX fixture system...... 42 Brakes...... 130 safety net...... 293 upper mounting points for child seats.. 46 anti-lock braking system, ABS...... 130 Cargo cover...... 295 Cigarette lighter socket...... 218 brake light...... 92 brake system...... 130 Car upholstery...... 357 City Safety™...... 190 electric parking brake...... 134 Car wash...... 355 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 130

393 10 Alphabetical Index

Cleaning controls Display lighting...... 90 automatic car washes...... 355 centre console ...... 227, 277 10 Distance Warning...... 187 car wash...... 355 Controls Dolby Surround Pro Logic II...... 224 rims...... 356 centre console...... 146 seatbelts...... 358 Door mirrors...... 104 Cooling system...... 284 upholstery...... 357 Driver Alert Control...... 201 Crash, see Collision...... 33 Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)...... 155 Driver Alert System...... 201 Cruise control...... 173 Climate control...... 154 Driving...... 284 general...... 154 Curtain cooling system...... 284 sensors...... 154 panorama roof...... 108 with the tailgate open...... 285 Clock, setting...... 80 CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)...... 155 with trailer...... 296 Driving in water...... 284 CO2 emissions ...... 372 Collision...... 33 Driving with a trailer D towball load...... 364 Collision warning...... 194, 195 towing capacity...... 364 Collision warning system DAB Radio...... 238 DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 171 radar sensor...... 183, 190, 195 Deadlock DVD ...... 241 Collision Warning with Auto Brake*...... 194 deactivation...... 64 temporary deactivation...... 64 Colour code, paint...... 359 Deadlocks...... 64 Combined instrument panel...... 144 E Defroster...... 161 Comfort inside the passenger compartment...... 217 Diesel...... 289 ECC, electronic climate control...... 157 Compass...... 107 Diesel particle filter...... 290 Economical driving...... 284 calibration...... 107 Dipstick, electronic...... 327 ECO pressure...... 315 Condensation in headlamps...... 355 Direction indicators...... 93 Eco Start/Stop DRIVe...... 124 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 121

394 10 Alphabetical Index

Electrical socket...... 219 filter...... 325 Fluids and oils...... 370 cargo area...... 292 oil grade...... 368 Fog lamps 10 front seat...... 219 Engine specifications...... 367 rear...... 92 Electric parking brake...... 134 Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's Foot brake...... 130 low battery voltage...... 134 manual...... 14 FOUR-C – Active chassis...... 172 releasing automatically...... 135 Error messages releasing manually...... 135 FSC, environmental labelling...... 14 Driver Alert Control...... 202 Fuel...... 288 Emergency equipment Lane Departure Warning...... 205 fuel consumption...... 372 warning triangle...... 316 see Messages and symbols...... 136, 185 fuel economy...... 315 Emergency puncture repair...... 317 Error messages in BLIS...... 215 fuel filter...... 289 Emissions of carbon dioxide...... 290 Error messages in Distance Alert...... 188 Fuse box...... 344 Engine Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con- glovebox...... 349 overheating...... 296 trol...... 185 Fuses...... 344 starting...... 115 ETC, electronic temperature control ...... 158 box in cargo area...... 352 Engine block heater Expectant mothers, seatbelt...... 19 changing...... 344 fuel-driven...... 164 cold zone...... 353 External dimensions...... 364 Engine braking, automatic...... 132 general...... 344 Engine compartment relay/fuse box in engine compart- coolant...... 328 F ment...... 345 oil...... 325 Start/Stop...... 353 overview...... 325 Fan...... 159 Fuse table power steering fluid...... 330 fuses in engine compartment...... 346 Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 192, 198 Engine drag control ...... 170 First aid equipment...... 316 Engine oil...... 325, 368 First aid kit ...... 316 adverse driving conditions...... 368 capacities...... 368 Fluids, capacities...... 370

395 10 Alphabetical Index

G Headlamp pattern adjustment I Active Bending Lights ...... 96 10 Gearbox...... 118 Headlamps...... 331 IAQS – Interior Air Quality System...... 155 automatic...... 118 Headphones IC – Inflatable Curtain...... 28 manual...... 118 battery replacement...... 270 Ignition keys...... 82 Gear selector inhibitor...... 120 wireless...... 269 Immobiliser...... 50 Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- Headphones socket...... 229, 268, 270 Indicator lamps, PCC...... 52 gagement...... 121 Head restraint Inflatable curtain...... 28 Geartronic...... 119 centre seat, rear...... 86 Information and warning symbols...... 76 Glass lowering...... 86, 87 Information button, PCC...... 52 laminated/reinforced...... 102 Heated washer nozzles...... 100 Information displays...... 75 Global opening...... 155 Heating...... 160 Glovebox...... 218 rearview and door mirrors...... 105 Infotainment system ...... 224 locking...... 61 rear window...... 105 basic functions ...... 227 menus ...... 277 Gross vehicle weight...... 364 seats...... 159 overview ...... 226 Heat-reflecting windscreen...... 102 GSI - Gear selector assistance...... 125 source buttons ...... 226 High engine temperature...... 296 voice control...... 264 High-pressure headlamp washing...... 100 H Inlaid mats...... 218 Hill Descent Control...... 132 Instrument lighting, see Lighting...... 90 Hazard warning flashers...... 93 HomeLink ...... 138 Instrument overview HDC...... 132 Home safe lighting...... 95 left-hand drive...... 72 right-hand drive...... 74 Headlamp levelling...... 90 Hoot...... 89 Instruments and controls...... 72 Headlamp pattern, adjusting...... 95 Horn...... 89 Interior lighting, see Lighting...... 93

396 10 Alphabetical Index

Interior rearview mirror...... 105 L direction indicators...... 333 automatic dimming...... 106 main beam, Xenon lamp...... 333 10 Intermittent wiping...... 99 Labels...... 362 main beam halogen...... 333 number plate lighting...... 335 iPod, connection...... 245 Laminated glass...... 102 side marker lamps...... 334 Lamps, see Lighting...... 331 vanity mirror...... 336 Lane Departure Control...... 204 Light switches...... 90 J Laser sensor...... 11 Loading Jack...... 314 Leather upholstery, washing instructions 357 cargo area...... 291 Lighting...... 331 general...... 291 Active Xenon headlamps...... 91 mounting points...... 292 K approach light, duration...... 51, 95 roof load...... 291 automatic lighting, passenger compart- Lock confirmation ...... 50 ment...... 94 Kerb weight...... 364 Locking/unlocking bulbs, specifications...... 336 Key...... 50 inside...... 60 controls...... 93 tailgate...... 61 Key blade...... 53 display lighting...... 90 Keyless drive...... 57, 115 headlamp levelling...... 90 Locks automatic locking...... 60 Keyless start (keyless drive)...... 57, 115 home safe lighting...... 95 in passenger compartment...... 93 locking...... 60 Keypad in the steering instrument lighting...... 90 unlocking...... 60 wheel...... 89, 147, 173, 228 main/dipped beam...... 90 Lubricants...... 370 Key positions...... 82 position/parking lamps...... 92 Lubricants, capacities...... 370 rear fog lamp...... 92 Lighting, bulb replacement...... 331 cargo area...... 335 dipped beam halogen...... 332

397 10 Alphabetical Index

M Messages and symbols MY CAR...... 146 Collision Warning with Auto 10 Main/dipped beam, see Lightning...... 90 Brake...... 193, 199 Maintenance Distance Alert...... 188 O rustproofing...... 356 Driver Alert Control...... 202 Lane Departure Warning...... 205 Oil, see also Engine oil...... 368 Making calls...... 258 Messages and symbols in the Adaptive Oil level low...... 325 Manual gearbox...... 118 cruise control...... 185 GSI - Gear selector assistance...... 125 Overheating...... 296 towing and recovery...... 302 Messages in BLIS...... 215 Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 14 Manual gear positions (Geartronic)...... 119 Messages in the combined instrument panel...... 144 Max. roof load ...... 364 Messages in the information display...... 171 P Media, Bluetooth ...... 248 Meters in the combined instrument panel media player ...... 241 fuel gauge...... 76 PACOS...... 24 Memory function in seats...... 85 speedometer...... 76 PACOS, switch...... 24 Menu navigation, Infotainment ...... 277 tachometer...... 76 Paintwork Menu navigation RSE...... 274 Misting...... 161 colour code...... 359 attending to the windows...... 154 damage and touch-up...... 358 Menus/Functions...... 148 condensation in headlamps...... 355 Panel lighting...... 90 Menus and messages...... 144 remove with the air vents...... 163 Panic function...... 51 Menu structure, Infotainment ...... 277 timer function...... 161 Panorama roof Menu structures RSE...... 275 Mobile phone curtain...... 108 connect...... 259 Menu system MY CAR...... 146 opening and closing...... 108 handsfree...... 256 ventilation position...... 109 register phone...... 257 voice control...... 264 Park assist camera...... 210

398 10 Alphabetical Index

Parking assistance...... 207 Polishing...... 356 Rear bulbs parking assistance sensors...... 209 location...... 334 Position/parking lamps...... 92 10 Parking brake...... 134 Power panorama roof...... 108 Rear control panel audio system...... 229 Parking heater...... 164 Power seat...... 85 battery and fuel...... 164 Rear-seat entertainment...... 268 Powershift gearbox...... 121, 302 parking on a hill...... 164 Rear TV screens...... 268 time setting...... 166 Power windows...... 102 Rearview and door mirrors Puncture, see Tyres...... 314 Passenger compartment...... 217 compass...... 107 Passenger compartment filter...... 155 door...... 104 Passenger compartment heater Q electrically retractable...... 104 fuel-driven...... 164 heating...... 105 interior...... 105 PCC – Personal Car Communicator Queue Assist...... 181 Rear window, defrosting...... 105 functions...... 51 Queue Assistant...... 181 range...... 52, 53 Recirculation...... 161 Pedestrian detection...... 194 Recommendations during driving...... 284 Petrol grade...... 288 R Recommended child seats, table...... 36 Phone Recovery...... 304 Radar sensor...... 177 connect...... 259 Refrigerant...... 154 handsfree...... 256 limitations...... 183 Refuelling...... 287 incoming calls...... 258 Radio ...... 234 fuel cap...... 287 making calls...... 258 AM/FM ...... 234 fuel filler flap, electrical opening...... 287 phone book...... 260 DAB ...... 238 fuel filler flap, manual opening...... 287 phone book, shortcut...... 260 Menu structure ...... 277 refuelling...... 287 receiving a call...... 258 Rain sensor...... 99 register phone...... 257 Relay/fuse box: see Fuses...... 344 voice control...... 264

399 10 Alphabetical Index

Remote control ...... 254 S Soot filter...... 290 battery replacement ...... 255 10 Soot filter full...... 290 Safety grille...... 294 Remote control, HomeLink Spare wheel...... 314 programmable ...... 138 Safety mode...... 33 temporary spare...... 314 Remote control key...... 50 Safety net...... 293 Spin control...... 170 battery replacement...... 55 Seat, see Seats...... 84 Spin control function...... 170 detachable key blade...... 53 Seatbelt functions...... 51 Stability and traction control system...... 170 rear seat...... 19 range...... 52 Stability system...... 170 seatbelt tensioner...... 20 Remote control key system, type appro- Stains...... 357 Seatbelt reminder...... 19 val...... 377 Start assistance...... 117 Seatbelts...... 18 Resetting the door mirrors...... 105 Steering force, speed related...... 172 Seats...... 84 Resetting the power windows...... 103 head restraints, rear...... 86 Steering force level, see Steering force... 172 Retractable power door mirrors...... 104 heating...... 159 Steering lock...... 116 Reverse gear inhibitor...... 118 lowering the front backrest...... 84 Steering wheel...... 89 Rims lowering the rear backrest...... 87 keypad...... 89, 147, 173, 228 cleaning...... 356 power seats...... 85 keypad, adaptive cruise control...... 179 Roll-over protection...... 31 Securing loads (Loading)...... 292 steering wheel adjustment...... 89 Roof load, max. weight ...... 364 Sensus...... 81 Stone chips and scratches...... 358 ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)...... 31 Service programme...... 324 Storage spaces in the passenger compartment...... 217 ROPS (Roll Over Protection System) (Roll- Set time interval...... 187 over protection)...... 31 Side airbags...... 26 Surround...... 224, 232 RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system... 268 Signal input, external...... 226, 245 Symbols...... 171 indicator symbols...... 76 Rustproofing...... 356 SIPS bags...... 26

400 10 Alphabetical Index

information symbols...... 76 Towbar, see Towing equipment...... 297 Tyres warning symbols...... 76 dimensions...... 374 Towing...... 302 10 Symbols and messages towing eye...... 303 direction of rotation...... 308 driving characteristics...... 308 Collision Warning with Auto Towing capacity...... 364 Brake...... 193, 199 maintenance...... 308 Towing equipment...... 297 Distance Alert...... 188 pressure...... 315, 374 specifications...... 298 Driver Alert Control...... 202 puncture repair...... 317 Lane Departure Warning...... 205 Towing eye...... 303 specifications...... 310, 374 speed ratings...... 311 Symbols and messages in the Adaptive Trailer...... 296 tread wear indicators...... 309 cruise control...... 185 cable...... 296 driving with a trailer...... 296 winter tyres...... 310 snaking...... 301 T Trailer stability assist ...... 170 U Trailer Stability Assist...... 301 Tailgate...... 62 Transmission...... 118 Unlocking locking/unlocking...... 61 from the inside...... 60 open...... 63 Transponder...... 102 from the outside...... 60 Temperature Trip computer...... 168 USB, connection...... 245 actual temperature...... 154 Trip meter...... 79 Temperature control...... 160 TSA - trailer stability assist ...... 170, 301 Timer...... 161 TV...... 251 V Tools...... 314 Type approval, remote control key sys- Vanity mirror...... 94, 219 Total airing function...... 61, 155 tem...... 377 Ventilation...... 156 Towbar Type designation...... 362 detachable, attachment ...... 299 Vibration damper...... 297 detachable, removal ...... 300 Voice control, mobile phone...... 264

401 10 Alphabetical Index

Volvo Sensus...... 81 Washers Winter tyres...... 310 rear window...... 100 10 Wiper blades...... 337 washer fluid, filling...... 338 changing...... 337 W windscreen...... 100 cleaning...... 338 Water and dirt-repellent coating...... 102 replacing, rear window...... 338 Warning lamp Water-repellent surface, cleaning...... 356 service position...... 337 adaptive cruise control...... 177 Wipers and washing...... 99 collision warning system...... 195 Waxing...... 356 stability and traction control system. . 170 Weights Wireless headphones...... 269 Warning lamps kerb weight...... 364 airbags SRS...... 78 Wheels alternator not charging...... 78 changing...... 312 fault in brake system...... 78 installation...... 313 low oil pressure...... 78 rims...... 309 parking brake applied...... 78 snow chains...... 310 seatbelt reminder...... 78 spare wheel...... 314 warning...... 78 Wheels and tyres...... 308 Warning sound Whiplash injury, WHIPS...... 29 collision warning system...... 195 WHIPS Warning symbol, airbag system...... 21 child seat/booster cushion...... 29 Warning triangle...... 316 whiplash injury...... 29 Washer fluid, filling...... 338 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 102 Washer nozzles, heated...... 100 Windscreen washing...... 100 Windscreen wipers...... 99 rain sensor...... 99 Winter driving...... 285

402